<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Tony37</id>
	<title>Sugar Labs - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Tony37"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/go/Special:Contributions/Tony37"/>
	<updated>2026-05-30T15:05:24Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.43.0</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Activities_without_Repositories&amp;diff=100322</id>
		<title>Activities without Repositories</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Activities_without_Repositories&amp;diff=100322"/>
		<updated>2017-05-25T10:26:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tony37: Created page with &amp;quot;This page shows activities on ASLO with no known git repository. The first field is the ASLO addon id and the second, the bundle name.   * 4444 +ciudadano-2.xo * 4562 acocinar...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This page shows activities on ASLO with no known git repository. The first field is the ASLO addon id and the second, the bundle name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* 4444 +ciudadano-2.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4562 acocinarseadicho-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4557 biodiv-6.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4371 boxes-22.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4235 breakout-80601.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4602 broadway-3.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4438 buscar_actividades-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4657 butia_ax12_id-4.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4621 butia_firmware-9.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4457 butialo-5.xo &lt;br /&gt;
* 4688 buuble_toon_top-150.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4744 carrito-3.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4652 carteando_-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4397 castle-8.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4712 cazaproblemas_3-10.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4365 ceibalradio-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4777 cerminal-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4499 chrome-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4645 chutar-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4295 clics_player-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4753 comodo-3.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4372 conozco_actividades-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4442 conozco_elementos_quiímicos-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4316 conozco_numeros-9.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4649 contacts-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4662 contando_con_jamcito-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4771 cordova_angular_paint-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4493 crikey-61.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4760 crossword-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4620 cuadraditos-3 .xo &lt;br /&gt;
* 4769 dj_jarm-the_farmer-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4473 el_secreto_de_graken-4.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4379 eleusis-6.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4505 end_game-28.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4265 escribirespacial-61.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4698 espiritualidad_para_ni__os_1-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4699 espiritualidad_para_ni__os_2-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4700 espiritualidad_para_ni__os_3-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4701 espiritualidad_para_ni__os_4-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4702 espiritualidad_para_ni__os_5-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4703 espiritualidad_para_ni__os_6-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4574 evil-4.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4594 fantascar-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4788 farmer-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4262 firefox-6.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4758 football-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4284 geogebra-7.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4356 geojam-3.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4267 geoquiz-5.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4436 gnumeric-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4580 gogonews-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4724 gravatar-4.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4665 gtk_draw_area_example-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4651 gvsig_batovi_map_viewer-5.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4332 help_arabic-5.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4417 ideasnds-2.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4362 idle-2.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4601 image_thumbnail-8.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4710 incursion-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4386 insectos-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4449 instalador_java_de_unico_uso-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4723 install_sugar_web_services-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4381 jam_game_boy_advance-2.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4435 jamactivityflash-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4474 jamcalibre-2.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4355 jamedia-9.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4716 jamediaeditor-2.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4598 jamedialector-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4714 jamediapygihack-0.0.2.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4678 jamediaterminal-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4542 jamediavideoestudio-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4357 jamesene-2.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4572 jamultiplos-5.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4554 jpeces-tangram-6.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4407 juani_downloader-2.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4330 juegos_flash-2.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4770 ka_view-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4224 kaleidoscope-12.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4260 karma-2.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4759 kunfu-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4495 landmine__english-2.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4496 landmine__khmer-2.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4740 learn_to_code-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4430 learn-61.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4269 leer_pendrive-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4089 library-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4256 lines-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4441 madagascar-2.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4272 mafh-3.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4722 manage_homeviews-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4445 mapa_ceibal-5.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4202 mapstats-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4416 mathme-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4633 mathtest-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4727 maze_web-2.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4762 measurebots-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4624 measurebutia-42.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4504 melloworld-3.gtk3.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4462 minecraft-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4448 mini_vmac-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4410 motioncapture-3.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4487 mousecam-4.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4755 neko_arcoíris-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4743 neko-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4369 nes-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4650 new_patterns-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4248 nijafable-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4538 oct-29.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4374 oggconvert-1.xo &lt;br /&gt;
* 4422 ominoes-9.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4241 ooo4kids-3.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4439 ooo4kidses-3.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4440 ooo4kidsfr-3.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4634 oopsy-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4305 open_video_chat-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4503 operajam-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4677 participaccion-2.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4500 pitivijam-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4385 pj_lite-5.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4384 pj-22.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4451 pmj-22.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4470 pursuit-22.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4790 pycut-1.0.1.xo &lt;br /&gt;
* 4592 pygihack-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4476 python_tute-29.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4530 quake-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4198 Quiz-18.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4375 radio-9.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4382 rectangles-7.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4614 remember-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4725 retroscope-2.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4549 root_convert-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4787 safariactivity-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4707 sash-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4715 sdownloader-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4426 shapes-7.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4531 shock_therapy-6.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4273 simcity-4.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4472 simcom-26.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4671 sketchometry-3.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4502 skype-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4670 skytime-3.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4739 slides-2.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4460 sokoban-23.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4792 solar_system-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4468 soma-25.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4301 sonata-11.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4443 sort_game-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4679 spirituality_for_kids_1-3.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4680 spirituality_for_kids_2-3.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4681 spirituality_for_kids_3-3.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4684 spirituality_for_kids_4-3.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4686 spirituality_for_kids_5-3.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4685 spirituality_for_kids_6-3.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4236 stackattack-80601.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4541 star_catcher-32.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4494 sugar_file_manager-2.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4619 sugar_network-0.7.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4672 super_chef-2.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4718 surfingnow-2.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4655 swift_feet-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4794 synonym_antonym_activity-1.0.1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4454 t2-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4776 tank_battle-1.xo &lt;br /&gt;
* 4733 tank_operation-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4520 terronesweeper-2.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4366 tessellations-8.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4292 tetris_mat-2.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4471 textdungeon-3.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4080 theorie-147.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4344 Tic-tac-toe-2.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4660 tixo-2.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4668 tortuga_de_mexico-179.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4458 totem-2.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4398 trails-6.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4537 trans-26.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4298 turtle_art_mini-195.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4341 turtle_machine-7.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4742 turtle_nutrition-204.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4757 turtleblocks3d-209.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4434 turtlebots-29.xo   &lt;br /&gt;
* 4088 tux_paint-6.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4203 update-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4216 usb_creator-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4721 valorar-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4596 vascolet-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4630 vp__vonskeet_productions_-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4525 weigh-23.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4697 welcomeweb-2.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4799 what_is-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4547 wikipediasimpleen-37.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4296 wine-23.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4666 word_chimes-2.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4801 wormgame-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4223 x2o-9.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4348 xa-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4490 xo_vnc_viewer-1.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4481 xoscope-9.xo&lt;br /&gt;
* 4501 yum_downloader-4.xo&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tony37</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Get_sugar&amp;diff=100206</id>
		<title>Get sugar</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Get_sugar&amp;diff=100206"/>
		<updated>2017-04-26T04:55:13Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tony37: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two ways to use Sugar on your own computer. SOAS (Sugar on a Stick) is a USB flash drive with Sugar which can be booted on your computer but does not change anything on your hard drive. The second way is to free some space on your hard drive and install a distribution of GNU/Linux which supports Sugar. The method allows you to choose your normal operating system or GNU/Linux with Sugar during boot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==&#039;&#039;&#039;Sugar on a Stick&#039;&#039;&#039;==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== MS Windows ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|width=&amp;quot;160px&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;|[[File:Windows.gif|left|link=Sugar on a Stick/Windows]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:USB flash drive.jpg|left|156px|link=Sugar on a Stick/Downloads]]&lt;br /&gt;
|valign=top|&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Download&#039;&#039;&#039; the latest [[Sugar on a Stick/Downloads | Sugar on a Stick]] .iso file.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Load&#039;&#039;&#039;: Insert a USB flash drive (or SD Card) with 2 GB or more of free space into your computer and launch Rufus to create a Sugar-on-a-Stick bootable image.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Boot&#039;&#039;&#039;: Insert the USB stick into a USB port on your computer. Set the option to &amp;quot;boot from USB&amp;quot; in your computer&#039;s &amp;lt;abbr title=&amp;quot;Basic Input/Output System&amp;quot;&amp;gt;BIOS&amp;lt;/abbr&amp;gt; setup, and then start up the computer.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
=== GNU/Linux ===&lt;br /&gt;
{|style=&amp;quot;width: 800px;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|width=&amp;quot;160px&amp;quot; valign=top|&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;linkgroup&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Gnulinux.png|link=Sugar on a Stick/Linux]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Download Mirabell.png|left|link=Sugar on a Stick/Downloads]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:USB flash drive.jpg|156px|link=Sugar on a Stick/Downloads]]&lt;br /&gt;
|valign=top|&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Download&#039;&#039;&#039; the latest [[Sugar on a Stick/Downloads | Sugar on a Stick]] .iso file.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Load&#039;&#039;&#039;: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Here is a simple way to create a SOAS usb flash drive.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## Open a shell (command line interpreter)&lt;br /&gt;
## Type &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;df -Th&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. This shows all of the mounted partitions (on your computer&#039;s hard drive.)&lt;br /&gt;
## Insert a USB flash drive (or SD Card) with 2 GB or more of free space into your computer&lt;br /&gt;
## After a few moment type &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;df -Th&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; again. You should see an added line for your USB drive. Check the size of the drive (e.g. 3.7GB for a 4GB drive) and its type: vfat to confirm this line refers to your usb flash drive. The first field on this line, e.g. /dev/sdb1, identifies the partition. For dd command, you will use /dev/sdb [this field without the partition number]. &lt;br /&gt;
## type &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;cd ~/Downloads&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Then type &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ls Fedora*.iso&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; Assuming you downloaded to the Downloads folder, this will show the SOAS iso.&lt;br /&gt;
## Type &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sudo dd if=Fedora-SoaS-Live-x86_64-25-1.3.iso of=/dev/sdb bs=1M&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with the correct if (input file) and of (output device). The dd command erases the &#039;of&#039; device so make sure it doesn&#039;t say /dev/sda which would erase your computer&#039;s hard drive!!! Also make sure you have saved any valuable information on the usb flash drive.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Boot&#039;&#039;&#039;: Insert the USB stick into a bootable USB port on your computer. Set the option to &amp;quot;boot from USB&amp;quot; in your computer&#039;s &amp;lt;abbr title=&amp;quot;Basic Input/Output System&amp;quot;&amp;gt;BIOS&amp;lt;/abbr&amp;gt; setup, and then start up the computer.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
=== Apple Mac OS X ===&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|width=&amp;quot;160px&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;|[[File:Apple.gif|link=Macintosh]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;linkgroup&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Download Mirabell.png|left|link=Sugar on a Stick/Downloads]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:USB flash drive.jpg|156px|link=Sugar on a Stick/Downloads]]&lt;br /&gt;
|valign=top|&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Download&#039;&#039;&#039; the latest [[Sugar on a Stick/Downloads|Sugar on a Stick]] .iso file.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Load&#039;&#039;&#039;: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Here is a simple way to load a bootable USB on a Mac.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## Enter the Terminal: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;/Applications/Utilities/Terminal&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
## Type &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;diskutil list&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. You should see all the disk drives you have inserted into your computer.&lt;br /&gt;
## Insert the disk drive to which you want to write Sugar on a Stick.&lt;br /&gt;
## Type &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;diskutil list&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; again. You should see that your USB drive has been added to the list. If not, wait a while and repeat.&lt;br /&gt;
## Type &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hdiutil convert -format UDRW -o &amp;amp;lt;&amp;lt;i&amp;gt;Sugar on a Stick image file&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt;&amp;amp;gt;.img &amp;amp;lt;&amp;lt;i&amp;gt;Sugar on a Stick image file&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt;&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; to convert the image into a bootable format.&lt;br /&gt;
## Type &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sudo diskutil unmountDisk &amp;amp;lt;&amp;lt;i&amp;gt;device name&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt;&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; to unmount the disk (it will not be ejected).&lt;br /&gt;
## Type &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sudo dd if=&amp;amp;lt;&amp;lt;i&amp;gt;Sugar on a Stick image file&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt;&amp;amp;gt;.img.dmg of=&amp;amp;lt;&amp;lt;i&amp;gt;device name&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt;&amp;amp;gt; bs=1m&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sudo&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will ask for your password, and then &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;dd&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will start writing the disk file.&lt;br /&gt;
## When &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;dd&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; finishes writing the disk file, type &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sudo diskutil eject &amp;amp;lt;&amp;lt;i&amp;gt;device name&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt;&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Boot&#039;&#039;&#039;: Insert the USB stick into a USB port on your computer, then reboot and press and hold the Option key while rebooting. You should see a list of all the EFI-recognizable USB drives that can be bootstrapped. If Sugar on a Stick is not one such drive, it cannot be bootstrapped: you need rEFInd (a fork of rEFIt).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&#039;&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;&#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SOAS sticks created with Windows or GNU/Linux can be booted on PC computers. SOAS sticks created using an Apple computer can be booted on an Apple computer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==&#039;&#039;&#039;Installing Sugar on your computer&#039;s hard drive&#039;&#039;&#039;==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The procedure to install Sugar is:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Free some space on the computer&#039;s hard drive&lt;br /&gt;
## For Windows, shrink the size of the D: partition or, if no D: partition, the C: partition. &lt;br /&gt;
## For GNU/Linux, use gparted, select the partition, choose move/resize, and add space after the partition (the size of the partition will be reduced accordingly). &lt;br /&gt;
## Sugar was designed for systems with very limited storage capacity. To test Sugar a space of 10GB should be plenty. For daily use a larger space may be needed. &lt;br /&gt;
# Install GNU/Linux in that space&lt;br /&gt;
# Add the latest version of Sugar (0.110)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To use Sugar:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Boot the computer choosing GNU/Linux&lt;br /&gt;
# Before entering the password, click on the &#039;desktop&#039; icon. Choose Sugar.&lt;br /&gt;
# To quit&lt;br /&gt;
## switch to the Home View (key f4)&lt;br /&gt;
## right-click on the XO icon in the center of the screen&lt;br /&gt;
## click on log out or shutdown as appropriate&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ubuntu-small.jpg|link=Ubuntu]]&lt;br /&gt;
===Ubuntu 17.04 Zesty===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| style=&amp;quot;text-align: center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# The latest version of Sugar (0.110) can be installed by typing:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sudo apt install sucrose&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:Debian-small.jpg|link=Debian]]&lt;br /&gt;
===Debian GNU/Linux 9 &amp;quot;Stretch&amp;quot;===&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
# install Debian &#039;&#039;Jessie&#039;&#039; in the usual way, see [https://www.debian.org/ debian.org],&lt;br /&gt;
# change &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;/etc/apt/sources.list&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; to use the Debian &#039;&#039;Stretch&#039;&#039; testing release,&lt;br /&gt;
##&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sudo sed -i &#039;s/jessie/stretch/g&#039; /etc/apt/sources.list&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
##&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sudo apt update&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
##&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sudo apt dist-upgrade&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# install Sugar,&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## type &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sudo apt install sucrose&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tony37</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Get_sugar&amp;diff=100205</id>
		<title>Get sugar</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Get_sugar&amp;diff=100205"/>
		<updated>2017-04-26T04:25:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tony37: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two ways to use Sugar on your own computer. SOAS (Sugar on a Stick) is a USB flash drive with Sugar which can be booted on your computer but does not change anything on your hard drive. The second way is to free some space on your hard drive and install a distribution of GNU/Linux which supports Sugar. The method allows you to choose your normal operating system or GNU/Linux with Sugar during boot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==&#039;&#039;&#039;Sugar on a Stick&#039;&#039;&#039;==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== MS Windows ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|width=&amp;quot;160px&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;|[[File:Windows.gif|left|link=Sugar on a Stick/Windows]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:USB flash drive.jpg|left|156px|link=Sugar on a Stick/Downloads]]&lt;br /&gt;
|valign=top|&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Download&#039;&#039;&#039; the latest [[Sugar on a Stick/Downloads | Sugar on a Stick]] .iso file.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Load&#039;&#039;&#039;: Insert a USB flash drive (or SD Card) with 2 GB or more of free space into your computer and launch Rufus to create a Sugar-on-a-Stick bootable image.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Boot&#039;&#039;&#039;: Insert the USB stick into a USB port on your computer. Set the option to &amp;quot;boot from USB&amp;quot; in your computer&#039;s &amp;lt;abbr title=&amp;quot;Basic Input/Output System&amp;quot;&amp;gt;BIOS&amp;lt;/abbr&amp;gt; setup, and then start up the computer.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
=== GNU/Linux ===&lt;br /&gt;
{|style=&amp;quot;width: 800px;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|width=&amp;quot;160px&amp;quot; valign=top|&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;linkgroup&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Gnulinux.png|link=Sugar on a Stick/Linux]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Download Mirabell.png|left|link=Sugar on a Stick/Downloads]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:USB flash drive.jpg|156px|link=Sugar on a Stick/Downloads]]&lt;br /&gt;
|valign=top|&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Download&#039;&#039;&#039; the latest [[Sugar on a Stick/Downloads | Sugar on a Stick]] .iso file.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Load&#039;&#039;&#039;: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Here is a simple way to create a SOAS usb flash drive.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## Open a shell (command line interpreter)&lt;br /&gt;
## Type &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;df -Th&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. This shows all of the mounted partitions (on your computer&#039;s hard drive.)&lt;br /&gt;
## Insert a USB flash drive (or SD Card) with 2 GB or more of free space into your computer&lt;br /&gt;
## After a few moment type &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;df -Th&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; again. You should see an added line for your USB drive. Check the size of the drive (e.g. 3.7GB for a 4GB drive) and its type: vfat to confirm this line refers to your usb flash drive. The first field on this line, e.g. /dev/sdb1, identifies the partition. For dd command, you will use /dev/sdb [this field without the partition number]. &lt;br /&gt;
## type &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;cd ~/Downloads&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Then type &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ls Fedora*.iso&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; Assuming you downloaded to the Downloads folder, this will show the SOAS iso.&lt;br /&gt;
## Type &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sudo dd if=Fedora-SoaS-Live-x86_64-25-1.3.iso of=/dev/sdb bs=1M&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with the correct if (input file) and of (output device). The dd command erases the &#039;of&#039; device so make sure it doesn&#039;t say /dev/sda which would erase your computer&#039;s hard drive!!! Also make sure you have saved any valuable information on the usb flash drive.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Boot&#039;&#039;&#039;: Insert the USB stick into a bootable USB port on your computer. Set the option to &amp;quot;boot from USB&amp;quot; in your computer&#039;s &amp;lt;abbr title=&amp;quot;Basic Input/Output System&amp;quot;&amp;gt;BIOS&amp;lt;/abbr&amp;gt; setup, and then start up the computer.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
=== Apple Mac OS X ===&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|width=&amp;quot;160px&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;|[[File:Apple.gif|link=Macintosh]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;linkgroup&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Download Mirabell.png|left|link=Sugar on a Stick/Downloads]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:USB flash drive.jpg|156px|link=Sugar on a Stick/Downloads]]&lt;br /&gt;
|valign=top|&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Download&#039;&#039;&#039; the latest [[Sugar on a Stick/Downloads|Sugar on a Stick]] .iso file.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Load&#039;&#039;&#039;: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Here is a simple way to load a bootable USB on a Mac.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## Enter the Terminal: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;/Applications/Utilities/Terminal&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
## Type &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;diskutil list&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. You should see all the disk drives you have inserted into your computer.&lt;br /&gt;
## Insert the disk drive to which you want to write Sugar on a Stick.&lt;br /&gt;
## Type &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;diskutil list&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; again. You should see that your USB drive has been added to the list. If not, wait a while and repeat.&lt;br /&gt;
## Type &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hdiutil convert -format UDRW -o &amp;amp;lt;&amp;lt;i&amp;gt;Sugar on a Stick image file&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt;&amp;amp;gt;.img &amp;amp;lt;&amp;lt;i&amp;gt;Sugar on a Stick image file&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt;&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; to convert the image into a bootable format.&lt;br /&gt;
## Type &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sudo diskutil unmountDisk &amp;amp;lt;&amp;lt;i&amp;gt;device name&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt;&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; to unmount the disk (it will not be ejected).&lt;br /&gt;
## Type &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sudo dd if=&amp;amp;lt;&amp;lt;i&amp;gt;Sugar on a Stick image file&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt;&amp;amp;gt;.img.dmg of=&amp;amp;lt;&amp;lt;i&amp;gt;device name&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt;&amp;amp;gt; bs=1m&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sudo&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will ask for your password, and then &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;dd&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will start writing the disk file.&lt;br /&gt;
## When &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;dd&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; finishes writing the disk file, type &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sudo diskutil eject &amp;amp;lt;&amp;lt;i&amp;gt;device name&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt;&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Boot&#039;&#039;&#039;: Insert the USB stick into a USB port on your computer, then reboot and press and hold the Option key while rebooting. You should see a list of all the EFI-recognizable USB drives that can be bootstrapped. If Sugar on a Stick is not one such drive, it cannot be bootstrapped: you need rEFInd (a fork of rEFIt).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&#039;&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;&#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SOAS sticks created with Windows or GNU/Linux can be booted on PC computers. SOAS sticks created using an Apple computer can be booted on an Apple computer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==&#039;&#039;&#039;Installing Sugar on your computer&#039;s hard drive&#039;&#039;&#039;==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The procedure to install Sugar is:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Free some space on the computer&#039;s hard drive&lt;br /&gt;
## For Windows, shrink the size of the D: partition or, if no D: partition, the C: partition. &lt;br /&gt;
## For GNU/Linux, use gparted, select the partition, choose move/resize, and add space after the partition (the size of the partition will be reduced accordingly). &lt;br /&gt;
## Sugar was designed for systems with very limited storage capacity. To test Sugar a space of 10GB should be plenty. For daily use a larger space may be needed. &lt;br /&gt;
# Install GNU/Linux in that space&lt;br /&gt;
# Add the latest version of Sugar (0.110)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To use Sugar:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Boot the computer choosing GNU/Linux&lt;br /&gt;
# Before entering the password, click on the &#039;desktop&#039; icon. Choose Sugar.&lt;br /&gt;
# To quit&lt;br /&gt;
## switch to the Home View (key f4)&lt;br /&gt;
## right-click on the XO icon in the center of the screen&lt;br /&gt;
## click on log out or shutdown as appropriate&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ubuntu-small.jpg|link=Ubuntu]]&lt;br /&gt;
===Ubuntu 17.04 Zesty===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| style=&amp;quot;text-align: center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sugar 0.110 is in the archive for Ubuntu 17.04 Zesty, and can be installed by typing&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sudo apt install sucrose&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:Debian-small.jpg|link=Debian]]||[[Debian]]||0.110||Debian Stretch&lt;br /&gt;
# install Debian &#039;&#039;Jessie&#039;&#039; in the usual way, see [https://www.debian.org/ debian.org],&lt;br /&gt;
# change &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;/etc/apt/sources.list&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; to use the Debian &#039;&#039;Stretch&#039;&#039; testing release,&lt;br /&gt;
 sudo sed -i &#039;s/jessie/stretch/g&#039; /etc/apt/sources.list&lt;br /&gt;
# update the package lists,&lt;br /&gt;
 sudo apt update&lt;br /&gt;
# upgrade all packages,&lt;br /&gt;
 sudo apt dist-upgrade&lt;br /&gt;
# install Sugar,&lt;br /&gt;
 sudo apt install sucrose&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:Debian-small.jpg|link=Debian]]||[[Debian on rpi3]]||0.110||Debian jessie&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
* install Raspbian &#039;&#039;Jessie&#039;&#039; in the usual way,&lt;br /&gt;
* change &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;/etc/apt/sources.list&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; to use the &#039;&#039;Stretch&#039;&#039; testing release,&lt;br /&gt;
 sudo sed -i &#039;s/jessie/stretch/g&#039; /etc/apt/sources.list&lt;br /&gt;
* update the package lists,&lt;br /&gt;
 sudo apt update&lt;br /&gt;
* upgrade all packages,&lt;br /&gt;
 sudo apt dist-upgrade,&lt;br /&gt;
* install Sugar,&lt;br /&gt;
 sudo apt install sucrose&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tony37</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Get_sugar&amp;diff=100204</id>
		<title>Get sugar</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Get_sugar&amp;diff=100204"/>
		<updated>2017-04-26T01:21:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tony37: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two ways to use Sugar on your own computer. SOAS (Sugar on a Stick) is a USB flash drive with Sugar which can be booted on your computer but does not change anything on your hard drive. The second way is to free some space on your hard drive and install a distribution of GNU/Linux which supports Sugar. The method allows you to choose your normal operating system or GNU/Linux with Sugar during boot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==&#039;&#039;&#039;Sugar on a Stick&#039;&#039;&#039;==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== MS Windows ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|width=&amp;quot;160px&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;|[[File:Windows.gif|left|link=Sugar on a Stick/Windows]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:USB flash drive.jpg|left|156px|link=Sugar on a Stick/Downloads]]&lt;br /&gt;
|valign=top|&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Download&#039;&#039;&#039; the latest [[Sugar on a Stick/Downloads | Sugar on a Stick]] .iso file.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Load&#039;&#039;&#039;: Insert a USB flash drive (or SD Card) with 2 GB or more of free space into your computer and launch Rufus to create a Sugar-on-a-Stick bootable image.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Boot&#039;&#039;&#039;: Insert the USB stick into a USB port on your computer. Set the option to &amp;quot;boot from USB&amp;quot; in your computer&#039;s &amp;lt;abbr title=&amp;quot;Basic Input/Output System&amp;quot;&amp;gt;BIOS&amp;lt;/abbr&amp;gt; setup, and then start up the computer.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
=== GNU/Linux ===&lt;br /&gt;
{|style=&amp;quot;width: 800px;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|width=&amp;quot;160px&amp;quot; valign=top|&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;linkgroup&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Gnulinux.png|link=Sugar on a Stick/Linux]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Download Mirabell.png|left|link=Sugar on a Stick/Downloads]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:USB flash drive.jpg|156px|link=Sugar on a Stick/Downloads]]&lt;br /&gt;
|valign=top|&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Download&#039;&#039;&#039; the latest [[Sugar on a Stick/Downloads | Sugar on a Stick]] .iso file.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Load&#039;&#039;&#039;: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Here is a simple way to create a SOAS usb flash drive.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## Open a shell (command line interpreter)&lt;br /&gt;
## Type &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;df -Th&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. This shows all of the mounted partitions (on your computer&#039;s hard drive.)&lt;br /&gt;
## Insert a USB flash drive (or SD Card) with 2 GB or more of free space into your computer&lt;br /&gt;
## After a few moment type &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;df -Th&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; again. You should see an added line for your USB drive. Check the size of the drive (e.g. 3.7GB for a 4GB drive) and its type: vfat to confirm this line refers to your usb flash drive. The first field on this line, e.g. /dev/sdb1, identifies the partition. For dd command, you will use /dev/sdb [this field without the partition number]. &lt;br /&gt;
## type &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;cd ~/Downloads&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Then type &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ls Fedora*.iso&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; Assuming you downloaded to the Downloads folder, this will show the SOAS iso.&lt;br /&gt;
## Type &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sudo dd if=Fedora-SoaS-Live-x86_64-25-1.3.iso of=/dev/sdb bs=1M&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with the correct if (input file) and of (output device). The dd command erases the &#039;of&#039; device so make sure it doesn&#039;t say /dev/sda which would erase your computer&#039;s hard drive!!! Also make sure you have saved any valuable information on the usb flash drive.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Boot&#039;&#039;&#039;: Insert the USB stick into a bootable USB port on your computer. Set the option to &amp;quot;boot from USB&amp;quot; in your computer&#039;s &amp;lt;abbr title=&amp;quot;Basic Input/Output System&amp;quot;&amp;gt;BIOS&amp;lt;/abbr&amp;gt; setup, and then start up the computer.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
=== Apple Mac OS X ===&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|width=&amp;quot;160px&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;|[[File:Apple.gif|link=Macintosh]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;linkgroup&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Download Mirabell.png|left|link=Sugar on a Stick/Downloads]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:USB flash drive.jpg|156px|link=Sugar on a Stick/Downloads]]&lt;br /&gt;
|valign=top|&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Download&#039;&#039;&#039; the latest [[Sugar on a Stick/Downloads|Sugar on a Stick]] .iso file.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Load&#039;&#039;&#039;: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Here is a simple way to load a bootable USB on a Mac.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## Enter the Terminal: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;/Applications/Utilities/Terminal&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
## Type &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;diskutil list&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. You should see all the disk drives you have inserted into your computer.&lt;br /&gt;
## Insert the disk drive to which you want to write Sugar on a Stick.&lt;br /&gt;
## Type &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;diskutil list&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; again. You should see that your USB drive has been added to the list. If not, wait a while and repeat.&lt;br /&gt;
## Type &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hdiutil convert -format UDRW -o &amp;amp;lt;&amp;lt;i&amp;gt;Sugar on a Stick image file&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt;&amp;amp;gt;.img &amp;amp;lt;&amp;lt;i&amp;gt;Sugar on a Stick image file&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt;&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; to convert the image into a bootable format.&lt;br /&gt;
## Type &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sudo diskutil unmountDisk &amp;amp;lt;&amp;lt;i&amp;gt;device name&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt;&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; to unmount the disk (it will not be ejected).&lt;br /&gt;
## Type &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sudo dd if=&amp;amp;lt;&amp;lt;i&amp;gt;Sugar on a Stick image file&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt;&amp;amp;gt;.img.dmg of=&amp;amp;lt;&amp;lt;i&amp;gt;device name&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt;&amp;amp;gt; bs=1m&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sudo&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will ask for your password, and then &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;dd&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will start writing the disk file.&lt;br /&gt;
## When &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;dd&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; finishes writing the disk file, type &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sudo diskutil eject &amp;amp;lt;&amp;lt;i&amp;gt;device name&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt;&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Boot&#039;&#039;&#039;: Insert the USB stick into a USB port on your computer, then reboot and press and hold the Option key while rebooting. You should see a list of all the EFI-recognizable USB drives that can be bootstrapped. If Sugar on a Stick is not one such drive, it cannot be bootstrapped: you need rEFInd (a fork of rEFIt).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&#039;&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;&#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SOAS sticks created with Windows or GNU/Linux can be booted on PC computers. SOAS sticks created using an Apple computer can be booted on an Apple computer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==&#039;&#039;&#039;Installing Sugar on your computer&#039;s hard drive&#039;&#039;&#039;==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| style=&amp;quot;text-align: center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:Ubuntu-small.jpg|link=Ubuntu]]||[[Ubuntu]]||0.110||Ubuntu 17.04 Zesty&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:Debian-small.jpg|link=Debian]]||[[Debian]]||0.110||Debian Stretch&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:Debian-small.jpg|link=Debian]]||[[Debian on rpi3]]||0.110||Debian jessie&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:Ubuntu-small.jpg|link=Ubuntu_on_rpi3]]||[[Ubuntu on rpi3]]||0.110||Ubuntu 17.04&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; (sugar on rpi3)&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 55px&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;weblink&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:OLPCXO.png|middle|link=olpc:Releases]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;weblink&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[OLPC:Releases|OLPC]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||0.110||Prepared for XO laptops&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tony37</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Get_sugar&amp;diff=100203</id>
		<title>Get sugar</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Get_sugar&amp;diff=100203"/>
		<updated>2017-04-26T00:59:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tony37: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two ways to use Sugar on your own computer. SOAS (Sugar on a Stick) is a USB flash drive with Sugar which can be booted on your computer but does not change anything on your hard drive. The second way is to free some space on your hard drive and install a distribution of GNU/Linux which supports Sugar. The method allows you to choose your normal operating system or GNU/Linux with Sugar during boot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Sugar on a Stick==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== MS Windows ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|width=&amp;quot;160px&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;|[[File:Windows.gif|left|link=Sugar on a Stick/Windows]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:USB flash drive.jpg|left|156px|link=Sugar on a Stick/Downloads]]&lt;br /&gt;
|valign=top|&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Download&#039;&#039;&#039; the latest [[Sugar on a Stick/Downloads | Sugar on a Stick]] .iso file.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Load&#039;&#039;&#039;: Insert a USB flash drive (or SD Card) with 2 GB or more of free space into your computer and launch Rufus to create a Sugar-on-a-Stick bootable image.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Boot&#039;&#039;&#039;: Insert the USB stick into a USB port on your computer. Set the option to &amp;quot;boot from USB&amp;quot; in your computer&#039;s &amp;lt;abbr title=&amp;quot;Basic Input/Output System&amp;quot;&amp;gt;BIOS&amp;lt;/abbr&amp;gt; setup, and then start up the computer.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
=== GNU/Linux ===&lt;br /&gt;
{|style=&amp;quot;width: 800px;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|width=&amp;quot;160px&amp;quot; valign=top|&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;linkgroup&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Gnulinux.png|link=Sugar on a Stick/Linux]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Download Mirabell.png|left|link=Sugar on a Stick/Downloads]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:USB flash drive.jpg|156px|link=Sugar on a Stick/Downloads]]&lt;br /&gt;
|valign=top|&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Download&#039;&#039;&#039; the latest [[Sugar on a Stick/Downloads | Sugar on a Stick]] .iso file.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Load&#039;&#039;&#039;: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Here is a simple way to create a SOAS usb flash drive.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## Open a shell (command line interpreter)&lt;br /&gt;
## Type &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;df -Th&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. This shows all of the mounted partitions (on your computer&#039;s hard drive.)&lt;br /&gt;
## Insert a USB flash drive (or SD Card) with 2 GB or more of free space into your computer&lt;br /&gt;
## After a few moment type &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;df -Th&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; again. You should see an added line for your USB drive. Check the size of the drive (e.g. 3.7GB for a 4GB drive) and its type: vfat to confirm this line refers to your usb flash drive. The first field on this line, e.g. /dev/sdb1, identifies the partition. For dd command, you will use /dev/sdb [this field without the partition number]. &lt;br /&gt;
## type &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;cd ~/Downloads&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Then type &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ls Fedora*.iso&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; Assuming you downloaded to the Downloads folder, this will show the SOAS iso.&lt;br /&gt;
## Type &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sudo dd if=Fedora-SoaS-Live-x86_64-25-1.3.iso of=/dev/sdb bs=1M&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with the correct if (input file) and of (output device). The dd command erases the &#039;of&#039; device so make sure it doesn&#039;t say /dev/sda which would erase your computer&#039;s hard drive!!! Also make sure you have saved any valuable information on the usb flash drive.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Boot&#039;&#039;&#039;: Insert the USB stick into a bootable USB port on your computer. Set the option to &amp;quot;boot from USB&amp;quot; in your computer&#039;s &amp;lt;abbr title=&amp;quot;Basic Input/Output System&amp;quot;&amp;gt;BIOS&amp;lt;/abbr&amp;gt; setup, and then start up the computer.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
=== Apple Mac OS X ===&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|width=&amp;quot;160px&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;|[[File:Apple.gif|link=Macintosh]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;linkgroup&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Download Mirabell.png|left|link=Sugar on a Stick/Downloads]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:USB flash drive.jpg|156px|link=Sugar on a Stick/Downloads]]&lt;br /&gt;
|valign=top|&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Download&#039;&#039;&#039; the latest [[Sugar on a Stick/Downloads|Sugar on a Stick]] .iso file.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Load&#039;&#039;&#039;: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Here is a simple way to load a bootable USB on a Mac.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## Enter the Terminal: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;/Applications/Utilities/Terminal&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
## Type &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;diskutil list&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. You should see all the disk drives you have inserted into your computer.&lt;br /&gt;
## Insert the disk drive to which you want to write Sugar on a Stick.&lt;br /&gt;
## Type &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;diskutil list&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; again. You should see that your USB drive has been added to the list. If not, wait a while and repeat.&lt;br /&gt;
## Type &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hdiutil convert -format UDRW -o &amp;amp;lt;&amp;lt;i&amp;gt;Sugar on a Stick image file&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt;&amp;amp;gt;.img &amp;amp;lt;&amp;lt;i&amp;gt;Sugar on a Stick image file&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt;&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; to convert the image into a bootable format.&lt;br /&gt;
## Type &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sudo diskutil unmountDisk &amp;amp;lt;&amp;lt;i&amp;gt;device name&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt;&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; to unmount the disk (it will not be ejected).&lt;br /&gt;
## Type &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sudo dd if=&amp;amp;lt;&amp;lt;i&amp;gt;Sugar on a Stick image file&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt;&amp;amp;gt;.img.dmg of=&amp;amp;lt;&amp;lt;i&amp;gt;device name&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt;&amp;amp;gt; bs=1m&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sudo&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will ask for your password, and then &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;dd&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will start writing the disk file.&lt;br /&gt;
## When &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;dd&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; finishes writing the disk file, type &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sudo diskutil eject &amp;amp;lt;&amp;lt;i&amp;gt;device name&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt;&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Boot&#039;&#039;&#039;: Insert the USB stick into a USB port on your computer, then reboot and press and hold the Option key while rebooting. You should see a list of all the EFI-recognizable USB drives that can be bootstrapped. If Sugar on a Stick is not one such drive, it cannot be bootstrapped: you need rEFInd (a fork of rEFIt).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Advanced users===&lt;br /&gt;
==Do you have an OLPC XO?== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|width=&amp;quot;174px&amp;quot;|[[File:OLPCXO.png|middle|link=olpc:Releases]]&lt;br /&gt;
|valign=top|&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Upgrade&#039;&#039;&#039; to the latest &#039;&#039;[[olpc:Releases]]&#039;&#039; from OLPC (which may require a [[olpc:Activation_and_developer_keys|developer key]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Experiment&#039;&#039;&#039; with [[Sugar_on_a_Stick/Installation/OLPC|Updating XOs]] to the latest &#039;&#039;Sugar on a Stick&#039;&#039; release.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Some alternate installations==&lt;br /&gt;
* Once you download, and then burn or load a Sugar on a Stick (SoaS) .iso file, and boot it, the running Fedora 17 SoaS Live CD/USB may be used to install Fedora with Sugar to a hard disk or a 4 GB USB stick [[Tutorials/Installation/Install with liveinst|with the &#039;&#039;&#039;{{Code|liveinst}} command&#039;&#039;&#039;]].&lt;br /&gt;
:- You start with a SoaS LiveOS image, and then load an uncompressed version onto the hard disk or USB stick.&lt;br /&gt;
:- The Fedora-17-Live-SoaS.iso file is a 509 MB download.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If you have a high-speed Internet connection,&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Fedora with the Sugar graphical learning environment&#039;&#039;&#039; may be installed to a hard disk or a a 4 GB USB stick [[Tutorials/Installation/Install with netinstall|with a &#039;&#039;&#039;Netinstall CD&#039;&#039;&#039;]].&lt;br /&gt;
:- Not a compressed LiveOS image like SoaS, but all of Sugar.&lt;br /&gt;
:- {{Highlight|bgcolor=#f9f6b7|&#039;&#039;This requires a high-speed Internet connection for software component downloading during installation.&#039;&#039;}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Do you use GNU/Linux?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;[[Category:Supported systems]]&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
: &#039;&#039;&#039;See these links to pages on the Sugar Labs wiki for GNU/Linux distributions where Sugar has been installed.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note/note|Please note:|&lt;br /&gt;
* Development changes occur rapidly, and the documentation here lags the current state of systems development.&lt;br /&gt;
* For the latest information on any development project, visit their work sites.&lt;br /&gt;
* The &#039;Notes&#039; column should indicate if the image is for pre-release testing.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| style=&amp;quot;text-align: center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Logo!!Name!!Latest&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[:Category:Platform_Cycle|Sugar]]!!Notes&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 55px&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:Ubuntu-small.jpg|link=Ubuntu]]||[[Ubuntu]]||0.110||Ubuntu 17.04 Zesty&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:Debian-small.jpg|link=Debian]]||[[Debian]]||0.110||Debian Stretch&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:Debian-small.jpg|link=Debian]]||[[Debian on rpi3]]||0.110||Debian jessie&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 55px&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;weblink&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:OLPCXO.png|middle|link=olpc:Releases]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;weblink&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[OLPC:Releases|OLPC]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||0.110||Prepared for XO laptops&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:Ubuntu-small.jpg|link=Ubuntu_on_rpi3]]||[[Ubuntu on rpi3]]||0.110||Ubuntu 17.04&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; (sugar on rpi3)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:Fedora-small.jpg|link=Fedora]]||[[Fedora]]||0.108.1|| Primary distribution for Sugar (Fedora 25)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;linkgroup&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Soas-avocado.svg|200px|link=Sugar_on_a_Stick]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||[[Sugar on a Stick]]||style=&amp;quot;width: 55px;&amp;quot;|0.108.1|| Live CD/USB of the Sugar Learning Environment&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:Suse-small.jpg|link=OpenSUSE]]||[[OpenSUSE|openSUSE]]||0.107.2|| Part of the Linux for Education (Li-f-e) series&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;linkgroup&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Trisquel_icon.png|link=Trisquel_On_A_Sugar_Toast]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||[[Trisquel_On_A_Sugar_Toast |Trisquel Toast]]||0.102.0|| Based on Ubuntu&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;linkgroup&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Mageia-2011.png|150px|link=Mageia]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||[[Mageia]]||0.95.1|| Forked from Mandriva&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 55px&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;linkgroup&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Elementary.png|65px|link=http://wiki.sugarlabs.org/go/ElementaryOs]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||[[ElementaryOs]]||0.94.1|| Based on Ubuntu 10.10 &amp;amp; [[Sweets Distribution]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 55px&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;linkgroup&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Fusion.png|50px|link=Fusion Linux]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||[[Fusion Linux]]||0.94.1|| Remix of Fedora 16 with GNOME 3.2.1&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 55px&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;linkgroup&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:LMD-small.png|100px|100px|link=Linux Mint]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||[[Linux Mint]]||0.94.1|| mint 13 &amp;amp;  mint 14 Using [[Sweets Distribution]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 55px&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;linkgroup weblink&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Dextrose-mascotte-120x96.png|link=https://sugardextrose.org/projects/dextrose/wiki/DX3_release_info]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;weblink&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[https://sugardextrose.org/projects/dextrose/wiki/DX3_release_info Dextrose]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||0.92.4|| Prepared for XO laptops&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;linkgroup&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:LMD-small.png|100px|link=Linux_Mint_Debian_Edition]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||[[Linux Mint Debian Edition]]||0.88.1||&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 55px&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;linkgroup&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Mandriva-small.png|link=Mandriva]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||[[Mandriva]]||0.88.0||&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 55px&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tony37</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Get_sugar&amp;diff=100202</id>
		<title>Get sugar</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Get_sugar&amp;diff=100202"/>
		<updated>2017-04-25T23:43:10Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tony37: Created page with &amp;quot; __NOTOC__  There are two ways to use Sugar on your own computer. SOAS (Sugar on a Stick) is a USB flash drive with Sugar which can be booted on your computer but does not cha...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two ways to use Sugar on your own computer. SOAS (Sugar on a Stick) is a USB flash drive with Sugar which can be booted on your computer but does not change anything on your hard drive. The second way is to free some space on your hard drive and install a distribution of GNU/Linux which supports Sugar. The method allows you to choose your normal operating system or GNU/Linux with Sugar during boot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Sugar on a Stick==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The SoaS download is found here: &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Sugar on a Stick]]&#039;&#039;&#039;. Basic instructions are found below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sugar on a Stick installation instructions ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== MS Windows ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|width=&amp;quot;160px&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;|[[File:Windows.gif|left|link=Sugar on a Stick/Windows]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;linkgroup&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Download Mirabell.png|left|link=Sugar on a Stick/Downloads]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:USB flash drive.jpg|left|156px|link=Sugar on a Stick/Downloads]]&lt;br /&gt;
|valign=top|&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Prepare&#039;&#039;&#039;: [http://fedorahosted.org/liveusb-creator/#Download Download] the Fedora Live USB Creator from [http://fedorahosted.org/liveusb-creator/#Download FedoraHosted].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Download&#039;&#039;&#039; the latest [[Sugar on a Stick/Downloads | Sugar on a Stick]] .iso file.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Load&#039;&#039;&#039;: Insert a USB flash drive (or SD Card) with 2 GB or more of free space into your computer and launch Fedora Live USB Creator to create a Sugar-on-a-Stick bootable image.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;&#039;: Be sure to set the &#039;&#039;persistent storage&#039;&#039; slider to a non-zero value.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Boot&#039;&#039;&#039;: Insert the USB stick into a USB port on your computer. Set the option to &amp;quot;boot from USB&amp;quot; in your computer&#039;s &amp;lt;abbr title=&amp;quot;Basic Input/Output System&amp;quot;&amp;gt;BIOS&amp;lt;/abbr&amp;gt; setup, and then start up the computer.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Detailed [[Sugar on a Stick/Windows|installation instructions for Windows]] and [[Sugar on a Stick/Boot|booting instructions]] are available. There is also a [[Getting Started/Explore|guide to exploring Sugar]].&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
=== GNU/Linux ===&lt;br /&gt;
{|style=&amp;quot;width: 800px;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|width=&amp;quot;160px&amp;quot; valign=top|&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;linkgroup&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Gnulinux.png|link=Sugar on a Stick/Linux]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Download Mirabell.png|left|link=Sugar on a Stick/Downloads]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:USB flash drive.jpg|156px|link=Sugar on a Stick/Downloads]]&lt;br /&gt;
|valign=top|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Detailed [[Sugar on a Stick/Linux|installation instructions for GNU/Linux]] and [[Sugar on a Stick/Boot|booting instructions]] are available. There is also a [[Getting Started/Explore|guide to exploring Sugar]].&lt;br /&gt;
GNU/Linux users may also want to install the [[#Do_you_use_GNU.2FLinux.3F|Sugar packages]] on their favorite distro, apart from Sugar on a Stick.&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Apple Mac OS X ===&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|width=&amp;quot;160px&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;|[[File:Apple.gif|link=Macintosh]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;linkgroup&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Download Mirabell.png|left|link=Sugar on a Stick/Downloads]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:USB flash drive.jpg|156px|link=Sugar on a Stick/Downloads]]&lt;br /&gt;
|valign=top|&lt;br /&gt;
The instructions below are based on the Ubuntu Web page at &amp;amp;lt;http://www.ubuntu.com/download/desktop/create-a-usb-stick-on-mac-osx&amp;amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Prepare&#039;&#039;&#039;: These instructions are for &#039;&#039;&#039;32-bit&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;64-bit&#039;&#039;&#039; processors.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Download&#039;&#039;&#039; the latest [[Sugar on a Stick/Downloads|Sugar on a Stick]] .iso file.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Load&#039;&#039;&#039;: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Here is a simple way to load a bootable USB on a Mac.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## Enter the Terminal: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;/Applications/Utilities/Terminal&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
## Type &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;diskutil list&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. You should see all the disk drives you have inserted into your computer.&lt;br /&gt;
## Insert the disk drive to which you want to write Sugar on a Stick.&lt;br /&gt;
## Type &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;diskutil list&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; again. You should see that your USB drive has been added to the list. If not, wait a while and repeat.&lt;br /&gt;
## Type &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hdiutil convert -format UDRW -o &amp;amp;lt;&amp;lt;i&amp;gt;Sugar on a Stick image file&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt;&amp;amp;gt;.img &amp;amp;lt;&amp;lt;i&amp;gt;Sugar on a Stick image file&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt;&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; to convert the image into a bootable format.&lt;br /&gt;
## Type &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sudo diskutil unmountDisk &amp;amp;lt;&amp;lt;i&amp;gt;device name&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt;&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; to unmount the disk (it will not be ejected).&lt;br /&gt;
## Type &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sudo dd if=&amp;amp;lt;&amp;lt;i&amp;gt;Sugar on a Stick image file&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt;&amp;amp;gt;.img.dmg of=&amp;amp;lt;&amp;lt;i&amp;gt;device name&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt;&amp;amp;gt; bs=1m&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sudo&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will ask for your password, and then &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;dd&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will start writing the disk file.&lt;br /&gt;
## When &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;dd&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; finishes writing the disk file, type &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sudo diskutil eject &amp;amp;lt;&amp;lt;i&amp;gt;device name&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt;&amp;amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Boot&#039;&#039;&#039;: Insert the USB stick into a USB port on your computer, then reboot and press and hold the Option key while rebooting. You should see a list of all the EFI-recognizable USB drives that can be bootstrapped. If Sugar on a Stick is not one such drive, it cannot be bootstrapped: you need rEFInd (a fork of rEFIt).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:* Have a MacBook? Consider these options:&lt;br /&gt;
::[[File:Usb1.png|50px]] [[Testing/Reports/Sugar on a Stick#MacBook Persistent SoaS v5 USB EFI Boot|&#039;&#039;&#039;MacBook Persistent SoaS v5 USB EFI Boot&#039;&#039;&#039;]]&lt;br /&gt;
:: [[Talk:Downloads#Bootable_CD_of_Trisquel_4.5_for_MacBook_Air|Bootable CD of Trisquel 4.5 for MacBook Air]]&lt;br /&gt;
:: See other installation variations at [[Sugar Creation Kit]]&lt;br /&gt;
::[[File:Apple.gif|30px]] [[Tutorials/Installation/Burn_a_CD.iso_on_a_Mac|&#039;&#039;&#039;Burning a CD from an .iso file on a Mac&#039;&#039;&#039;]]&lt;br /&gt;
:* Have an iBook or PowerPC Mac?&lt;br /&gt;
:: See [[Ubuntu/PPC]] and [[Fedora#PowerPC]].&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternative [[Macintosh|installation instructions for Mac OS X]]. Also, [[Sugar_on_a_Stick/Blueberry#For_Mac_OS_X_Users|these older installation instructions]] and [[Sugar on a Stick/Boot|booting instructions]] may be consulted.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;There is also a [[Getting Started/Explore|guide to exploring Sugar]].&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Advanced users===&lt;br /&gt;
==Do you have an OLPC XO?== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|width=&amp;quot;174px&amp;quot;|[[File:OLPCXO.png|middle|link=olpc:Releases]]&lt;br /&gt;
|valign=top|&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Upgrade&#039;&#039;&#039; to the latest &#039;&#039;[[olpc:Releases]]&#039;&#039; from OLPC (which may require a [[olpc:Activation_and_developer_keys|developer key]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Experiment&#039;&#039;&#039; with [[Sugar_on_a_Stick/Installation/OLPC|Updating XOs]] to the latest &#039;&#039;Sugar on a Stick&#039;&#039; release.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Some alternate installations==&lt;br /&gt;
* Once you download, and then burn or load a Sugar on a Stick (SoaS) .iso file, and boot it, the running Fedora 17 SoaS Live CD/USB may be used to install Fedora with Sugar to a hard disk or a 4 GB USB stick [[Tutorials/Installation/Install with liveinst|with the &#039;&#039;&#039;{{Code|liveinst}} command&#039;&#039;&#039;]].&lt;br /&gt;
:- You start with a SoaS LiveOS image, and then load an uncompressed version onto the hard disk or USB stick.&lt;br /&gt;
:- The Fedora-17-Live-SoaS.iso file is a 509 MB download.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If you have a high-speed Internet connection,&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Fedora with the Sugar graphical learning environment&#039;&#039;&#039; may be installed to a hard disk or a a 4 GB USB stick [[Tutorials/Installation/Install with netinstall|with a &#039;&#039;&#039;Netinstall CD&#039;&#039;&#039;]].&lt;br /&gt;
:- Not a compressed LiveOS image like SoaS, but all of Sugar.&lt;br /&gt;
:- {{Highlight|bgcolor=#f9f6b7|&#039;&#039;This requires a high-speed Internet connection for software component downloading during installation.&#039;&#039;}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Do you use GNU/Linux?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These are the steps for installing Sugar on a Stick on a USB/SD device. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page is transcluded to various installation instruction pages.&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol start=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Download&#039;&#039;&#039; the latest [[Sugar on a Stick/Downloads | Sugar on a Stick]] .iso file.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note/important|Important change since Fedora 24 SoaS|The &#039;&#039;livecd-iso-to-disk&#039;&#039; installation script is no longer packaged in the SoaS .iso file.  Starting with Fedora 24, if you want a Live USB with persistent storage, you must install the &#039;&#039;livecd-tools&#039;&#039; package to obtain the installation script and the SYSLINUX boot loader. Use this command to obtain the installer: {{Code|sudo dnf install livecd-tools}}}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt; Insert a USB stick of 2 GB or greater capacity into your computer.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt; With [[olpc:Root|&#039;&#039;&#039;root&#039;&#039;&#039; user]] permissions at a terminal or [[Wikipedia:System_console|console]] command line, use the command {{Code|df -Th}} or {{Code|blkid}} to get the USB device node name.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Show|&amp;amp;nbsp;You should see something like the following:&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[root@MyComputer ~]# df -Th&lt;br /&gt;
Filesystem     Type      Size  Used Avail Use% Mounted on&lt;br /&gt;
rootfs         rootfs     20G  5.5G   14G  29% /&lt;br /&gt;
devtmpfs       devtmpfs  1.6G     0  1.6G   0% /dev&lt;br /&gt;
tmpfs          tmpfs     1.6G  788K  1.6G   1% /dev/shm&lt;br /&gt;
tmpfs          tmpfs     1.6G  1.3M  1.6G   1% /run&lt;br /&gt;
tmpfs          tmpfs     1.6G     0  1.6G   0% /sys/fs/cgroup&lt;br /&gt;
tmpfs          tmpfs     1.6G     0  1.6G   0% /media&lt;br /&gt;
/dev/loop0     iso9660   668M  668M     0 100% /run/soas&lt;br /&gt;
/dev/sdc1      vfat      2.0G  2.0G   53M  98% /run/media/MyAccount/LG&lt;br /&gt;
/&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
: &amp;lt;small&amp;gt;(The {{Code|/run/media/MyAccount/}} path is the new, Fedora 17 standard mount point for removable media.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;{{Code|/media/MyMountPoint}} is common on other operating systems.)&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[root@MyComputer ~]# blkid&lt;br /&gt;
/dev/sda1: LABEL=&amp;quot;Fedora-20&amp;quot; UUID=&amp;quot;8962913a-c335-4c3b-b3ed-90fbb9c97580&amp;quot; TYPE=&amp;quot;ext4&amp;quot; PARTUUID=&amp;quot;1549f232-01&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
/dev/sdc1: LABEL=&amp;quot;LIVE&amp;quot; UUID=&amp;quot;D2AC-5056&amp;quot; TYPE=&amp;quot;vfat&amp;quot;  PARTUUID=&amp;quot;000056b3-01&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
/dev/loop0: UUID=&amp;quot;2013-12-12-01-40-45-00&amp;quot; LABEL=&amp;quot;Fedora-Live-SoaS-x86_64-20-1&amp;quot; TYPE=&amp;quot;iso9660&amp;quot; PTUUID=&amp;quot;461863db&amp;quot; PTTYPE=&amp;quot;dos&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:: &amp;lt;small&amp;gt;(Additional disk drive partitions may be listed on your computer.)&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
: The mount point (Mounted on), Filesystem, Size, and LABEL should help you identify what you want.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt; Unmount the USB device filesystem:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;{{Code|umount /run/media/MyAccount/MyUSBdiscMountPoint}}&lt;br /&gt;
: &amp;lt;small&amp;gt;(The {{Code|/run/media/MyAccount/}} path is the new, Fedora 17 standard mount point. Other operating systems may use {{Code|/media/MyMountPoint}}.)&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt; (You should have the isomd5sum package installed so that the following installation script can verify the download.)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Load&#039;&#039;&#039;: Execute the following installation command, as the [[olpc:Root|&#039;&#039;&#039;root&#039;&#039;&#039; user]], in &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;one&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; command line with many options:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin: 1em 0px 1em 1.6em; border: 1px dashed #2F6FAB; padding: 1em; background-color: #FBFBFB; font-family: Courier;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;livecd-iso-to-disk --reset-mbr --overlay-size-mb &#039;&#039;&#039;500&#039;&#039;&#039; --home-size-mb &#039;&#039;&#039;800&#039;&#039;&#039; --unencrypted-home &#039;&#039;&#039;/path/to/downloaded&#039;&#039;&#039;.iso /dev/sd&#039;&#039;&#039;?&#039;&#039;&#039;1&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
: The &#039;{{Code|&#039;&#039;&#039;?&#039;&#039;&#039;}}&#039; in the final parameter represents the target USB device &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;s&#039;&#039;&#039;csi &#039;&#039;&#039;d&#039;&#039;&#039;rive&#039;&#039; node, such as {{Code|sd&#039;&#039;&#039;b&#039;&#039;&#039;1}} or {{Code|sd&#039;&#039;&#039;c&#039;&#039;&#039;1}}, etc., and {{Code|&#039;&#039;&#039;/path/to/downloaded&#039;&#039;&#039;.iso}} is the location and name of the .iso file.&lt;br /&gt;
: The operating system will occupy ~670 MB, and the overlay and home size arguments, &#039;&#039;&#039;500&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;800&#039;&#039;&#039;, were selected to fit in a 2 GB device. These may be adjusted depending on your preferences and device capacity (see [[LiveOS image]]). SoaS 10 can be squeezed into a 1 GB device with &#039;&#039;&#039;160&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;170&#039;&#039;&#039;. On a 4 GB device, one might use &#039;&#039;&#039;1000&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;1600&#039;&#039;&#039; for the size arguments.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Show|&amp;amp;nbsp;The installation transcript should look something like the following: &lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[root@MyComputer ~]# /run/soas/LiveOS/livecd-iso-to-disk --reset-mbr --overlay-size-mb 500 --home-size-mb 800 --unencrypted-home /home/MyAccount/Downloads/Fedora-Live-SoaS-x86_64-20-1.iso /dev/sdc1&lt;br /&gt;
Verifying image...&lt;br /&gt;
/home/MyAccount/Downloads/Fedora-Live-SoaS-x86_64-20-1.iso:   b0a9414ff7eb79b680d5c86440e19587&lt;br /&gt;
Fragment sums: 9bfe23577651c88dcfb78c76ac3a28a5c53eead4561e3bdc5921b8b2e748&lt;br /&gt;
Fragment count: 20&lt;br /&gt;
Press [Esc] to abort check.&lt;br /&gt;
Checking: 100.0%&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The media check is complete, the result is: PASS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is OK to use this media.&lt;br /&gt;
Copying live image to target device.&lt;br /&gt;
squashfs.img&lt;br /&gt;
    630,784,000 100%    1.96MB/s    0:05:06 (xfr#1, to-chk=0/1)&lt;br /&gt;
osmin.img&lt;br /&gt;
          8,192 100%    0.00kB/s    0:00:00 (xfr#1, to-chk=0/1)&lt;br /&gt;
Updating boot config file&lt;br /&gt;
Initializing persistent overlay file&lt;br /&gt;
500+0 records in&lt;br /&gt;
500+0 records out&lt;br /&gt;
524288000 bytes (524 MB) copied, 216.717 s, 2.4 MB/s&lt;br /&gt;
Initializing persistent /home&lt;br /&gt;
800+0 records in&lt;br /&gt;
800+0 records out&lt;br /&gt;
838860800 bytes (839 MB) copied, 344.643 s, 2.4 MB/s&lt;br /&gt;
Formatting unencrypted /home&lt;br /&gt;
mke2fs 1.42.8 (20-Jun-2013)&lt;br /&gt;
Filesystem label=&lt;br /&gt;
OS type: Linux&lt;br /&gt;
Block size=4096 (log=2)&lt;br /&gt;
Fragment size=4096 (log=2)&lt;br /&gt;
Stride=0 blocks, Stripe width=0 blocks&lt;br /&gt;
51296 inodes, 204800 blocks&lt;br /&gt;
10240 blocks (5.00%) reserved for the super user&lt;br /&gt;
First data block=0&lt;br /&gt;
Maximum filesystem blocks=209715200&lt;br /&gt;
7 block groups&lt;br /&gt;
32768 blocks per group, 32768 fragments per group&lt;br /&gt;
7328 inodes per group&lt;br /&gt;
Superblock backups stored on blocks: &lt;br /&gt;
	32768, 98304, 163840&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Allocating group tables: done                            &lt;br /&gt;
Writing inode tables: done                            &lt;br /&gt;
Creating journal (4096 blocks): done&lt;br /&gt;
Writing superblocks and filesystem accounting information: done&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
tune2fs 1.42.8 (20-Jun-2013)&lt;br /&gt;
Setting maximal mount count to -1&lt;br /&gt;
Setting interval between checks to 0 seconds&lt;br /&gt;
Installing boot loader&lt;br /&gt;
Target device is now set up with a Live image!&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Sugar on a Stick/Boot|Boot]]&#039;&#039;&#039;: Insert the USB stick into a bootable USB port on your computer. Set the option to &amp;quot;boot from USB&amp;quot; in your computer&#039;s &amp;lt;abbr title=&amp;quot;Basic Input/Output System&amp;quot;&amp;gt;BIOS&amp;lt;/abbr&amp;gt; setup, and then start up the computer.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::* To create more Sugar Sticks on other 1 GB or greater USB or SD devices, while running &#039;&#039;Sugar on a Stick&#039;&#039;, one must first obtain the &#039;&#039;livecd-tools&#039;&#039; installer as above, then in the [[Activities/Terminal|Terminal Activity]], execute this command as the root user:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin: 1em 0px 1em 0em; border: 1px dashed #2F6FAB; padding: 1em; background-color: #FBFBFB; font-family: Courier;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;livecd-iso-to-disk --reset-mbr --overlay-size-mb &#039;&#039;&#039;160&#039;&#039;&#039; --home-size-mb &#039;&#039;&#039;170&#039;&#039;&#039; --delete-home --unencrypted-home /run/initramfs/livedev /dev/sd&#039;&#039;&#039;?&#039;&#039;&#039;1&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::: &amp;lt;small&amp;gt;Replace {{Code|/dev/sd&#039;&#039;&#039;?&#039;&#039;&#039;1}} with a new device node for the second USB/SD device that you want to load with &#039;&#039;Sugar on a Stick&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;[[Category:Supported systems]]&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
: &#039;&#039;&#039;See these links to pages on the Sugar Labs wiki for GNU/Linux distributions where Sugar has been installed.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note/note|Please note:|&lt;br /&gt;
* Development changes occur rapidly, and the documentation here lags the current state of systems development.&lt;br /&gt;
* For the latest information on any development project, visit their work sites.&lt;br /&gt;
* The &#039;Notes&#039; column should indicate if the image is for pre-release testing.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| style=&amp;quot;text-align: center&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Logo!!Name!!Latest&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[:Category:Platform_Cycle|Sugar]]!!Notes&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 55px&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:Ubuntu-small.jpg|link=Ubuntu]]||[[Ubuntu]]||0.110||Ubuntu 17.04 Zesty&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:Debian-small.jpg|link=Debian]]||[[Debian]]||0.110||Debian Stretch&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:Debian-small.jpg|link=Debian]]||[[Debian on rpi3]]||0.110||Debian jessie&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 55px&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;weblink&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:OLPCXO.png|middle|link=olpc:Releases]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;weblink&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[OLPC:Releases|OLPC]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||0.110||Prepared for XO laptops&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:Ubuntu-small.jpg|link=Ubuntu_on_rpi3]]||[[Ubuntu on rpi3]]||0.110||Ubuntu 17.04&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; (sugar on rpi3)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:Fedora-small.jpg|link=Fedora]]||[[Fedora]]||0.108.1|| Primary distribution for Sugar (Fedora 25)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;linkgroup&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Soas-avocado.svg|200px|link=Sugar_on_a_Stick]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||[[Sugar on a Stick]]||style=&amp;quot;width: 55px;&amp;quot;|0.108.1|| Live CD/USB of the Sugar Learning Environment&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:Suse-small.jpg|link=OpenSUSE]]||[[OpenSUSE|openSUSE]]||0.107.2|| Part of the Linux for Education (Li-f-e) series&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;linkgroup&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Trisquel_icon.png|link=Trisquel_On_A_Sugar_Toast]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||[[Trisquel_On_A_Sugar_Toast |Trisquel Toast]]||0.102.0|| Based on Ubuntu&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;linkgroup&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Mageia-2011.png|150px|link=Mageia]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||[[Mageia]]||0.95.1|| Forked from Mandriva&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 55px&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;linkgroup&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Elementary.png|65px|link=http://wiki.sugarlabs.org/go/ElementaryOs]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||[[ElementaryOs]]||0.94.1|| Based on Ubuntu 10.10 &amp;amp; [[Sweets Distribution]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 55px&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;linkgroup&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Fusion.png|50px|link=Fusion Linux]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||[[Fusion Linux]]||0.94.1|| Remix of Fedora 16 with GNOME 3.2.1&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 55px&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;linkgroup&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:LMD-small.png|100px|100px|link=Linux Mint]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||[[Linux Mint]]||0.94.1|| mint 13 &amp;amp;  mint 14 Using [[Sweets Distribution]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 55px&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;linkgroup weblink&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Dextrose-mascotte-120x96.png|link=https://sugardextrose.org/projects/dextrose/wiki/DX3_release_info]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;weblink&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[https://sugardextrose.org/projects/dextrose/wiki/DX3_release_info Dextrose]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||0.92.4|| Prepared for XO laptops&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;linkgroup&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:LMD-small.png|100px|link=Linux_Mint_Debian_Edition]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||[[Linux Mint Debian Edition]]||0.88.1||&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 55px&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;linkgroup&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Mandriva-small.png|link=Mandriva]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||[[Mandriva]]||0.88.0||&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 55px&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tony37</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Features/Save-As&amp;diff=100199</id>
		<title>Features/Save-As</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Features/Save-As&amp;diff=100199"/>
		<updated>2017-04-25T01:20:54Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tony37: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Feature Page Incomplete]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Feature|.]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- All fields on this form are required to be accepted.&lt;br /&gt;
 We also request that you maintain the same order of sections so that all of the feature pages are uniform.  --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- The actual name of your feature page should look something like: Features/Your Feature Name.  This keeps all features in the same namespace --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Summary ==&lt;br /&gt;
Provides the &#039;save&#039; and &#039;save as&#039; capabilities common to document processing applications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Owner ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Name: [[User:iamutkarshtiwari| Utkarsh Tiwari]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Email: Utkarsh Tiwari &amp;lt;iamutkarshtiwari@gmail.com&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Current status ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Targeted release: 0.112&lt;br /&gt;
* Last updated: 24th April 2017&lt;br /&gt;
* Percentage of completion: complete&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Detailed Description ==&lt;br /&gt;
* for a new document (start new), when the user quits the activity, a popup provides an opportunity for the user to give the document a name. The user can also decide not to save it.&lt;br /&gt;
* for an existing document, when the user quits the activity, a popup provides an opportunity to give it a new name. In this case, it will be saved under the new name and the original will be preserved. If the user chooses not to provide a new name, the document is saved replacing the original.&lt;br /&gt;
* provides a setting to enable or disable the feature&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Benefit to Sugar ==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;What is the benefit to the platform?  If this is a major capability update, what has changed?  If this is a new feature, what capabilities does it bring? Why will Sugar become a better platform or project because of this feature?&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Currently Sugar saves objects to the Journal with the name of the activity. In the original toolkit design, the name was displayed to the top left of the toolbar so that a user could enter their own name. At that time, the user had a &#039;keep&#039; button on the toolbar which enabled an object to be saved while continuing to work as found on most document based applications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Currently, there is no keep button because Sugar does that automatically. This change comes with a serious flaw. Sugar uses the existing jobject when an activity is opened so that the original is overwritten. For example, a TurtleBlocks program could be resumed and the user decide to do a new program. His previous program is lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With this feature, the activity creates a new object cloned from the original. If the user saves the document (Turtle Blocks program) under a different name, the original remains in the Journal.&lt;br /&gt;
If the name is not changed, the object replaces the original.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature is modeled on the behavior of the &#039;save&#039; and &#039;save as&#039; feature of conventional document handling programs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Make sure to note here as well if this feature has been requested by a specific deployment, or if it has emerged from a bug report.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Requested by Tony Anderson. Implemented by Utkarsh Tiwari as part of GSOC 2016.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scope ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;What work do the developers have to accomplish to complete the feature in time for release?  Is it a large change affecting many parts of the distribution or is it a very isolated change? What are those changes?&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Feature is implemented in activity.py (sugar and sugar3). &lt;br /&gt;
A gsetting was added to make enabling the feature optional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==UI Design==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Does the feature have a direct impact on the work flow, or does it need a UI? Link here mockups, or add detailed descriptions.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Direct impact on work flow.  A visual mockup is in https://github.com/sugarlabs/sugar-toolkit/pull/4&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How To Test ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{:{{PAGENAME}}/Testing}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== User Experience ==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;If this feature is noticeable by its target audience, how will their experiences change as a result?  Describe what they will see or notice.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the user presses the stop button or ctrl + q, a dialog will appear giving the opportunity to name or rename the associated Journal entry. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user can chose not to save the object.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the document has been resumed from the Journal or the Home View, the user will be able to supply a new name so that this entry is added to the Journal instead of overwriting the original.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Dependencies ==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;What other packages (RPMs) depend on this package?  Are there changes outside the developers&#039; control on which completion of this feature depends?  In other words, does your feature depend on completion of another feature owned by someone else or that you would need to coordinate, which might cause you to be unable to finish on time?  Other upstream projects like Python?&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No dependencies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Contingency Plan ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
None necessary, revert to previous release behaviour.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Documentation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Is there upstream documentation on this feature, or notes you have written yourself?  Has this topic been discussed in the mailing list or during a meeting? Link to that material here so other interested developers can get involved.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See PR #327 at https://github.com/sugarlabs/sugar-toolkit-gtk3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Release Notes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;The Sugar Release Notes inform end-users about what is new in the release. An Example is [[0.84/Notes]]. The release notes also help users know how to deal with platform changes such as ABIs/APIs, configuration or data file formats, or upgrade concerns.  If there are any such changes involved in this feature, indicate them here.  You can also link to upstream documentation if it satisfies this need.  This information forms the basis of the release notes edited by the release team and shipped with the release.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Save As&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A user or deployment can enable this feature by setting gsetting &#039;save as&#039; to True). This feature provides a capability comparable to the &#039;save&#039; and &#039;save as&#039; capabilities offered by conventional document processing programs such as those of Libre Office.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Comments and Discussion ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Link to the discussion of this feature on lists.sugarlabs.org&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* See [[{{TALKPAGENAME}}|the discussion tab for this feature.]] &amp;lt;!-- This adds a link to the &amp;quot;discussion&amp;quot; tab associated with your page.  This provides the ability to have ongoing comments or conversation without bogging down the main feature page. --&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tony37</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Sugar_0.110&amp;diff=99369</id>
		<title>Sugar 0.110</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Sugar_0.110&amp;diff=99369"/>
		<updated>2016-11-13T00:50:24Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tony37: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt; Release Notes: Sugar 0.110&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Overview==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sugar 0.110 is the latest stable release of the Sugar Learning Platform. This page describes changes and new features of this list and provides instructions for downloading and installing Sugar on supported computers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==New Features==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Features/Proxy_Settings&lt;br /&gt;
* Added the &amp;quot;sugar-erase-bundle&amp;quot; script https://github.com/sugarlabs/sugar/pull/687/files User:Quozl&lt;br /&gt;
* Turned off Metacity compositing User:Quozl&lt;br /&gt;
* Add a new PopWindow module for developers https://github.com/sugarlabs/sugar-toolkit-gtk3/pull/313#issuecomment-223776873 Abhijit Patel &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Fixes==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* fix for CVE-2015-7547, a severe remote code execution vulnerability exposed by DNS lookups,&lt;br /&gt;
* predictable neighbourhood view icons; now placed the same each time, #381,&lt;br /&gt;
* predictable frame; the frame appears or disappears more easily, #4806,&lt;br /&gt;
* predictable palettes; menus appear where the mouse was when they were triggered, instead of where the mouse may have moved to, #4897,&lt;br /&gt;
    &lt;br /&gt;
==Platform: SOAS==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://dl.fedoraproject.org/pub/alt/unofficial/releases/24/x86_64/Fedora-SoaS-Live-x86_64-24-20160614.n.0.iso Download the SOAS 0.110 image]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mount a usb drive with minimum 4GB capacity, more is better. Backup as needed, it will be erased.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Find out the path to the device. One method is to use df -h. Be careful to identify the usb stick, &lt;br /&gt;
e.g. /dev/sdb1 - check its size to match the size of the stick. A partition of 7.3GB might be shown for an 8GB stick. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Platform: Raspberry Pi 3==&lt;br /&gt;
==Platform: Raspberry Pi 2==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
copy the SOAS image to the stick with the dd command:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
dd if= ~/Downloads/Fedora-SoaS-Live-x86_64-24-20160614.n.0.iso of=/dev/sdb1 bs=4M&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mount the stick on your computer and reboot. It should boot to Sugar.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tony37</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Sugar_0.110&amp;diff=99368</id>
		<title>Sugar 0.110</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Sugar_0.110&amp;diff=99368"/>
		<updated>2016-11-13T00:47:14Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tony37: Created page with &amp;quot; Release: Sugar 0.110  Overview  Sugar 0.110 is the latest stable release of the Sugar Learning Platform. This page describes changes and new features of this list and provide...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt; Release: Sugar 0.110&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Overview&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sugar 0.110 is the latest stable release of the Sugar Learning Platform. This page describes changes and new features of this list and provides instructions for downloading and installing Sugar on supported computers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A list of new features;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Features/Proxy_Settings&lt;br /&gt;
* Added the &amp;quot;sugar-erase-bundle&amp;quot; script https://github.com/sugarlabs/sugar/pull/687/files User:Quozl&lt;br /&gt;
* Turned off Metacity compositing User:Quozl&lt;br /&gt;
* Add a new PopWindow module for developers https://github.com/sugarlabs/sugar-toolkit-gtk3/pull/313#issuecomment-223776873 Abhijit Patel &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fixes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* fix for CVE-2015-7547, a severe remote code execution vulnerability exposed by DNS lookups,&lt;br /&gt;
* predictable neighbourhood view icons; now placed the same each time, #381,&lt;br /&gt;
* predictable frame; the frame appears or disappears more easily, #4806,&lt;br /&gt;
* predictable palettes; menus appear where the mouse was when they were triggered, instead of where the mouse may have moved to, #4897,&lt;br /&gt;
    &lt;br /&gt;
SOAS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://dl.fedoraproject.org/pub/alt/unofficial/releases/24/x86_64/Fedora-SoaS-Live-x86_64-24-20160614.n.0.iso Download the SOAS 0.110 image]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mount a usb drive with minimum 4GB capacity, more is better. Backup as needed, it will be erased.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Find out the path to the device. One method is to use df -h. Be careful to identify the usb stick, &lt;br /&gt;
e.g. /dev/sdb1 - check its size to match the size of the stick. A partition of 7.3GB might be shown for an 8GB stick. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
copy the SOAS image to the stick with the dd command:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
dd if= ~/Downloads/Fedora-SoaS-Live-x86_64-24-20160614.n.0.iso of=/dev/sdb1 bs=4M&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mount the stick on your computer and reboot. It should boot to Sugar.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tony37</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=User:Tony37&amp;diff=99367</id>
		<title>User:Tony37</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=User:Tony37&amp;diff=99367"/>
		<updated>2016-11-13T00:00:40Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tony37: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;I have been a volunteer with OLE Nepal and later in Rwanda. I have posted several &lt;br /&gt;
activities, all of which are in the sandbox for one reason or another, mostly the last 5% of &lt;br /&gt;
a project takes 50% of the time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[School Server Wish List]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Platform]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Sugar-server Journal backup]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Lion Activity]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Sugar Release]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Sugar 0.110]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tony37</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Sugar_Release&amp;diff=99366</id>
		<title>Sugar Release</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Sugar_Release&amp;diff=99366"/>
		<updated>2016-11-12T23:47:31Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tony37: Created page with &amp;quot;{{Latest Releases | rc = inline }} The table below shows details of OLPC OS releases for the XO laptops (including releases that are in the planning or in-development stages)....&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Latest Releases | rc = inline }}&lt;br /&gt;
The table below shows details of OLPC OS releases for the XO laptops (including releases that are in the planning or in-development stages).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are looking for the latest stable release, refer to the &amp;quot;Software&amp;quot; box on the right to make sure that you are obtaining the latest version intended for our users. The table below may include some releases which are experimental/unstable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For detailed information regarding the release including installation instructions, follow the corresponding &#039;&#039;Release notes&#039;&#039; link.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{#ask:&lt;br /&gt;
  [[Category:Releases]]&lt;br /&gt;
  |mainlabel=Release name&lt;br /&gt;
  |?Target platforms&lt;br /&gt;
  |?Release notes&lt;br /&gt;
  |?Release date&lt;br /&gt;
  |?Status&lt;br /&gt;
  |sort=Release date&lt;br /&gt;
  |order=descending&lt;br /&gt;
  |default=No releases with status=released found?!&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;{{Translations}}&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;clear: right; margin: .5em 0 .5em 1.3em; float:right; font-size:80%; max-width:205px; padding: 0.2em 0em 0.5em 0em; background:#c1fea1; color:#0a6c00; border:1px solid #8ad962;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| cellpadding=0 cellspacing=0 border=0 width=&amp;quot;190px&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- bgcolor=&amp;quot;#c1fea1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;18%&amp;quot;| &amp;amp;nbsp;[http://wiki.laptop.org/index.php?title=Template:Latest_Releases&amp;amp;action=edit +]&lt;br /&gt;
|align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;| &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Software&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
|align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;30%&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=3 align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; bgcolor=&amp;quot;#E92266&amp;quot;| &#039;&#039;&#039;XO&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|- bgcolor=&amp;quot;#c1fea1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|width=&amp;quot;30%&amp;quot;| || {{:Template:Latest Releases/stable}}&lt;br /&gt;
|- bgcolor=&amp;quot;#c1fea1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=3 align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; bgcolor=&amp;quot;#54B948&amp;quot;| &#039;&#039;&#039;[[School server|XS]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|- bgcolor=&amp;quot;#c1fea1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|| || {{:Template:Latest Releases/XS_server_software}}&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/includeonly&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== NOTE to EDITORS: ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The (lumped) code above has that shape so that &#039;span&#039; directives control the CR &amp;amp; LF (which otherwise would interfere with the layout if it was formatted). Edit carefully. Sorry for the lump. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Latest Releases}}&lt;br /&gt;
This template shows the latest releases available, displayed in an &amp;quot;infobox&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
You can control which lines appear in the infobox.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The actual links and strings for each line are separate from the template to simplify maintenance. &#039;&#039;&#039;To update a line in the infobox&#039;&#039;&#039; follow one of the links below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=1 cellspacing=0&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Line&lt;br /&gt;
! colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | Current text&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;| XO-1 builds&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| XO-1 stable &lt;br /&gt;
| {{:Template:Latest Releases/stable}} &lt;br /&gt;
| [{{fullurl:Template:Latest Releases/stable|action=edit}} edit]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;RC&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
| {{:Template:Latest Releases/rc}}&lt;br /&gt;
| [{{fullurl:Template:Latest Releases/rc|action=edit}} edit]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Stable flavors &lt;br /&gt;
| {{:Template:Latest Releases/flavors}} &#039;&#039;currently disabled&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| [{{fullurl:Template:Latest Releases/flavors|action=edit}} edit]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Fedora 11&lt;br /&gt;
| {{:Template:Latest Releases/f11-xo-1}}&lt;br /&gt;
| [{{fullurl:Template:Latest Releases/f11-xo-1|action=edit}} edit]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Devel &lt;br /&gt;
| {{:Template:Latest Releases/devel}}&lt;br /&gt;
| [{{fullurl:Template:Latest Releases/devel|action=edit}} edit] &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Firmware &lt;br /&gt;
| {{:Template:Latest Releases/firmware}} &lt;br /&gt;
| [{{fullurl:Template:Latest Releases/firmware|action=edit}} edit]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;| XO-1.5 builds&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[F11 on 1.5|F11 on 1.5]]&lt;br /&gt;
| {{:Template:Latest Releases/stable-1.5}} &lt;br /&gt;
| [{{fullurl:Template:Latest Releases/stable-1.5|action=edit}} edit]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Firmware]]&lt;br /&gt;
| {{:Template:Latest Releases/firmware-1.5}}&lt;br /&gt;
| [{{fullurl:Template:Latest Releases/firmware-1.5|action=edit}} edit]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;| Other builds&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Server &lt;br /&gt;
| {{:Template:Latest Releases/XS server software}}&lt;br /&gt;
| [{{fullurl:Template:Latest Releases/XS server software|action=edit}} edit] &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Extra Text&lt;br /&gt;
| {{:Template:Latest Releases/text}}&lt;br /&gt;
| [{{fullurl:Template:Latest Releases/text|action=edit}} edit]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Usage ==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Don&#039;t hardcode build and release information in pages.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Unless a page is obviously historical (e.g. &amp;quot;April 2007 test results&amp;quot;) never say &amp;quot;the current release is 708&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
Instead, invoke this template to present latest release information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;{{&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Latest Releases &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;}}&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you just want to display a particular latest build within a paragraph, you can invoke one of the sub-templates:&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;The current release candidate is {{Latest Releases/rc}}&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Samples ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{ Latest Releases }}&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;{{&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Latest Releases &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;}}&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;The current release candidate is {{Latest Releases/rc}}&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;produces&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;The current release candidate is {{Latest Releases/rc}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Template]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tony37</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=User:Tony37&amp;diff=99365</id>
		<title>User:Tony37</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=User:Tony37&amp;diff=99365"/>
		<updated>2016-11-12T23:42:33Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tony37: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;I have been a volunteer with OLE Nepal and later in Rwanda. I have posted several &lt;br /&gt;
activities, all of which are in the sandbox for one reason or another, mostly the last 5% of &lt;br /&gt;
a project takes 50% of the time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[School Server Wish List]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Platform]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Sugar-server Journal backup]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Lion Activity]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Sugar Release]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tony37</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Sugar-server_Journal_backup&amp;diff=98254</id>
		<title>Sugar-server Journal backup</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Sugar-server_Journal_backup&amp;diff=98254"/>
		<updated>2016-04-23T03:15:22Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tony37: /* Current status */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Feature|.]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Summary ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Modify the current Sugar Journal backup procedure to enable user&#039;s to maintain a permanent record of their documents on a school server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Owner ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Name: [[User:Tony| Tony Anderson]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Email: &amp;lt;tony_anderson@usa.net&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Current status ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Targeted release: TBD&lt;br /&gt;
* Last updated: 23 April 2016&lt;br /&gt;
* Percentage of completion: 0%&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Benefit to Sugar ==&lt;br /&gt;
The current backup system does not permit a user to save Journal objects which cause the total Journal size to exceed the available space on the XO. The proposed system will enable a backup to a school server to be limited to the size of the available store on the school server. It will provide the user with the ability to manage the size of the local datastore by deleting data files associated with Journal objects and enable them to be loaded again from the school server as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scope ==&lt;br /&gt;
This feature changes code in Sugar and on the school server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ds_backup.sh runs the ds_backup.py script on conection to the registered server. The current checks for backup frequency and network load are removed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;registration&#039; is removed from the menu. Registration is attempted with each schoolserver connection. The idmgr code on the school server is modified to ignore redundant registrations. Registration on only permitted to one school server. If a school server is not the one to which the registration is made, the ds_backup.py script is not run. An unregistered laptop registers with the first server it connects to. If this needs to be changed, the user can delete the server entry in the network control panel and then connect again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ds_backup.py script uses the datastore class to access the Journal. It opens each object. If the metadata has a Journal flag, the script checks whether the local object has been modified from the saved object (based on date). If so, the local copy is uploaded to replace the saved copy. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: if desired, the uploaded copy could become the prime and other copies could be kept with earlier version id. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the object is new (no Journal metadata entry), and does not have a data file with a user-supplied title, the metadata file is uploaded to the Log directory and the local object is deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the object is new but has a data file with a user-supplied name, the metadata is shown with a &#039;Journal&#039; flag and the object is uploaded to the &#039;Journal&#039; folder. The metadata is marked as &#039;keep&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If an object has a &#039;Journal&#039; metadata field (new or existing), the script checks the &#039;keep&#039; metadata field. If it is set and there is no local copy of the data file, it is downloaded from the school server. If it is not set and there is a local copy of the data file, it is deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The create_user module on the server is changed to create the user directory with subdirectories: Journal and Log. A complete log of the Journal consists to the metadata files in Log plus the metadata files in Journal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==UI Design==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Remove current registration menu item from main menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;favorite&#039; stars in Journal to control download and delete of local copies of data files &lt;br /&gt;
associated with Journal objects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How To Test ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Examine current Journal display&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Connect to school server&amp;lt;lli&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Verify that Journal display shows &#039;favorite&#039; star set on each object.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Verify that some Journal objects no not shown.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Clear favorite star on a Journal object.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Connect again to school server&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Verify that data file for that Journal object is no longer available to resume.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Set favorite star on the object&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Connect again to the school server&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Verify that data file is now available to resume&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== User Experience ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Has control over data objects using space on laptop.&lt;br /&gt;
Has access to data objects saved on school server&lt;br /&gt;
Journal does not show objects not associated with a data file&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Dependencies ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;What other packages (RPMs) depend on this package? Are there changes outside the developers&#039; control on which completion of this feature depends? In other words, does your feature depend on completion of another feature owned by someone else or that you would need to coordinate, which might cause you to be unable to finish on time? Other upstream projects like Python?&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature is to replace the current ds_backup-client. As an enhancment to the Journal, it is a feature of Sugar. There are parallel feature implementations included in GSOC 16 which may need lead to incompatiblities in the Journal view. These will neeed to be resolved as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The implementation will attempt to preserve compatibility so that it can be retroactively installed on earlier Sugar versions. The documentation will specify how and to which versions this is supported.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The implementation is based on python 2.7. The developers are testing on 13.2.5 and later releases. Implementation assumes future versions of Fedora are compatible. There are no known changes to upstream modules needed at this time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SOAS, Fedora, and Ubuntu implementations of Sugar are assumed to be compatible. Appropriate testing will be required. Dependencies such as generation of a serial-number can be included in the registration of the server by Sugar. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Contingency Plan ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Documentation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Added to Sugar Labs identified documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Release Notes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notify when feature is released.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Comments and Discussion ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is need for community dicussion on the changes to the ui. There may be concern that &lt;br /&gt;
visible access to Journal objects created for log purposes may not be visible in the Journal.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tony37</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Sugar-server_Journal_backup&amp;diff=98253</id>
		<title>Sugar-server Journal backup</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Sugar-server_Journal_backup&amp;diff=98253"/>
		<updated>2016-04-23T03:14:36Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tony37: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Feature|.]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Summary ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Modify the current Sugar Journal backup procedure to enable user&#039;s to maintain a permanent record of their documents on a school server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Owner ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Name: [[User:Tony| Tony Anderson]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Email: &amp;lt;tony_anderson@usa.net&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Current status ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Targeted release: TBD&lt;br /&gt;
* Last updated: 19 April 2016&lt;br /&gt;
* Percentage of completion: 0%&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Benefit to Sugar ==&lt;br /&gt;
The current backup system does not permit a user to save Journal objects which cause the total Journal size to exceed the available space on the XO. The proposed system will enable a backup to a school server to be limited to the size of the available store on the school server. It will provide the user with the ability to manage the size of the local datastore by deleting data files associated with Journal objects and enable them to be loaded again from the school server as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scope ==&lt;br /&gt;
This feature changes code in Sugar and on the school server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ds_backup.sh runs the ds_backup.py script on conection to the registered server. The current checks for backup frequency and network load are removed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;registration&#039; is removed from the menu. Registration is attempted with each schoolserver connection. The idmgr code on the school server is modified to ignore redundant registrations. Registration on only permitted to one school server. If a school server is not the one to which the registration is made, the ds_backup.py script is not run. An unregistered laptop registers with the first server it connects to. If this needs to be changed, the user can delete the server entry in the network control panel and then connect again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ds_backup.py script uses the datastore class to access the Journal. It opens each object. If the metadata has a Journal flag, the script checks whether the local object has been modified from the saved object (based on date). If so, the local copy is uploaded to replace the saved copy. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: if desired, the uploaded copy could become the prime and other copies could be kept with earlier version id. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the object is new (no Journal metadata entry), and does not have a data file with a user-supplied title, the metadata file is uploaded to the Log directory and the local object is deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the object is new but has a data file with a user-supplied name, the metadata is shown with a &#039;Journal&#039; flag and the object is uploaded to the &#039;Journal&#039; folder. The metadata is marked as &#039;keep&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If an object has a &#039;Journal&#039; metadata field (new or existing), the script checks the &#039;keep&#039; metadata field. If it is set and there is no local copy of the data file, it is downloaded from the school server. If it is not set and there is a local copy of the data file, it is deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The create_user module on the server is changed to create the user directory with subdirectories: Journal and Log. A complete log of the Journal consists to the metadata files in Log plus the metadata files in Journal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==UI Design==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Remove current registration menu item from main menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;favorite&#039; stars in Journal to control download and delete of local copies of data files &lt;br /&gt;
associated with Journal objects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How To Test ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Examine current Journal display&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Connect to school server&amp;lt;lli&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Verify that Journal display shows &#039;favorite&#039; star set on each object.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Verify that some Journal objects no not shown.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Clear favorite star on a Journal object.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Connect again to school server&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Verify that data file for that Journal object is no longer available to resume.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Set favorite star on the object&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Connect again to the school server&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Verify that data file is now available to resume&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== User Experience ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Has control over data objects using space on laptop.&lt;br /&gt;
Has access to data objects saved on school server&lt;br /&gt;
Journal does not show objects not associated with a data file&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Dependencies ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;What other packages (RPMs) depend on this package? Are there changes outside the developers&#039; control on which completion of this feature depends? In other words, does your feature depend on completion of another feature owned by someone else or that you would need to coordinate, which might cause you to be unable to finish on time? Other upstream projects like Python?&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature is to replace the current ds_backup-client. As an enhancment to the Journal, it is a feature of Sugar. There are parallel feature implementations included in GSOC 16 which may need lead to incompatiblities in the Journal view. These will neeed to be resolved as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The implementation will attempt to preserve compatibility so that it can be retroactively installed on earlier Sugar versions. The documentation will specify how and to which versions this is supported.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The implementation is based on python 2.7. The developers are testing on 13.2.5 and later releases. Implementation assumes future versions of Fedora are compatible. There are no known changes to upstream modules needed at this time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SOAS, Fedora, and Ubuntu implementations of Sugar are assumed to be compatible. Appropriate testing will be required. Dependencies such as generation of a serial-number can be included in the registration of the server by Sugar. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Contingency Plan ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Documentation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Added to Sugar Labs identified documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Release Notes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notify when feature is released.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Comments and Discussion ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is need for community dicussion on the changes to the ui. There may be concern that &lt;br /&gt;
visible access to Journal objects created for log purposes may not be visible in the Journal.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tony37</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Lion_Activity&amp;diff=98153</id>
		<title>Lion Activity</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Lion_Activity&amp;diff=98153"/>
		<updated>2016-04-21T03:45:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tony37: T AL&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The Lion (L10n) activity is designed to support learners using Sugar to provide localization for their own native languages. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is derived from the Hello World activity. Version 1 will be limited to Sugar activities installed on the learner&#039;s laptop. It also requires that the target native language be in the locales supported by the installed image.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===User Interaction===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The learner launches the activity by clicking on a rampant lion icon. She is presented a list of available locales and selects (double-clicks) on the target native language. She is then presented a list of installed activities which support localization (have a po directory) and selects an activity to localize.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the main process, the user is presented strings one-by-one from the activity&#039;s po file (or Pot if a po is not available). The learner accepts, edits, or creates a localized string.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When complete, the resulting po file is saved in the selected target activity (overwriting the existing file, if any). the activity will compile the po file to the associated mo file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The learner then sets the locale (if needed) and launches the target activity to check the newly localized version.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Usage===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The learner can share the localized activity with others by usb key (sugar-install-bundle) or by a school server (or possible dedicated localization server based on xsce).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At any time, the localized activity could be uploaded to be incorporated in translate.sugarlabs.org. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One can imagine a class assignment in which each learner takes a different Sugar activity and provides localization as class project. One could also imagine a team reviewing a localized activity to offer suggestions for alternate strings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A future version could add the capability to localize Sugar itself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A future version could add collaboration to enable teams to review and agree on a consensus choice for a localized string.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tony37</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=User:Tony37&amp;diff=98151</id>
		<title>User:Tony37</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=User:Tony37&amp;diff=98151"/>
		<updated>2016-04-21T03:16:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tony37: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;I have been a volunteer with OLE Nepal and later in Rwanda. I have posted several &lt;br /&gt;
activities, all of which are in the sandbox for one reason or another, mostly the last 5% of &lt;br /&gt;
a project takes 50% of the time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[School Server Wish List]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Platform]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Sugar-server Journal backup]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Lion Activity]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tony37</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Sugar-server_Journal_backup&amp;diff=98100</id>
		<title>Sugar-server Journal backup</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Sugar-server_Journal_backup&amp;diff=98100"/>
		<updated>2016-04-19T04:31:40Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tony37: Created page with &amp;quot;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt; . &amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt; == Summary ==  Modify the current Sugar Journal backup procedure to enable user&amp;#039;s to maintain a permanent record of their docum...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Feature|.]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Summary ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Modify the current Sugar Journal backup procedure to enable user&#039;s to maintain a permanent record of their documents on a school server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Owner ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Name: [[User:Tony| Tony Anderson]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Email: &amp;lt;tony_anderson@usa.net&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Current status ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Targeted release: TBD&lt;br /&gt;
* Last updated: 19 April 2016&lt;br /&gt;
* Percentage of completion: 0%&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Benefit to Sugar ==&lt;br /&gt;
The current backup system does not permit a user to save Journal objects which cause the total Journal size to exceed the available space on the XO. The proposed system will enable a backup to a school server to be limited to the size of the available store on the school server. It will provide the user with the ability to manage the size of the local datastore by deleting data files associated with Journal objects and enable them to be loaded again from the school server as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scope ==&lt;br /&gt;
This feature changes code in Sugar and on the school server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ds_backup.sh runs the ds_backup.py script on conection to the registered server. The current checks for backup frequency and network load are removed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;registration&#039; is removed from the menu. Registration is attempted with each schoolserver connection. The idmgr code on the school server is modified to ignore redundant registrations. Registration on only permitted to one school server. If a school server is not the one to which the registration is made, the ds_backup.py script is not run. An unregistered laptop registers with the first server it connects to. If this needs to be changed, the user can delete the server entry in the network control panel and then connect again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ds_backup.py script uses the datastore class to access the Journal. It opens each object. If the metadata has a Journal flag, the script checks whether the local object has been modified from the saved object (based on date). If so, the local copy is uploaded to replace the saved copy. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: if desired, the uploaded copy could become the prime and other copies could be kept with earlier version id. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the object is new (no Journal metadata entry), and does not have a data file with a user-supplied title, the metadata file is uploaded to the Log directory and the local object is deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the object is new but has a data file with a user-supplied name, the metadata is shown with a &#039;Journal&#039; flag and the object is uploaded to the &#039;Journal&#039; folder. The metadata is marked as &#039;keep&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If an object has a &#039;Journal&#039; metadata field (new or existing), the script checks the &#039;keep&#039; metadata field. If it is set and there is no local copy of the data file, it is downloaded from the school server. If it is not set and there is a local copy of the data file, it is deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The create_user module on the server is changed to create the user directory with subdirectories: Journal and Log. A complete log of the Journal consists to the metadata files in Log plus the metadata files in Journal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==UI Design==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Remove current registration menu item from main menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;favorite&#039; stars in Journal to control download and delete of local copies of data files &lt;br /&gt;
associated with Journal objects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How To Test ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Examine current Journal display&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Connect to school server&amp;lt;lli&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Verify that Journal display shows &#039;favorite&#039; star set on each object.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Verify that some Journal objects no not shown.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Clear favorite star on a Journal object.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Connect again to school server&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Verify that data file for that Journal object is no longer available to resume.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Set favorite star on the object&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Connect again to the school server&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Verify that data file is now available to resume&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== User Experience ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Has control over data objects using space on laptop.&lt;br /&gt;
Has access to data objects saved on school server&lt;br /&gt;
Journal does not show objects not associated with a data file&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Dependencies ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;Save as&#039; feature requiring all Journal objects with associated data files have a user-supplied title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Contingency Plan ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Documentation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Added to Sugar Labs identified documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Release Notes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notify when feature is released.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Comments and Discussion ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is need for community dicussion on the changes to the ui. There may be concern that &lt;br /&gt;
visible access to Journal objects created for log purposes may not be visible in the Journal.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tony37</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=User:Tony37&amp;diff=98099</id>
		<title>User:Tony37</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=User:Tony37&amp;diff=98099"/>
		<updated>2016-04-19T03:37:44Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tony37: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;I have been a volunteer with OLE Nepal and later in Rwanda. I have posted several &lt;br /&gt;
activities, all of which are in the sandbox for one reason or another, mostly the last 5% of &lt;br /&gt;
a project takes 50% of the time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[School Server Wish List]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Platform]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Sugar-server Journal backup]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tony37</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Translation_Community_Manager&amp;diff=97925</id>
		<title>Translation Community Manager</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Translation_Community_Manager&amp;diff=97925"/>
		<updated>2016-04-04T09:04:12Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tony37: Tony37 moved page Translation Community Manager to Translation-Community Manager&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;#REDIRECT [[Translation-Community Manager]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tony37</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Translation-Community_Manager&amp;diff=97924</id>
		<title>Translation-Community Manager</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Translation-Community_Manager&amp;diff=97924"/>
		<updated>2016-04-04T09:04:12Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tony37: Tony37 moved page Translation Community Manager to Translation-Community Manager&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The Translation-Community Manager leads and co-ordinates the efforts of the Sugar community to &lt;br /&gt;
enable users to experience Sugar in their own language.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Background ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Translation often refers to the specific task of providing text in a target language from the &lt;br /&gt;
text in the source language. For software, this task is conventionally divided into two steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Internationalization (I10n)&lt;br /&gt;
::Enable localization in the base software; and&lt;br /&gt;
* Localization (L10n)&lt;br /&gt;
::Provide local-language equivalents for text in the base software.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The base software for Sugar consists of two major components:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Sugar Desktop&lt;br /&gt;
:: The Sugar Desktop is part of a [https://fedoraproject.org/wiki/Remix Fedora Remix]. It provides the basic means for user interaction with Sugar. (Note that the Journal activity is a part of the Sugar Desktop.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Sugar Activities&lt;br /&gt;
:: Sugar provides a library, ASLO (activities.sugarlabs.org), of several hundred individual activities that a user can install and run. (Note that many Sugar activities can run independently from the Sugar Desktop, e.g., the GNOME Desktop, the Sugarizer environment, or in a web browser.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Internationalization (I10n) prepares the Sugar Desktop and Sugar Activities for localization (L10n).&lt;br /&gt;
* I18n&lt;br /&gt;
::Sugar and its activities are primarily written in Python (although increasingly JavaScript is being used for activity development). I18n is supported by giving developers a means to identify text that can be displayed to the user. Alternate text can be provided in other languages than the original and the user can select an alternate language for Sugar and the activities to use in displaying this text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::Selecting an alternate language for Sugar requires other technical steps. The language must be visible in Sugar (in the [https://github.com/sugarlabs/sugar/blob/master/extensions/cpsection/language/model.py#L124 Language Control Panel]). Selecting the language needs to change other aspects of Sugar (e.g display right-left, handle &#039;.&#039; or &#039;,&#039; for decimals and grouping multiples of 1000, display of dates, and so on).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* L10n&lt;br /&gt;
::Sugarlabs provides a service hosted at http://translate.sugarlabs.org that supports localization of Sugar. It is based on Pootle, a process and software to facilitate localization. In particular, it stores files with the original text for Sugar and its activities and files with the strings for local language &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:The overall process is fail-safe in the sense that if an alternate language is selected but there is no string available in that language, Sugar displays the original string found in the code (most often English). http://translate.sugarlabs.org saves translated strings that are immediately available for use in subsequent releases, leaving localizers to provide strings for new text in the release. If that text is not provided, the original text is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
==User Environment==&lt;br /&gt;
Sugar (Fedora Remix) is the software that supports the OLPC XO laptop. There have been about 2.5 million of these laptops manufactured and distributed. Many of these laptops are in daily use at schools and other institutions throughout the world. Typically, these laptops are used in a language of instruction (English, Spanish, French, ...). (The Remix is also on other hardware and is the basis of Sugar on a Stick, although no firm figures are available on how many learners use the Remix. There is also Debian support for the Sugar Desktop.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the schools using Sugar, many of the users communicate in a native language other than English. For example, in the Philippines, there are two official languages: Filipino (Tagalog) and English. While users can take advantage of Sugar and the laptops in English, they would enjoy an opportunity to use them in Filipino. In addition, there are indigenous languages spoken by some of the users. Making the Sugar experience available in these languages is typical of the localization opportunities for Sugar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In most cases localization is done by language specialists under the umbrella of Pootle (http://pootle.translatehouse.org/). This process requires technical skills and effective access to the internet. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Translation requires language skills in the target language and the source language (e.g. English, Spanish, French). If possible, I18n and specific language help arranged by the Translation-Community Manager should enable Sugar users to perform this localization on their own laptops. The installation or updating of the localization on translate.sugarlabs.org should be arranged by the Translation-Community Manager. (Also, providing a common intermediary language, such as Spanish, when translating to an indigenous language, such as Aymara, falls under the responsibility of the Translation-Community Manager: there are many more Aymara speakers who know Spanish than English.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Software Environment==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Change is an essential feature of computer use. Platforms change. Sugar is faced with some immediate tasks relating to this change:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Touch screen replacing trackpad and mouse keys, and, often, the keyboard;&lt;br /&gt;
* Move to Android and Web sevrices, which do not directly support Python;&lt;br /&gt;
* Developer focus on HTML5, CSS3, and JavaScript as an implementation environment for activities (and the Sugar experience itself).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Duties==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Translation-Community Manager, reporting to the Sugar Labs Oversight Board, is responsible to lead the community in supporting its goal to provide the Sugar experience in the users native language. The Translation-Community Manager will:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Work with the community to recruit volunteer help in supporting the translation process (occasional professional services to seed L10n efforts may be contracted as well.);&lt;br /&gt;
* Advise the Sugar Labs Oversight Board of supporting projects that need funding and to manage these projects, if approved;&lt;br /&gt;
* Develop and maintain the I18n capabilities of Sugar and its activities;&lt;br /&gt;
*# Arrange for development and maintenance of the I18n infrastructure such as translate.sugarlabs.org;&lt;br /&gt;
*# Arrange for an inventory of Sugar activities in ASLO (activities.sugarlabs.org) showing the current I18n and L10n status of each;&lt;br /&gt;
*# Arrange for development and maintenance of I18n infrastructure to support new and emerging platforms and software environments for Sugar;&lt;br /&gt;
* Work with the community to identify schools and institutions that have deployed Sugar and to arrange for members of the community to reach out to these deployments to offer help with localization or other needs;&lt;br /&gt;
*# Arrange as needed to add a language to those with I18n support in Sugar and Sugar activities;&lt;br /&gt;
*# Arrange for a simple and well-documented procedure for these deployments to provide their own translation and to share the results with the community;&lt;br /&gt;
* Report monthly to the Sugar Labs Oversight Board and to the community on the status of the translations program.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tony37</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Translation-Community_Manager&amp;diff=97923</id>
		<title>Translation-Community Manager</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Translation-Community_Manager&amp;diff=97923"/>
		<updated>2016-04-04T09:03:32Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tony37: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The Translation-Community Manager leads and co-ordinates the efforts of the Sugar community to &lt;br /&gt;
enable users to experience Sugar in their own language.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Background ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Translation often refers to the specific task of providing text in a target language from the &lt;br /&gt;
text in the source language. For software, this task is conventionally divided into two steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Internationalization (I10n)&lt;br /&gt;
::Enable localization in the base software; and&lt;br /&gt;
* Localization (L10n)&lt;br /&gt;
::Provide local-language equivalents for text in the base software.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The base software for Sugar consists of two major components:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Sugar Desktop&lt;br /&gt;
:: The Sugar Desktop is part of a [https://fedoraproject.org/wiki/Remix Fedora Remix]. It provides the basic means for user interaction with Sugar. (Note that the Journal activity is a part of the Sugar Desktop.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Sugar Activities&lt;br /&gt;
:: Sugar provides a library, ASLO (activities.sugarlabs.org), of several hundred individual activities that a user can install and run. (Note that many Sugar activities can run independently from the Sugar Desktop, e.g., the GNOME Desktop, the Sugarizer environment, or in a web browser.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Internationalization (I10n) prepares the Sugar Desktop and Sugar Activities for localization (L10n).&lt;br /&gt;
* I18n&lt;br /&gt;
::Sugar and its activities are primarily written in Python (although increasingly JavaScript is being used for activity development). I18n is supported by giving developers a means to identify text that can be displayed to the user. Alternate text can be provided in other languages than the original and the user can select an alternate language for Sugar and the activities to use in displaying this text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::Selecting an alternate language for Sugar requires other technical steps. The language must be visible in Sugar (in the [https://github.com/sugarlabs/sugar/blob/master/extensions/cpsection/language/model.py#L124 Language Control Panel]). Selecting the language needs to change other aspects of Sugar (e.g display right-left, handle &#039;.&#039; or &#039;,&#039; for decimals and grouping multiples of 1000, display of dates, and so on).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* L10n&lt;br /&gt;
::Sugarlabs provides a service hosted at http://translate.sugarlabs.org that supports localization of Sugar. It is based on Pootle, a process and software to facilitate localization. In particular, it stores files with the original text for Sugar and its activities and files with the strings for local language &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:The overall process is fail-safe in the sense that if an alternate language is selected but there is no string available in that language, Sugar displays the original string found in the code (most often English). http://translate.sugarlabs.org saves translated strings that are immediately available for use in subsequent releases, leaving localizers to provide strings for new text in the release. If that text is not provided, the original text is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
==User Environment==&lt;br /&gt;
Sugar (Fedora Remix) is the software that supports the OLPC XO laptop. There have been about 2.5 million of these laptops manufactured and distributed. Many of these laptops are in daily use at schools and other institutions throughout the world. Typically, these laptops are used in a language of instruction (English, Spanish, French, ...). (The Remix is also on other hardware and is the basis of Sugar on a Stick, although no firm figures are available on how many learners use the Remix. There is also Debian support for the Sugar Desktop.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the schools using Sugar, many of the users communicate in a native language other than English. For example, in the Philippines, there are two official languages: Filipino (Tagalog) and English. While users can take advantage of Sugar and the laptops in English, they would enjoy an opportunity to use them in Filipino. In addition, there are indigenous languages spoken by some of the users. Making the Sugar experience available in these languages is typical of the localization opportunities for Sugar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In most cases localization is done by language specialists under the umbrella of Pootle (http://pootle.translatehouse.org/). This process requires technical skills and effective access to the internet. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Translation requires language skills in the target language and the source language (e.g. English, Spanish, French). If possible, I18n and specific language help arranged by the Translation-Community Manager should enable Sugar users to perform this localization on their own laptops. The installation or updating of the localization on translate.sugarlabs.org should be arranged by the Translation-Community Manager. (Also, providing a common intermediary language, such as Spanish, when translating to an indigenous language, such as Aymara, falls under the responsibility of the Translation-Community Manager: there are many more Aymara speakers who know Spanish than English.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Software Environment==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Change is an essential feature of computer use. Platforms change. Sugar is faced with some immediate tasks relating to this change:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Touch screen replacing trackpad and mouse keys, and, often, the keyboard;&lt;br /&gt;
* Move to Android and Web sevrices, which do not directly support Python;&lt;br /&gt;
* Developer focus on HTML5, CSS3, and JavaScript as an implementation environment for activities (and the Sugar experience itself).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Duties==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Translation-Community Manager, reporting to the Sugar Labs Oversight Board, is responsible to lead the community in supporting its goal to provide the Sugar experience in the users native language. The Translation-Community Manager will:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Work with the community to recruit volunteer help in supporting the translation process (occasional professional services to seed L10n efforts may be contracted as well.);&lt;br /&gt;
* Advise the Sugar Labs Oversight Board of supporting projects that need funding and to manage these projects, if approved;&lt;br /&gt;
* Develop and maintain the I18n capabilities of Sugar and its activities;&lt;br /&gt;
*# Arrange for development and maintenance of the I18n infrastructure such as translate.sugarlabs.org;&lt;br /&gt;
*# Arrange for an inventory of Sugar activities in ASLO (activities.sugarlabs.org) showing the current I18n and L10n status of each;&lt;br /&gt;
*# Arrange for development and maintenance of I18n infrastructure to support new and emerging platforms and software environments for Sugar;&lt;br /&gt;
* Work with the community to identify schools and institutions that have deployed Sugar and to arrange for members of the community to reach out to these deployments to offer help with localization or other needs;&lt;br /&gt;
*# Arrange as needed to add a language to those with I18n support in Sugar and Sugar activities;&lt;br /&gt;
*# Arrange for a simple and well-documented procedure for these deployments to provide their own translation and to share the results with the community;&lt;br /&gt;
* Report monthly to the Sugar Labs Oversight Board and to the community on the status of the translations program.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tony37</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Translation_Manager&amp;diff=97914</id>
		<title>Translation Manager</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Translation_Manager&amp;diff=97914"/>
		<updated>2016-04-03T08:52:22Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tony37: Tony37 moved page Translation Manager to Translation Community Manager&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;#REDIRECT [[Translation Community Manager]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tony37</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Translation-Community_Manager&amp;diff=97913</id>
		<title>Translation-Community Manager</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Translation-Community_Manager&amp;diff=97913"/>
		<updated>2016-04-03T08:52:22Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tony37: Tony37 moved page Translation Manager to Translation Community Manager&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The Translation Manager leads and co-ordinates the efforts of the Sugar community to &lt;br /&gt;
enable users to experience Sugar in their own language.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Background ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Translation often refers to the specific task of providing text in a target language from the &lt;br /&gt;
text in the source language. For software, this task is conventionally divided into two steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Internationalization (I10n)&lt;br /&gt;
::Enable localization in the base software&lt;br /&gt;
* Localization (L10n)&lt;br /&gt;
::Provide local language equivalents for text in the base software&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The base software for Sugar consists of two major components:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Sugar Desktop&lt;br /&gt;
:: The Sugar Desktop is part of a Fedora remix. It provides the basic means for user interaction with Sugar. The Journal activity is a part of the Sugar Desktop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Sugar Activities&lt;br /&gt;
:: Sugar provides a library, ASLO (activities.sugarlabs.org) of several hundred individual activities which a user can install and run.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Internationalization (I10n) prepares the Sugar Desktop and Sugar Activities for localization (L10n).&lt;br /&gt;
* I10n&lt;br /&gt;
::Sugar and its activities are primarily written in Python. I10n is supported by giving developers a means to identify text that can be displayed to the user. Alternate text can be provided in other languages than the original and the user can select an alternate language for Sugar and the activities to use in displaying this text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::Selecting an alternate language for Sugar requires other technical steps. The language must be visible in Sugar (Language Control Panel). Selecting the language needs to change other aspects of Sugar (e.g display right-left, handle &#039;.&#039; or &#039;,&#039; for decimals and grouping multiples of 1000, display of dates, and so on).&lt;br /&gt;
* L10n&lt;br /&gt;
::Sugarlabs provides a page: http://translate.sugarlabs.org which supports localization of Sugar. It is based on Pootle, a process and software to facilitate localization. In particular, it stores files with the original text for Sugar and its activities and files with the strings for local languages. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::The overall process is fail-safe in the sense that if an alternate language is selected but there is no string available in that language, Sugar displays the original. The translate wiki page saves translated strings which are immediately available for use in subsequent releases - leaving localizers to provide strings for new text in the release. If that text is not provided, the original text is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Environment==&lt;br /&gt;
::Sugar (Fedora Remix) is the software which supports the OLPC XO laptop. There have been about 2.5 million of these laptops manufactured and distributed. Many of these laptops are in daily use at schools and other institutions throughout the world. Typically, these laptops are used in a language of instruction (English, Spanish, French, ....).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::At these schools, many of the users communicate in a native language. For example, in the Philippines, there are two official languages: Filipino (Tagalog) and English. While users can take advantage of Sugar and the laptops in English, they would enjoy an opportunity to use them in Filipino. In addition, there are indigenous languages spoken by some of the users. Making the Sugar experience available in these languages is another localization opportunity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::In most cases localization is done by language specialists under the umbrella of Pootle (http://pootle.translatehouse.org/). This process requires technical skills and effective access to the internet. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::Actually, translation requires language skills in the target language and the source language.  (e.g. English, Spanish, French). If possible, I10n and specific language help arranged by the Translation Manager should enable Sugar users to perform this localization on their own laptops. The installation or updating of the localization on translate.sugarlabs.org should be arranged by the Translation Manager.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Software Environment==&lt;br /&gt;
::Change is an essential feature of computer use. Platforms change. Sugar is faced with some immediate tasks relating to this change.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Touch screen replacing trackpad and mouse keys - and, often, the keyboard.&lt;br /&gt;
* Move to Android which does not support Python&lt;br /&gt;
* Developer focus on html5, css3, and javascript as an implentation environment for activities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Duties==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Translation Manager, reporting to the SugarLabs Oversight Board, is responsible to lead the community in supporting its goal to provide the Sugar experience in the users own language.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Work with the community to recruit volunteer help in supporting the translation process.&lt;br /&gt;
* Advise the SugarLabs Oversight Board of supporting projects which need funding and to manage these projects, if approved.&lt;br /&gt;
* Develop and maintain the I10n capabilities of Sugar and its activities.&lt;br /&gt;
*# Arrange for development and maintenance of I10n infrastructure such as translate.sugarlabs.org&lt;br /&gt;
*# Arrange for an inventory of Sugar activities in ASLO (activities.sugarlabs.org) showing the current I10n and L10n status of each.&lt;br /&gt;
*# Arrange for development and maintenance of I10n infrastructure to support new platforms and software environments for Sugar&lt;br /&gt;
* Work with the community to identify schools and institutions which have deployed Sugar and to arrange for members of the community to reach out to these deployments to offer help with localization or other needs.&lt;br /&gt;
*# Arrange as needed to add a language to those with I10n support in Sugar and Sugar activities&lt;br /&gt;
*# Arrange for a simple and well-documented procedure for these deployments to provide their own translation and to share the results with the community.&lt;br /&gt;
* Report monthly to the SugarLabs Oversight Board and to the community on the status of the translations program.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tony37</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Translation-Community_Manager&amp;diff=97903</id>
		<title>Translation-Community Manager</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Translation-Community_Manager&amp;diff=97903"/>
		<updated>2016-04-03T02:37:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tony37: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The Translation Manager leads and co-ordinates the efforts of the Sugar community to &lt;br /&gt;
enable users to experience Sugar in their own language.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Background ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Translation often refers to the specific task of providing text in a target language from the &lt;br /&gt;
text in the source language. For software, this task is conventionally divided into two steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Internationalization (I10n)&lt;br /&gt;
::Enable localization in the base software&lt;br /&gt;
* Localization (L10n)&lt;br /&gt;
::Provide local language equivalents for text in the base software&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The base software for Sugar consists of two major components:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Sugar Desktop&lt;br /&gt;
:: The Sugar Desktop is part of a Fedora remix. It provides the basic means for user interaction with Sugar. The Journal activity is a part of the Sugar Desktop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Sugar Activities&lt;br /&gt;
:: Sugar provides a library, ASLO (activities.sugarlabs.org) of several hundred individual activities which a user can install and run.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Internationalization (I10n) prepares the Sugar Desktop and Sugar Activities for localization (L10n).&lt;br /&gt;
* I10n&lt;br /&gt;
::Sugar and its activities are primarily written in Python. I10n is supported by giving developers a means to identify text that can be displayed to the user. Alternate text can be provided in other languages than the original and the user can select an alternate language for Sugar and the activities to use in displaying this text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::Selecting an alternate language for Sugar requires other technical steps. The language must be visible in Sugar (Language Control Panel). Selecting the language needs to change other aspects of Sugar (e.g display right-left, handle &#039;.&#039; or &#039;,&#039; for decimals and grouping multiples of 1000, display of dates, and so on).&lt;br /&gt;
* L10n&lt;br /&gt;
::Sugarlabs provides a page: http://translate.sugarlabs.org which supports localization of Sugar. It is based on Pootle, a process and software to facilitate localization. In particular, it stores files with the original text for Sugar and its activities and files with the strings for local languages. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::The overall process is fail-safe in the sense that if an alternate language is selected but there is no string available in that language, Sugar displays the original. The translate wiki page saves translated strings which are immediately available for use in subsequent releases - leaving localizers to provide strings for new text in the release. If that text is not provided, the original text is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Environment==&lt;br /&gt;
::Sugar (Fedora Remix) is the software which supports the OLPC XO laptop. There have been about 2.5 million of these laptops manufactured and distributed. Many of these laptops are in daily use at schools and other institutions throughout the world. Typically, these laptops are used in a language of instruction (English, Spanish, French, ....).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::At these schools, many of the users communicate in a native language. For example, in the Philippines, there are two official languages: Filipino (Tagalog) and English. While users can take advantage of Sugar and the laptops in English, they would enjoy an opportunity to use them in Filipino. In addition, there are indigenous languages spoken by some of the users. Making the Sugar experience available in these languages is another localization opportunity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::In most cases localization is done by language specialists under the umbrella of Pootle (http://pootle.translatehouse.org/). This process requires technical skills and effective access to the internet. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::Actually, translation requires language skills in the target language and the source language.  (e.g. English, Spanish, French). If possible, I10n and specific language help arranged by the Translation Manager should enable Sugar users to perform this localization on their own laptops. The installation or updating of the localization on translate.sugarlabs.org should be arranged by the Translation Manager.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Software Environment==&lt;br /&gt;
::Change is an essential feature of computer use. Platforms change. Sugar is faced with some immediate tasks relating to this change.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Touch screen replacing trackpad and mouse keys - and, often, the keyboard.&lt;br /&gt;
* Move to Android which does not support Python&lt;br /&gt;
* Developer focus on html5, css3, and javascript as an implentation environment for activities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Duties==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Translation Manager, reporting to the SugarLabs Oversight Board, is responsible to lead the community in supporting its goal to provide the Sugar experience in the users own language.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Work with the community to recruit volunteer help in supporting the translation process.&lt;br /&gt;
* Advise the SugarLabs Oversight Board of supporting projects which need funding and to manage these projects, if approved.&lt;br /&gt;
* Develop and maintain the I10n capabilities of Sugar and its activities.&lt;br /&gt;
*# Arrange for development and maintenance of I10n infrastructure such as translate.sugarlabs.org&lt;br /&gt;
*# Arrange for an inventory of Sugar activities in ASLO (activities.sugarlabs.org) showing the current I10n and L10n status of each.&lt;br /&gt;
*# Arrange for development and maintenance of I10n infrastructure to support new platforms and software environments for Sugar&lt;br /&gt;
* Work with the community to identify schools and institutions which have deployed Sugar and to arrange for members of the community to reach out to these deployments to offer help with localization or other needs.&lt;br /&gt;
*# Arrange as needed to add a language to those with I10n support in Sugar and Sugar activities&lt;br /&gt;
*# Arrange for a simple and well-documented procedure for these deployments to provide their own translation and to share the results with the community.&lt;br /&gt;
* Report monthly to the SugarLabs Oversight Board and to the community on the status of the translations program.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tony37</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Translation-Community_Manager&amp;diff=97885</id>
		<title>Translation-Community Manager</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Translation-Community_Manager&amp;diff=97885"/>
		<updated>2016-04-02T04:36:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tony37: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The Translation Manager leads and co-ordinates the efforts of the Sugar community to &lt;br /&gt;
enable users to experience Sugar in their own language.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Background ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Translation often refers to the specific task of providing text in a target language from the &lt;br /&gt;
text in the source language. For software, this task is conventionally divided into two steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Internationalization (I10n)&lt;br /&gt;
::Enable localization in the base software&lt;br /&gt;
* Localization (L10n)&lt;br /&gt;
::Provide local language equivalents for text in the base software&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The base software for Sugar consists of two major components:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Sugar Desktop&lt;br /&gt;
:: The Sugar Desktop is part of a Fedora remix. It provides the basic means for user interaction with Sugar. The Journal activity is a part of the Sugar Desktop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Sugar Activities&lt;br /&gt;
:: Sugar provides a library, ASLO (activities.sugarlabs.org) of several hundred individual activities which a user can install and run.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Internationalization (I10n) prepares the Sugar Desktop and Sugar Activities for localization (L10n).&lt;br /&gt;
* I10n&lt;br /&gt;
::Sugar and its activities are primarily written in Python. I10n is supported by giving developers a means to identify text that can be displayed to the user. Alternate text can be provided in other languages than the original and the user can select an alternate language for Sugar and the activities to use in displaying this text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::Selecting an alternate language for Sugar requires other technical steps. The language must be visible in Sugar (Language Control Panel). Selecting the language needs to change other aspects of Sugar (e.g display right-left, handle &#039;.&#039; or &#039;,&#039; for decimals and grouping multiples of 1000, display of dates, and so on).&lt;br /&gt;
* L10n&lt;br /&gt;
::Sugarlabs provides a page: http://translate.sugarlabs.org which supports localization of Sugar. It is based on Pootle, a process and software to facilitate localization. In particular, it stores files with the original text for Sugar and its activities and files with the strings for local languages. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::The overall process is fail-safe in the sense that if an alternate language is selected but there is no string available in that language, Sugar displays the original. The translate wiki page saves translated strings which are immediately available for use in subsequent releases - leaving localizers to provide strings for new text in the release. If that text is not provided, the original text is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Environment==&lt;br /&gt;
::Sugar (Fedora Remix) is the software which supports the OLPC XO laptop. There have been about 2.5 million of these laptops manufactured and distributed. Many of these laptops are in daily use at schools and other institutions throughout the world. Typically, these laptops are used in a language of instruction (English, Spanish, French, ....).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::At these schools, many of the users communicate in a native language. For example, in the Philippines, there are two official languages: Filipino (Tagalog) and English. While users can take advantage of Sugar and the laptops in English, they would enjoy an opportunity to use them in Filipino. In addition, there are indigenous languages spoken by some of the users. Making the Sugar experience available in these languages is another localization opportunity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::In most cases localization is done by language specialists under the umbrella of Pootle (http://pootle.translatehouse.org/). This process requires technical skills and effective access to the internet. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::Actually, translation requires language skills in the target language and the source language.  (e.g. English, Spanish, French). If possible, I10n and specific language help arranged by the Translation Manager should enable Sugar users to perform this localization on their own laptops. The installation or updating of the localization on translate.sugarlabs.org should be arranged by the Translation Manager.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Software Environment==&lt;br /&gt;
::Change is an essential feature of computer use. Platforms change. Sugar is faced with some immediate tasks relating to this change.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Touch screen replacing trackpad and mouse keys - and, often, the keyboard.&lt;br /&gt;
* Move to Android which does not support Python&lt;br /&gt;
* Developer focus on html5, css3, and javascript as an implentation environment for activities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Duties==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Translation Manager, reporting to the SugarLabs Oversight Board, is responsible to lead the community in supporting its goal to provide the Sugar experience in the users own language.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Work with the community to recruit volunteer help in supporting the translation process.&lt;br /&gt;
* Advise the SugarLabs Oversight Board of supporting projects which need funding and to manage these projects, if approved.&lt;br /&gt;
* Develop and maintain the I10n capabilities of Sugar and its activities.&lt;br /&gt;
*# Arrange for development and maintenance of I10n infrastructure such as translate.sugarlabs.org&lt;br /&gt;
*# Arrange for an inventory of Sugar activities in ASLO (activities.sugarlabs.org) showing the current I10n and L10n status of each.&lt;br /&gt;
*# Arrange for development and maintenance of I10n infrastructure to support new platforms and software environments for Sugar&lt;br /&gt;
* Work with the community to identify schools and institutions which have deployed Sugar and to arrange for members of the community to reach out to these deployments to offer help with localization or other needs.&lt;br /&gt;
*# Arrange as needed to add a language to those with I10n support in Sugar and Sugar activities&lt;br /&gt;
*# Arrange for a simple and well-documented procedure for these deployments to provide their own translation and to share the results with the community.&lt;br /&gt;
* Report regularly to the SugarLabs Oversight Board and to the community on the status of the translations program.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tony37</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Translation-Community_Manager&amp;diff=97884</id>
		<title>Translation-Community Manager</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Translation-Community_Manager&amp;diff=97884"/>
		<updated>2016-04-02T03:22:27Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tony37: Created page with &amp;quot;The Translation Manager role is to co-ordinate the efforts of the Sugar community to  enable users to experience Sugar in their own language.  == Background ==  Translation of...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The Translation Manager role is to co-ordinate the efforts of the Sugar community to &lt;br /&gt;
enable users to experience Sugar in their own language.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Background ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Translation often refers to the specific task of providing text in a target language from the &lt;br /&gt;
text in the source language. For software, this task is conventionally divided into two steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Internationalization (I10n)&lt;br /&gt;
::Enable localization in the base software&lt;br /&gt;
* Localization (L10n)&lt;br /&gt;
::Provide local language equivalents for text in the base software&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The base software for Sugar consists of two major components:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Sugar Desktop&lt;br /&gt;
:: The Sugar Desktop is part of a Fedora remix. It provides the basic means for user interaction with Sugar. It includes the Journal activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Sugar Activities&lt;br /&gt;
:: Sugar provides a library of several hundred individual activities which a user can install and run.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Internationalization (I10n) prepares the Sugar Desktop and Sugar Activities for localization (L10n).&lt;br /&gt;
* I10n&lt;br /&gt;
::Sugar and its activities are primarily written in Python. I10n is supported by giving developers a means to identify text that can be displayed to the user. Alternate text can be provided in other languages than the original and the user can select an alternate language for Sugar and the activities to use in displaying this text.&lt;br /&gt;
::Selecting an alternate language for Sugar requires other technical steps. The language must be visible in Sugar (Language Control Panel). Selecting the language needs to change other aspects of Sugar (e.g display right-left, handle &#039;.&#039; or &#039;,&#039; for decimals and grouping multiples of 1000, display of dates, and so on).&lt;br /&gt;
* L10n&lt;br /&gt;
::Sugarlabs provides a page: http://translate.sugarlabs.org which supports localization of Sugar. It is based on Pootle, a process and software to facilitate localization. In particular, it stores files with the original text for Sugar and its activities and files with the strings for local languages. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::The overall process is fail-safe in the sense that if an alternate language is selected but there is no string available in that language, Sugar displays the original. The translate wiki page saves translated strings which are immediately available for use in subsequent releases - leaving localizers to provide strings for new text in the release. If that text is not provided, the original text is displayed.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tony37</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Translation_Proposal&amp;diff=97883</id>
		<title>Translation Proposal</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Translation_Proposal&amp;diff=97883"/>
		<updated>2016-04-02T02:31:38Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tony37: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[ Translation Manager ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Translation Proposal==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;A goal of Sugar Labs is to enable our users to experience Sugar in their own native language.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[Note: The current mission statements focus on languages (localize to as many languages as possible with high quality). The above statement is intended to focus on users not languages. I believe our goal should be to enable our users to experience Sugar in their native language.]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This goal requires two steps - internationalization (I18n) and localization (l10n). The first step (I18n) is to provide tools and documentation to facilitate the second step (L10n). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In general, I18n is the responsibility of the Sugar development team. Localization, l10n, requires effort by volunteers who know the native language as well as English (the language of the POT master files).  Translation into mother tongues by bilingual non-English speakers (e.g. Spanish-Aymara) is also supported by keeping Spanish PO files translated at high levels of completion. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sugar is distributed in a release (e.g. Sugar 0.108 is released in 13.2.7) with the  master files updated for new and changed strings. These master files are available from http://translate.sugarlabs.org&amp;quot;. Specifically, the files for the current releases of Sugar are identified as projects: sugar and sugar-toolkit-gtk3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, this site tracks localization of Sugar activities which support Pootle localization. There are currently seven activities which are integral to Sugar (not-erasable):  Browse (Web), Image Viewer, Log, Read, Record, Terminal, and Write (excluding Journal which is localized in Sugar).  These seven activities enable Pootle localization (are projects on tranlate.sugarlabs.org). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Localization Delegate===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SugarLabs needs a Localization delegate. This is a role which Chris Leonard has filled from 2008-2013.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====L10n leadership tasks:=====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Monitoring new activity development and advocating for i18n of code&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(gettext formatting for Python activities, other similar methods for JavaScript work).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Setting up new languages for availability in Pootle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Act as Sugar Labs i18n coordinator for oversight of performance on contracts to develop L10n projects approved by SLOBs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reaching upstream to create the glibc locales for new languages required for them to be selectable languages in Linux-based systems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Requesting github permissions for the pootle git-hub user (to enable pull of new templates, push of completed translations).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Monitoring Pootle for currency of templates, update of templates on existing languages, commit new translations.  These tasks are the responsibility of individual language team leaders, but in practice need an overseer on behalf of all languages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arranging &#039;L10n&#039; days at deployments where teachers have students improve strings in the relevant .po or supply missing strings. The outcome of an &#039;L10n&#039; day should be an updated localization for that native language. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrange for participating deployments to be publicly recognized for their contribution.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suggestions by Sebastian:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Prepare glibc locales / other similar for Web stack *&lt;br /&gt;
* Maintain pootle servers and databases *&lt;br /&gt;
* Review / update translations and repositories *&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep git automation scripts *&lt;br /&gt;
* Add new projects / languages *&lt;br /&gt;
* Document processes&lt;br /&gt;
* Respond to queries from language teams&lt;br /&gt;
* Coordinate upstreaming of local work&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Where * marks items requiring more technical knowledge or research&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Recover L10n work done in the following languages that was lost in Pootle migration:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Crioulo-PT&lt;br /&gt;
* Dari&lt;br /&gt;
* Kinyarwanda&lt;br /&gt;
* Marovo&lt;br /&gt;
* Nauruan&lt;br /&gt;
* Sindhi&lt;br /&gt;
* Tuvaluan&lt;br /&gt;
* Urdu&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Recover L10n and repo connections to numerous missing activities&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===ToDo:===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Discussion in the committee shows that our I18n infrastructure is in need of urgent maintenance. &lt;br /&gt;
ASLO no longer provides links to the git version. Many activities were repaired by the GCI participants. These need to be reviewed to make sure that the translation files are available and current.  Chris Leonard has provided a list of &#039;missing activities&#039;, i.e. activities which had localization files but which were misplaced in a pootle migration. Etoys has not been updated since 2009 and the localization files are no longer available in Pootle, but we do have backups. The translate.sugarlabs.org which is the repository for the localization files is missing some files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Provide a documented process for a local deployment to localize Sugar and some activities to a local language. The goal of the deployment is to make Sugar (and use of the XO more accessible).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Chris Leonard has suggested that we base localization by a deployment on virtaal (a component of Pootle). He has installed and run this tool on an XO in the gnome desktop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* As Caryl has pointed out, we also need to document this process so that it can be accomplished at a school as a classroom activity. This involves training teachers and providing tutorials for students.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Identify Sugar activities in ASLO which do not support localization (are not projects in translate.sugarlabs.org). Arrange for them to use gettext. Create master files (localize) to English.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Priority to Spanish language activities&lt;br /&gt;
* Other important or popular Sugar activities&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make L10n activity more visible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adam Holt has suggested some regular blogging or microblogging to highlight achievements by the L10n community.  There are some potentially low-cost ways to achieve this by making Pootle a little &amp;quot;noisier&amp;quot; (in the ggod sense). By way of example, we used to havea mailing list that monitored every commit made by the old Pootle instance  http://lists.sugarlabs.org/archive/pootle-commits/  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The new Pootle has a number of RSS feeds that could be channeled to a more visible format echoing more loudly the action happening on Poolte. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sugar development could review Sugar (Python) activities to see if they support Pootle and attempt, eg. through GSOC, to get activities upgraded to implement Pootle and to include a base set of English Pootle files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Define a standard I18n method for Sugarizer and sugar-web-activities. Chris Leonard recommends using the procedure adopted for turtleblocks.js. We need corresponding documentation of this process to enable it to be used immediately by GSOC participants who implement or port activities as sugar-web-activities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Determine whether a common process can be used to localize sugar-web-activities and Sugarizer and its activities. (e.g. by using polyglot.js)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Provide a tool to to test python source code for compliance with the needs of Pootle&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* All strings not in comments are referenced by gettext&lt;br /&gt;
* All strings match a msgstr in the corresponding en.po file &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This may not be feasible since some strings ought not to be localized (e.g. the gsettings schema).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Provide a tool to verify that the available localizations are included in a release.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Develop a glossary of terms needed to refer to the XO, Sugar, and actions to be taken by users (e.g. close the XO, switch to the Group View). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The range.py (needing refinement) can be used to look at the strings in a po file to be localized to ensure that they do not use conflicting words or a more technical vocabulary that necessary. Every extra string in the master file may result in 50-100 translations. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prepare a GSOC task to develop an I18n strategy and supporting tools for JavaScript activities. The following can be a good starting point:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;http://www.localeplanet.com/&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;https://blog.mozilla.org/webdev/2011/10/06/i18njs-internationalize-your-javascript-with-a-little-help-from-json-and-the-server/&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;http://airbnb.io/polyglot.js/&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sugarizer has three translation files, including this master file: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;https://github.com/llaske/sugarizer/blob/master/locale.ini&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Document and improve all processes to be &#039;run-over-by-bus-safe&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Original Draft==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SugarLabs needs a Localization delegate. The purpose of this proposal is to document the current Internationalization/Localization process and to define the role of the Localization delegate in that process. Some proposals for expansion/modification of the process are included.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chris Leonard is arguably the incumbent Localization delegate:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: this title needs comment. The &#039;governance&#039; page suggests that this position should be a delegate and not a co-ordinator since SLOBs cannot name a co-ordinator. I chose localization because I believe I18n (creating the framework and base) is the responsibility of sugar-devel and localization is a community responsibility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;For quite some time (starting in 2008, as I recall) under the &amp;quot;title&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
of Translation Team Coordinator I worked in that role (unpaid) and I&lt;br /&gt;
can certainly help in fleshing out details.  From 2008 - 2013 I was&lt;br /&gt;
able to dedicate adequate time to both technical aspects of i18n&lt;br /&gt;
(Pootle infrastructure and i18n advocacy/assistance to developers) as&lt;br /&gt;
well as L10n (localization mailing list, maintain L10n wiki pages,&lt;br /&gt;
support to new language communities, recruiting new localizers, etc.).&lt;br /&gt;
The good news (for me) is that in 2013 an extended period of&lt;br /&gt;
unemployment ended, the bad news is that I found myself unable to&lt;br /&gt;
continue to provide sufficient support to the community for several&lt;br /&gt;
reasons (technical issues with Pootle version migration as well as&lt;br /&gt;
development migration to github beyond my scope to manage alone) and a&lt;br /&gt;
slump in L10n activity by the community (perhaps in part because of&lt;br /&gt;
insufficient efforts to organize and rally the troops).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
My employment situation has stabilized somewhat and I would like to&lt;br /&gt;
continue to contribute to the i18n/L10n effort, but as many have&lt;br /&gt;
experienced throughout the financial crisis, my new employment&lt;br /&gt;
circumstances are only providing a fraction of the income I had made&lt;br /&gt;
in the past, so my &amp;quot;free time&amp;quot; is subject to the demands of pursuing&lt;br /&gt;
supplemental income.  I have done some work in support of Sugar Labs&lt;br /&gt;
since (e.g. Awajún glibc locale drafting), for which I might be&lt;br /&gt;
compensated for my time and effort from the TripAdvisor grant based on&lt;br /&gt;
a template agreement worked out with the SFC and the prior approval of&lt;br /&gt;
the Sugar Labs Oversight Board.  That is essentially piece-work, a&lt;br /&gt;
pre-agreed amount for a pre-agreed deliverable (a committed glibc&lt;br /&gt;
locale), I have not yet actually drawn any TripAdvsor funds for this&lt;br /&gt;
purpose, but I may make such requests in future (assuming necessary&lt;br /&gt;
pre-approvals are granted).&amp;quot; cjl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Translation has two separate parts: internationalization(I18n) and localization (L10n).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Sugar-Devel team is responsible for I18n (preparing the framework to support localization) and the community is responsible for L10n - providing translations (by default, from English) to other languages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The current process is based on Pootle [[http://pootle.translatehouse.org/]] server as the means of distributing localizations [[http://translate.sugarlabs.org]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
L10n leadership tasks:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Monitoring new activity development and advocating for i18n of code&lt;br /&gt;
(gettext formatting).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Setting up new languages for availability in Pootle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reaching upstream to create glibc locales for new languages.&lt;br /&gt;
Necessary for them to be selectable languages in Linux-based systems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Requesting github permissions for the pootle git-hub user (to enable&lt;br /&gt;
pull of new templates, push of completed translations).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Monitoring Pootle for currency of templates, update of templates on&lt;br /&gt;
existing languages, commit of new translations.  Tasks technically the&lt;br /&gt;
responsibility of individual language team leaders, but in practice&lt;br /&gt;
needing an overseer on behalf of all languages. - cjl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let&#039;s divide the languages into three groups:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* English (the base language)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Note: English is the original language of many activities, but there&lt;br /&gt;
are also many written first in Spanish, working with developers to&lt;br /&gt;
make Spanish-originating activities capable of being translated to&lt;br /&gt;
other languages (via an English bridge)  is an issue requiring&lt;br /&gt;
attention. - cjl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Mediums of instruction (languages used at deployments as a common language where more than one language is spoken)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Local language (languages used by students at home)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
English is not always the base language of our South Amreican activity&lt;br /&gt;
developers, as mentioned, this requires some careful thought and&lt;br /&gt;
action to make these Spanish-originating activities more widely&lt;br /&gt;
available in other languages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fortunately, the Pootle system can take the ongoing Spanish&lt;br /&gt;
translation of an English-originating activity and show it to&lt;br /&gt;
indigenous language translators (e.g. for Spanish to&lt;br /&gt;
Aymara/Quechua/Guarani/Awajún L10n where localizers are primarily&lt;br /&gt;
bilingual, but not English-speaking).  Similarly, French translations&lt;br /&gt;
(if present in Pootle) can facilitate L10n into the indigenous&lt;br /&gt;
languages of Francophone Africa.  This helps us create bridges to&lt;br /&gt;
indigenous languages by localization into a &amp;quot;language-of-instruction&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
e.g. Spanish, French) early in the development cycle. cjl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a new Sugar release is made, the Pootle English master files should be a part of the release. Sugar development should ensure that Pootle files are available for all software in the release.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Actually, POT template files (Pootle English master files) need to be&lt;br /&gt;
generated early in the development cycle, well before release and must&lt;br /&gt;
be updated regularly as strings change in source. Those updated&lt;br /&gt;
templates need to be synched on Pootle and made available as soon as&lt;br /&gt;
possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Typically there is a &amp;quot;string-freeze&amp;quot; declared for several weeks prior&lt;br /&gt;
to release allowing localizers time to do their work in a stable&lt;br /&gt;
background.  The release itself includes all localizations made up to&lt;br /&gt;
the release date (as PO files). cjl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sugar may want to provide localization for one or more mediums of instruction (e.g. Spanish, French, Arabic). Since this would imply that files for these localizations are available at release, SugarLabs should decide which, if any, of these languages are to be supported.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Agreed that a core set of languages should be completed prior to&lt;br /&gt;
release, not entirely sure about declaring &amp;quot;supported languages&amp;quot;, we&lt;br /&gt;
should release what we have to encourage further work. cjl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deployments (or deployment sponsors) may need localization of Sugar for specific local languages (e.g. Kinyarwanda, Haitian Creole,Sotho, Xhosa). I believe these localizations are most likely to come from Sugar/XO deployments where the language is used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You would think so, and we can talk about Khmer (Cambodian) at some&lt;br /&gt;
other time, but the reality is that you run into odd things more often&lt;br /&gt;
than you would think, sometimes for the reasons you mention below&lt;br /&gt;
(language-of-instruction), sometimes it is more complex than that. - cjl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, strange things happen. For example, Rwanda is one of the largest and most active deployments. However, there is no Kinyarwanda localization. The reason is probably that in Rwanda the OLPC laptops are part of a path to English. They are introduced at the fourth grade, the first year when the required medium of instruction is English. While Kinyarwanda is a subject in grades 4-6, the priority is using the XOs to facilitate learning in English, Mathematics, and Science.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I believe that the Pootle files are distributed and installed with the released image. This should mean that XO users who know English and the native language could provide the localization. Once it is complete, the files can be installed on the XOs at the deployment and the localization would be available at the deployment. Ideally, localization would be done by the students as a learning activity. For example, in Rwanda, localization to Kinyarwanda would help students a lot in learning English. Sameer Verma has provided an excellent tutorial on how to do localization which could become the base for a guide to be included in the release (e.g. as an xol file). [[&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Oh, it were only that easy...  In reality, the technical means for&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;bootstrapping&amp;quot; localization at the local level do not exist.  That is&lt;br /&gt;
a large and complex topic that I would behappy to discuss further, at6&lt;br /&gt;
length.  One issue ismaking it possible to touch and change PO files&lt;br /&gt;
on local machines (I do have some thoughts), another is capturing that&lt;br /&gt;
local work back at the central Pootle server for the benefit of&lt;br /&gt;
others.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What you describe is an ideal situation that is not currently possible&lt;br /&gt;
(local bootstrapping), in reality we need the L10n to happen on our&lt;br /&gt;
centralized Pootle server to get them back out. - cjl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Actually I think we would have all the pieces required for a local bootstrapping scenario. There are friendly local .po editors, or it could even be done with a spreadsheet. The issue here is it requires greater preparation from logistics/technical people, and extra work afterwards from coordinators as strings need to be guaranteed to reach Pootle in the end (this is the hard bit). [[User:Sebastian|Sebastian]] ([[User talk:Sebastian|talk]]) 02:58, 25 February 2016 (EST)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, the translation manager would be responsible to identify deployments which use specific local languages and work with them to organize &#039;L10n&#039; days for new releases. The translation manager should then interface with Pootle to submit the localization files for review and acceptance by Pootle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sugar development could review Sugar (Python) activities to see if they support Pootle and attempt, eg. through GSOC, to get activities upgraded to implement Pootle and to include a base set of English Pootle files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Perhaps OLPC France could be tasked to provide French localization as part of the release process. For Spanish, perhaps Sebastian Silva (Peru) or Plan Ceibal could accept responsibility for Spanish.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other comments:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The most important consideration is what the local people really want…&lt;br /&gt;
not what we think they want or think they should want. Maybe they are happy&lt;br /&gt;
with English. On the other hand, maybe they would prefer their own local&lt;br /&gt;
language (or dialect). Don&#039;t assume anything. Don&#039;t ask just one person.&lt;br /&gt;
Ask enough people to get a genuine consensus. Caryl &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Using students to provide localization is an excellent educational&lt;br /&gt;
activity. However, it needs to be overseen by an &amp;quot;expert&amp;quot; (maybe their&lt;br /&gt;
teacher) to insure it is both accurate and appropriate before submission to&lt;br /&gt;
Pootle. Caryl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Spanish of Mexico is slightly different from the Spanish of Peru&lt;br /&gt;
and/or the Spanish of Argentina (etc., etc,, etc). Using students for&lt;br /&gt;
localization could be helpful here and, I&#039;m sure for other languages. Caryl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Again, for Spanish… why not look to our largest Sugar deployment,&lt;br /&gt;
Uruguay, for enlisting students to help? One of the SLOBs (José Miguel&lt;br /&gt;
García) is Uruguayan as is super-star teacher Rosamel Ramirez. Caryl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Applying to GSOC for help in any aspect with this work seems like a &amp;quot;no&lt;br /&gt;
brainer&amp;quot; but the deadline for applications for 2016 was yesterday! [image:&lt;br /&gt;
Emoji] - Caryl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The success of the first translation will depend on how established /&lt;br /&gt;
knowledgeable the local community is. Reviewing the first round of Haitian&lt;br /&gt;
Creole translations, which I think were done by volunteers, you notice some&lt;br /&gt;
obvious problems, like inconsistent terms. I&#039;ve personally seen students&lt;br /&gt;
and teachers become confused by these issues when using the computer. They&lt;br /&gt;
keep using it anyway, but it definitely affects the user experience. Now,&lt;br /&gt;
hopefully the attitude of &amp;quot;this is the wrong way to say it&amp;quot; will inspire&lt;br /&gt;
the next round of volunteers to do a better translation - but that&#039;s a big&lt;br /&gt;
assumption to make. Sora &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
I think it&#039;s important to remember that in many of these places, language&lt;br /&gt;
ideology is something communities are working through. All the research&lt;br /&gt;
supports literacy / learning in the mother-tongue language, but in many&lt;br /&gt;
places the languages kids speak at home are seen as inferior to the ones&lt;br /&gt;
they learn in school - not just because the one they learn in school is&lt;br /&gt;
more widely-spoken, but because of myths that the language spoken at home&lt;br /&gt;
is not &amp;quot;advanced&amp;quot; enough to study something like science / math / tech.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, basically, if the first translation is not adequate, there may not be a&lt;br /&gt;
second translation. People may decide &amp;quot;This language is not adequate for&lt;br /&gt;
using the computer&amp;quot; instead &amp;quot;Our translation is not adequate; let&#039;s make it&lt;br /&gt;
better.&amp;quot;&#039; Sora&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Another hole in the i18n infrastructure is with our Javascript activities.&lt;br /&gt;
Maybe worth a GSOC project to shore it up. - Walter&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For javascript L10n, start with these links:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;a href=http://www.localeplanet.com/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/a&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;a href=https://blog.mozilla.org/webdev/2011/10/06/i18njs-internationalize-your-javascript-with-a-little-help-from-json-and-the-server/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/a&amp;gt; - cjl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tony37</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Translation_Proposal&amp;diff=97044</id>
		<title>Translation Proposal</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Translation_Proposal&amp;diff=97044"/>
		<updated>2016-03-03T09:41:35Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tony37: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Translation Proposal==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;A goal of Sugar Labs is to enable our users to experience Sugar in their own native language.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[Note: The current mission statements focus on languages (localize to as many languages as possible with high quality). The above statement is intended to focus on users not languages. I believe our goal should be to enable our users to experience Sugar in their native language.]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This goal requires two steps - internationalization (I18n) and localization (l10n). The first step (I18n) is to provide tools and documentation to facilitate the second step (L10n). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In general, I18n is the reponsibility of the Sugar development team. Localization, l10n, requires effort by volunteers who know the native language as well as English (the language of the POT master files). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sugar is distributed in a release (e.g. Sugar 0.108 is released in 13.2.7) with the  master files updated for new and changed strings. These master files are available from http://translate.sugarlabs.org&amp;quot;. Specifically, the files for the current releases of Sugar are identified as projects: sugar and sugar-toolkit-gtk3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, this site tracks localization of Sugar activities which support Pootle localization. There are currently seven activities which are integral to Sugar (not-erasable):  Browse, Image Viewer, Log, Read, Record, Terminal, and Write (excluding Journal which is localized in Sugar).  These seven activities enable Pootle localization (are projects on tranlate.sugarlabs.org). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Localization Delegate===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SugarLabs needs a Localization delegate. This is a role which Chris Leonard has filled from 2008-2013.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====L10n leadership tasks:=====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Monitoring new activity development and advocating for i18n of code&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(gettext formatting).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Setting up new languages for availability in Pootle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reaching upstream to create the glibc locales for new languages required for them to be selectable languages in Linux-based systems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Requesting github permissions for the pootle git-hub user (to enable pull of new templates, push of completed translations).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Monitoring Pootle for currency of templates, update of templates on existing languages, commit new translations.  These tasks are the responsibility of individual language team leaders, but in practice need an overseer on behalf of all languages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arranging &#039;L10n&#039; days at deployments where teachers have students improve strings in the relevant .po or supply missing strings. The outcome of an &#039;L10n&#039; day should be an updated localization for that native language. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrange for participating deployments to be publicly recognized for their contribution.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suggestions by Sebastian:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Prepare glibc locales / other similar for Web stack *&lt;br /&gt;
* Maintain pootle servers and databases *&lt;br /&gt;
* Review / update translations and repositories *&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep git automation scripts *&lt;br /&gt;
* Add new projects / languages *&lt;br /&gt;
* Document processes&lt;br /&gt;
* Respond to queries from language teams&lt;br /&gt;
* Coordinate upstreaming of local work&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Where * marks items requiring more technical knowledge or research&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Recover L10n work done in the following languages that was lost in Pootle migration:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Bislama&lt;br /&gt;
* Central Pame&lt;br /&gt;
* Crioulo-PT&lt;br /&gt;
* Dari&lt;br /&gt;
* Huastec&lt;br /&gt;
* Kinyarwanda&lt;br /&gt;
* Kosreaean&lt;br /&gt;
* Marovo&lt;br /&gt;
* Nauruan&lt;br /&gt;
* Sindhi&lt;br /&gt;
* Songhai languages&lt;br /&gt;
* Tuvaluan&lt;br /&gt;
* Tzotzil&lt;br /&gt;
* Urdu&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Recover L10n and repo connections to numerous missinga ctivities&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===ToDo:===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Discussion in the committee shows that our I18n infrastructure is in need of urgent maintenance. &lt;br /&gt;
ASLO no longer provides links to the git version. Many activities were repaired by the GCI participants. These need to be reviewed to make sure that the translation files are available and current.  Chris Leonard has provided a list of &#039;missing activities&#039;, i.e. activities which had localization files but which were misplaced in a pootle migration. Etoys has not been updated since 2009 and the localization files are no longer available. The translate.sugarlabs.org which is the repository for the localization files is missing some files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Provide a documented process for a local deployment to localize Sugar and some activities to a local language. The goal of the deployment is to make Sugar (and use of the XO more accessible).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Chris Leonard has suggested that we base localization by a deployment on virtaal (a component of Pootle). He has installed and run this tool on an XO in the gnome desktop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* As Caryl has pointed out, we also need to document this process so that it can be accomplished at a school as a classroom activity. This involves training teachers and providing tutorials for students.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Identify Sugar activities in ASLO which do not support localization (are not projects in translate.sugarlabs.org). Arrange for them to use gettext. Create master files (localize) to English.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Priority to Spanish language activities&lt;br /&gt;
* Other important or popular Sugar activities&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sugar development could review Sugar (Python) activities to see if they support Pootle and attempt, eg. through GSOC, to get activities upgraded to implement Pootle and to include a base set of English Pootle files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Define a standard I18n method for Sugarizer and sugar-web-activities. Chris Leonard recommends using the procedure adopted for turtleblocks.js. We need corresponding documentation of this process to enable it to be used immediately by GSOC participants who implement or port activities as sugar-web-activities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Determine whether a common process can be used to localize sugar-web-activities and Sugarizer and its activities. (e.g. by using polyglot.js)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Provide a tool to to test python source code for compliance with the needs of Pootle&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* All strings not in comments are referenced by gettext&lt;br /&gt;
* All strings match a msgstr in the corresponding en.po file &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This may not be feasible since some strings ought not to be localized (e.g. the gsettings schema).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Provide a tool to verify that the available localizations are included in a release.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Develop a glossary of terms needed to refer to the XO, Sugar, and actions to be taken by users (e.g. close the XO, switch to the Group View). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The range.py (needing refinement) can be used to look at the strings in a po file to be localized to ensure that they do not use conflicting words or a more technical vocabulary that necessary. Every extra string in the master file may result in 50-100 translations. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prepare a GSOC task to develop an I18n strategy and supporting tools for JavaScript activities. The following can be a good starting point:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;http://www.localeplanet.com/&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;https://blog.mozilla.org/webdev/2011/10/06/i18njs-internationalize-your-javascript-with-a-little-help-from-json-and-the-server/&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;http://airbnb.io/polyglot.js/&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sugarizer has three translation files, including this master file: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;https://github.com/llaske/sugarizer/blob/master/locale.ini&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Document and improve all processes to be &#039;run-over-by-bus-safe&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Original Draft==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SugarLabs needs a Localization delegate. The purpose of this proposal is to document the current Internationalization/Localization process and to define the role of the Localization delegate in that process. Some proposals for expansion/modification of the process are included.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chris Leonard is arguably the incumbent Localization delegate:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: this title needs comment. The &#039;governance&#039; page suggests that this position should be a delegate and not a co-ordinator since SLOBs cannot name a co-ordinator. I chose localization because I believe I18n (creating the framework and base) is the responsibility of sugar-devel and localization is a community responsibility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;For quite some time (starting in 2008, as I recall) under the &amp;quot;title&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
of Translation Team Coordinator I worked in that role (unpaid) and I&lt;br /&gt;
can certainly help in fleshing out details.  From 2008 - 2013 I was&lt;br /&gt;
able to dedicate adequate time to both technical aspects of i18n&lt;br /&gt;
(Pootle infrastructure and i18n advocacy/assistance to developers) as&lt;br /&gt;
well as L10n (localization mailing list, maintain L10n wiki pages,&lt;br /&gt;
support to new language communities, recruiting new localizers, etc.).&lt;br /&gt;
The good news (for me) is that in 2013 an extended period of&lt;br /&gt;
unemployment ended, the bad news is that I found myself unable to&lt;br /&gt;
continue to provide sufficient support to the community for several&lt;br /&gt;
reasons (technical issues with Pootle version migration as well as&lt;br /&gt;
development migration to github beyond my scope to manage alone) and a&lt;br /&gt;
slump in L10n activity by the community (perhaps in part because of&lt;br /&gt;
insufficient efforts to organize and rally the troops).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
My employment situation has stabilized somewhat and I would like to&lt;br /&gt;
continue to contribute to the i18n/L10n effort, but as many have&lt;br /&gt;
experienced throughout the financial crisis, my new employment&lt;br /&gt;
circumstances are only providing a fraction of the income I had made&lt;br /&gt;
in the past, so my &amp;quot;free time&amp;quot; is subject to the demands of pursuing&lt;br /&gt;
supplemental income.  I have done some work in support of Sugar Labs&lt;br /&gt;
since (e.g. Awajún glibc locale drafting), for which I might be&lt;br /&gt;
compensated for my time and effort from the TripAdvisor grant based on&lt;br /&gt;
a template agreement worked out with the SFC and the prior approval of&lt;br /&gt;
the Sugar Labs Oversight Board.  That is essentially piece-work, a&lt;br /&gt;
pre-agreed amount for a pre-agreed deliverable (a committed glibc&lt;br /&gt;
locale), I have not yet actually drawn any TripAdvsor funds for this&lt;br /&gt;
purpose, but I may make such requests in future (assuming necessary&lt;br /&gt;
pre-approvals are granted).&amp;quot; cjl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Translation has two separate parts: internationalization(I18n) and localization (L10n).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Sugar-Devel team is responsible for I18n (preparing the framework to support localization) and the community is responsible for L10n - providing translations (by default, from English) to other languages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The current process is based on Pootle [[http://pootle.translatehouse.org/]] server as the means of distributing localizations [[http://translate.sugarlabs.org]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
L10n leadership tasks:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Monitoring new activity development and advocating for i18n of code&lt;br /&gt;
(gettext formatting).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Setting up new languages for availability in Pootle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reaching upstream to create glibc locales for new languages.&lt;br /&gt;
Necessary for them to be selectable languages in Linux-based systems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Requesting github permissions for the pootle git-hub user (to enable&lt;br /&gt;
pull of new templates, push of completed translations).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Monitoring Pootle for currency of templates, update of templates on&lt;br /&gt;
existing languages, commit of new translations.  Tasks technically the&lt;br /&gt;
responsibility of individual language team leaders, but in practice&lt;br /&gt;
needing an overseer on behalf of all languages. - cjl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let&#039;s divide the languages into three groups:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* English (the base language)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Note: English is the original language of many activities, but there&lt;br /&gt;
are also many written first in Spanish, working with developers to&lt;br /&gt;
make Spanish-originating activities capable of being translated to&lt;br /&gt;
other languages (via an English bridge)  is an issue requiring&lt;br /&gt;
attention. - cjl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Mediums of instruction (languages used at deployments as a common language where more than one language is spoken)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Local language (languages used by students at home)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
English is not always the base language of our South Amreican activity&lt;br /&gt;
developers, as mentioned, this requires some careful thought and&lt;br /&gt;
action to make these Spanish-originating activities more widely&lt;br /&gt;
available in other languages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fortunately, the Pootle system can take the ongoing Spanish&lt;br /&gt;
translation of an English-originating activity and show it to&lt;br /&gt;
indigenous language translators (e.g. for Spanish to&lt;br /&gt;
Aymara/Quechua/Guarani/Awajún L10n where localizers are primarily&lt;br /&gt;
bilingual, but not English-speaking).  Similarly, French translations&lt;br /&gt;
(if present in Pootle) can facilitate L10n into the indigenous&lt;br /&gt;
languages of Francophone Africa.  This helps us create bridges to&lt;br /&gt;
indigenous languages by localization into a &amp;quot;language-of-instruction&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
e.g. Spanish, French) early in the development cycle. cjl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a new Sugar release is made, the Pootle English master files should be a part of the release. Sugar development should ensure that Pootle files are available for all software in the release.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Actually, POT template files (Pootle English master files) need to be&lt;br /&gt;
generated early in the development cycle, well before release and must&lt;br /&gt;
be updated regularly as strings change in source. Those updated&lt;br /&gt;
templates need to be synched on Pootle and made available as soon as&lt;br /&gt;
possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Typically there is a &amp;quot;string-freeze&amp;quot; declared for several weeks prior&lt;br /&gt;
to release allowing localizers time to do their work in a stable&lt;br /&gt;
background.  The release itself includes all localizations made up to&lt;br /&gt;
the release date (as PO files). cjl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sugar may want to provide localization for one or more mediums of instruction (e.g. Spanish, French, Arabic). Since this would imply that files for these localizations are available at release, SugarLabs should decide which, if any, of these languages are to be supported.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Agreed that a core set of languages should be completed prior to&lt;br /&gt;
release, not entirely sure about declaring &amp;quot;supported languages&amp;quot;, we&lt;br /&gt;
should release what we have to encourage further work. cjl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deployments (or deployment sponsors) may need localization of Sugar for specific local languages (e.g. Kinyarwanda, Haitian Creole,Sotho, Xhosa). I believe these localizations are most likely to come from Sugar/XO deployments where the language is used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You would think so, and we can talk about Khmer (Cambodian) at some&lt;br /&gt;
other time, but the reality is that you run into odd things more often&lt;br /&gt;
than you would think, sometimes for the reasons you mention below&lt;br /&gt;
(language-of-instruction), sometimes it is more complex than that. - cjl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, strange things happen. For example, Rwanda is one of the largest and most active deployments. However, there is no Kinyarwanda localization. The reason is probably that in Rwanda the OLPC laptops are part of a path to English. They are introduced at the fourth grade, the first year when the required medium of instruction is English. While Kinyarwanda is a subject in grades 4-6, the priority is using the XOs to facilitate learning in English, Mathematics, and Science.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I believe that the Pootle files are distributed and installed with the released image. This should mean that XO users who know English and the native language could provide the localization. Once it is complete, the files can be installed on the XOs at the deployment and the localization would be available at the deployment. Ideally, localization would be done by the students as a learning activity. For example, in Rwanda, localization to Kinyarwanda would help students a lot in learning English. Sameer Verma has provided an excellent tutorial on how to do localization which could become the base for a guide to be included in the release (e.g. as an xol file). [[&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Oh, it were only that easy...  In reality, the technical means for&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;bootstrapping&amp;quot; localization at the local level do not exist.  That is&lt;br /&gt;
a large and complex topic that I would behappy to discuss further, at6&lt;br /&gt;
length.  One issue ismaking it possible to touch and change PO files&lt;br /&gt;
on local machines (I do have some thoughts), another is capturing that&lt;br /&gt;
local work back at the central Pootle server for the benefit of&lt;br /&gt;
others.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What you describe is an ideal situation that is not currently possible&lt;br /&gt;
(local bootstrapping), in reality we need the L10n to happen on our&lt;br /&gt;
centralized Pootle server to get them back out. - cjl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Actually I think we would have all the pieces required for a local bootstrapping scenario. There are friendly local .po editors, or it could even be done with a spreadsheet. The issue here is it requires greater preparation from logistics/technical people, and extra work afterwards from coordinators as strings need to be guaranteed to reach Pootle in the end (this is the hard bit). [[User:Sebastian|Sebastian]] ([[User talk:Sebastian|talk]]) 02:58, 25 February 2016 (EST)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, the translation manager would be responsible to identify deployments which use specific local languages and work with them to organize &#039;L10n&#039; days for new releases. The translation manager should then interface with Pootle to submit the localization files for review and acceptance by Pootle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sugar development could review Sugar (Python) activities to see if they support Pootle and attempt, eg. through GSOC, to get activities upgraded to implement Pootle and to include a base set of English Pootle files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Perhaps OLPC France could be tasked to provide French localization as part of the release process. For Spanish, perhaps Sebastian Silva (Peru) or Plan Ceibal could accept responsibility for Spanish.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other comments:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The most important consideration is what the local people really want…&lt;br /&gt;
not what we think they want or think they should want. Maybe they are happy&lt;br /&gt;
with English. On the other hand, maybe they would prefer their own local&lt;br /&gt;
language (or dialect). Don&#039;t assume anything. Don&#039;t ask just one person.&lt;br /&gt;
Ask enough people to get a genuine consensus. Caryl &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Using students to provide localization is an excellent educational&lt;br /&gt;
activity. However, it needs to be overseen by an &amp;quot;expert&amp;quot; (maybe their&lt;br /&gt;
teacher) to insure it is both accurate and appropriate before submission to&lt;br /&gt;
Pootle. Caryl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Spanish of Mexico is slightly different from the Spanish of Peru&lt;br /&gt;
and/or the Spanish of Argentina (etc., etc,, etc). Using students for&lt;br /&gt;
localization could be helpful here and, I&#039;m sure for other languages. Caryl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Again, for Spanish… why not look to our largest Sugar deployment,&lt;br /&gt;
Uruguay, for enlisting students to help? One of the SLOBs (José Miguel&lt;br /&gt;
García) is Uruguayan as is super-star teacher Rosamel Ramirez. Caryl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Applying to GSOC for help in any aspect with this work seems like a &amp;quot;no&lt;br /&gt;
brainer&amp;quot; but the deadline for applications for 2016 was yesterday! [image:&lt;br /&gt;
Emoji] - Caryl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The success of the first translation will depend on how established /&lt;br /&gt;
knowledgeable the local community is. Reviewing the first round of Haitian&lt;br /&gt;
Creole translations, which I think were done by volunteers, you notice some&lt;br /&gt;
obvious problems, like inconsistent terms. I&#039;ve personally seen students&lt;br /&gt;
and teachers become confused by these issues when using the computer. They&lt;br /&gt;
keep using it anyway, but it definitely affects the user experience. Now,&lt;br /&gt;
hopefully the attitude of &amp;quot;this is the wrong way to say it&amp;quot; will inspire&lt;br /&gt;
the next round of volunteers to do a better translation - but that&#039;s a big&lt;br /&gt;
assumption to make. Sora &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
I think it&#039;s important to remember that in many of these places, language&lt;br /&gt;
ideology is something communities are working through. All the research&lt;br /&gt;
supports literacy / learning in the mother-tongue language, but in many&lt;br /&gt;
places the languages kids speak at home are seen as inferior to the ones&lt;br /&gt;
they learn in school - not just because the one they learn in school is&lt;br /&gt;
more widely-spoken, but because of myths that the language spoken at home&lt;br /&gt;
is not &amp;quot;advanced&amp;quot; enough to study something like science / math / tech.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, basically, if the first translation is not adequate, there may not be a&lt;br /&gt;
second translation. People may decide &amp;quot;This language is not adequate for&lt;br /&gt;
using the computer&amp;quot; instead &amp;quot;Our translation is not adequate; let&#039;s make it&lt;br /&gt;
better.&amp;quot;&#039; Sora&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Another hole in the i18n infrastructure is with our Javascript activities.&lt;br /&gt;
Maybe worth a GSOC project to shore it up. - Walter&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For javascript L10n, start with these links:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;a href=http://www.localeplanet.com/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/a&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;a href=https://blog.mozilla.org/webdev/2011/10/06/i18njs-internationalize-your-javascript-with-a-little-help-from-json-and-the-server/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/a&amp;gt; - cjl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tony37</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Translation_Proposal&amp;diff=97021</id>
		<title>Translation Proposal</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Translation_Proposal&amp;diff=97021"/>
		<updated>2016-02-25T08:38:40Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tony37: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Translation Proposal==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;A goal of Sugar Labs is to enable our users to experience Sugar in their own native language.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[Note: The current mission statements focus on languages (localize to as many languages as possible with high quality). The above statement is intended to focus on users not languages. I believe our goal should be to enable our users to experience Sugar in their native language.]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This goal requires two steps - internationalization (I18n) and localization (l10n). The first step (I18n) is to provide tools and documentation to facilitate the second step (L10n). Sugar has adopted Pootle as the primary tool for I18n. However, there are two important elements which&lt;br /&gt;
do not lend themselves to this approach. &lt;br /&gt;
* First are the FLOSS manuals (documentation) and its Sugar activity embodiment, Help Activity. &lt;br /&gt;
* Second, the Sugar-web-activities (based on html5 and javascript). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In general, I18n is the reponsibility of the Sugar development team. Localization, l10n, requires effort by volunteers who know the native language as well as English (the language of the POT master files). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sugar is distributed in a release (e.g. Sugar 0.108 is released in 13.2.7) with the  master files updated for new and changed strings. These master files are available from http://translate.sugarlabs.org&amp;quot;. Specifically, the files for the current releases of Sugar are identified as projects: sugar and sugar-toolkit-gtk3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, this site tracks localization of Sugar activities which support Pootle localization. There are currently seven activities which are integral to Sugar (not-erasable):  Browse, Image Viewer, Log, Read, Record, Terminal, and Write (excluding Journal which is localized in Sugar).  These seven activities enable Pootle localization (are projects on tranlate.sugarlabs.org). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Localization Delegate===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SugarLabs needs a Localization delegate. This is a role which Chris Leonard has filled from 2008-2013.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====L10n leadership tasks:=====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Monitoring new activity development and advocating for i18n of code&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(gettext formatting).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Setting up new languages for availability in Pootle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reaching upstream to create the glibc locales for new languages required for them to be selectable languages in Linux-based systems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Requesting github permissions for the pootle git-hub user (to enable pull of new templates, push of completed translations).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Monitoring Pootle for currency of templates, update of templates on existing languages, commit new translations.  These tasks are the responsibility of individual language team leaders, but in practice need an overseer on behalf of all languages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arranging &#039;L10n&#039; days at deployments where teachers have students improve strings in the relevant .po or supply missing strings. The outcome of an &#039;L10n&#039; day should be an updated localization for that native language. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrange for participating deployments to be publically recognized for their contribution.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suggestions by Sebastian:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Prepare glibc locales / other similar for Web stack *&lt;br /&gt;
* Maintain pootle servers and databases *&lt;br /&gt;
* Review / update translations and repositories *&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep git automation scripts *&lt;br /&gt;
* Add new projects / languages *&lt;br /&gt;
* Document processes&lt;br /&gt;
* Respond to queries from language teams&lt;br /&gt;
* Coordinate upstreaming of local work&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Where * marks items requiring more technical knowledge or research&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===ToDo:===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The technical means for localization at the local level do not exist.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     * It must be possible to touch and change PO files on local machines in Sugar.&lt;br /&gt;
     * It must be possible to capture that local work back at the central &lt;br /&gt;
       Pootle server for the benefit of others.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Identify Sugar activities in ASLO which do not support localization (are not projects in translate.sugarlabs.org). Arrange for them to use gettext. Create master files (localize) to English.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
      * Priority to Spanish language activities&lt;br /&gt;
      * Other important or popular Sugar activities&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sugar development could review Sugar (Python) activities to see if they support Pootle and attempt, eg. through GSOC, to get activities upgraded to implement Pootle and to include a base set of English Pootle files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Define a standard I18n method for Sugarizer and sugar-web-activities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Provide the I18n infrastructure to support localization of Sugarizer and sugar-web-activities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Provide a tool to to test python source code for compliance with the needs of Pootle&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     * All strings not in comments are referenced by gettext&lt;br /&gt;
     * All strings match a msgstr in the corresponding en.po file &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Provide a tool to verify that the .po file for all localizations are included in a release.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Develop a glossary of terms needed to refer to the XO, Sugar, and actions to be taken by users (e.g. close the XO, switch to the Group View). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Develop a tool to parse the strings in the master files to identify the vocabulary used.&lt;br /&gt;
(see http://www.lextutor.ca/research/nation_waring_97.html&amp;quot; - interesting but not directly relevant&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Paul Nation developed a simple program &#039;range&#039; which scans a text and identifies words by a presence&lt;br /&gt;
in one or more included word lists. For example, one of the 1000 most frequently used words would be printed in the default font/color. A word not on this list would be printed in red. Such a tool could be used to check the base strings for consistent use of words and for use of common English words. The cited article explains whythis is important and links to specific lists of commonly used words.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prepare a GSOC task to develop an I18n strategy and supporting tools for javascript activities. The following can be a good starting point:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;http://www.localeplanet.com/&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;https://blog.mozilla.org/webdev/2011/10/06/i18njs-internationalize-your-javascript-with-a-little-help-from-json-and-the-server/&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;http://airbnb.io/polyglot.js/&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sugarizer has three translation files, including this master file: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;https://github.com/llaske/sugarizer/blob/master/locale.ini&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Document and improve all processes to be &#039;run-over-by-bus-safe&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Original Draft==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SugarLabs needs a Localization delegate. The purpose of this proposal is to document the current Internationalization/Localization process and to define the role of the Localization delegate in that process. Some proposals for expansion/modification of the process are included.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chris Leonard is arguably the incumbent Localization delegate:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: this title needs comment. The &#039;governance&#039; page suggests that this position should be a delegate and not a co-ordinator since SLOBs cannot name a co-ordinator. I chose localization because I believe I18n (creating the framework and base) is the responsibility of sugar-devel and localization is a community responsibility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;For quite some time (starting in 2008, as I recall) under the &amp;quot;title&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
of Translation Team Coordinator I worked in that role (unpaid) and I&lt;br /&gt;
can certainly help in fleshing out details.  From 2008 - 2013 I was&lt;br /&gt;
able to dedicate adequate time to both technical aspects of i18n&lt;br /&gt;
(Pootle infrastructure and i18n advocacy/assistance to developers) as&lt;br /&gt;
well as L10n (localization mailing list, maintain L10n wiki pages,&lt;br /&gt;
support to new language communities, recruiting new localizers, etc.).&lt;br /&gt;
The good news (for me) is that in 2013 an extended period of&lt;br /&gt;
unemployment ended, the bad news is that I found myself unable to&lt;br /&gt;
continue to provide sufficient support to the community for several&lt;br /&gt;
reasons (technical issues with Pootle version migration as well as&lt;br /&gt;
development migration to github beyond my scope to manage alone) and a&lt;br /&gt;
slump in L10n activity by the community (perhaps in part because of&lt;br /&gt;
insufficient efforts to organize and rally the troops).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
My employment situation has stabilized somewhat and I would like to&lt;br /&gt;
continue to contribute to the i18n/L10n effort, but as many have&lt;br /&gt;
experienced throughout the financial crisis, my new employment&lt;br /&gt;
circumstances are only providing a fraction of the income I had made&lt;br /&gt;
in the past, so my &amp;quot;free time&amp;quot; is subject to the demands of pursuing&lt;br /&gt;
supplemental income.  I have done some work in support of Sugar Labs&lt;br /&gt;
since (e.g. Awajún glibc locale drafting), for which I might be&lt;br /&gt;
compensated for my time and effort from the TripAdvisor grant based on&lt;br /&gt;
a template agreement worked out with the SFC and the prior approval of&lt;br /&gt;
the Sugar Labs Oversight Board.  That is essentially piece-work, a&lt;br /&gt;
pre-agreed amount for a pre-agreed deliverable (a committed glibc&lt;br /&gt;
locale), I have not yet actually drawn any TripAdvsor funds for this&lt;br /&gt;
purpose, but I may make such requests in future (assuming necessary&lt;br /&gt;
pre-approvals are granted).&amp;quot; cjl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Translation has two separate parts: internationalization(I18n) and localization (L10n).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Sugar-Devel team is responsible for I18n (preparing the framework to support localization) and the community is responsible for L10n - providing translations (by default, from English) to other languages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The current process is based on Pootle [[http://pootle.translatehouse.org/]] server as the means of distributing localizations [[http://translate.sugarlabs.org]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
L10n leadership tasks:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Monitoring new activity development and advocating for i18n of code&lt;br /&gt;
(gettext formatting).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Setting up new languages for availability in Pootle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reaching upstream to create glibc locales for new languages.&lt;br /&gt;
Necessary for them to be selectable languages in Linux-based systems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Requesting github permissions for the pootle git-hub user (to enable&lt;br /&gt;
pull of new templates, push of completed translations).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Monitoring Pootle for currency of templates, update of templates on&lt;br /&gt;
existing languages, commit of new translations.  Tasks technically the&lt;br /&gt;
responsibility of individual language team leaders, but in practice&lt;br /&gt;
needing an overseer on behalf of all languages. - cjl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let&#039;s divide the languages into three groups:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* English (the base language)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Note: English is the original language of many activities, but there&lt;br /&gt;
are also many written first in Spanish, working with developers to&lt;br /&gt;
make Spanish-originating activities capable of being translated to&lt;br /&gt;
other languages (via an English bridge)  is an issue requiring&lt;br /&gt;
attention. - cjl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Mediums of instruction (languages used at deployments as a common language where more than one language is spoken)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Local language (languages used by students at home)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
English is not always the base language of our South Amreican activity&lt;br /&gt;
developers, as mentioned, this requires some careful thought and&lt;br /&gt;
action to make these Spanish-originating activities more widely&lt;br /&gt;
available in other languages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fortunately, the Pootle system can take the ongoing Spanish&lt;br /&gt;
translation of an English-originating activity and show it to&lt;br /&gt;
indigenous language translators (e.g. for Spanish to&lt;br /&gt;
Aymara/Quechua/Guarani/Awajún L10n where localizers are primarily&lt;br /&gt;
bilingual, but not English-speaking).  Similarly, French translations&lt;br /&gt;
(if present in Pootle) can facilitate L10n into the indigenous&lt;br /&gt;
languages of Francophone Africa.  This helps us create bridges to&lt;br /&gt;
indigenous languages by localization into a &amp;quot;language-of-instruction&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
e.g. Spanish, French) early in the development cycle. cjl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a new Sugar release is made, the Pootle English master files should be a part of the release. Sugar development should ensure that Pootle files are available for all software in the release.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Actually, POT template files (Pootle English master files) need to be&lt;br /&gt;
generated early in the development cycle, well before release and must&lt;br /&gt;
be updated regularly as strings change in source. Those updated&lt;br /&gt;
templates need to be synched on Pootle and made available as soon as&lt;br /&gt;
possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Typically there is a &amp;quot;string-freeze&amp;quot; declared for several weeks prior&lt;br /&gt;
to release allowing localizers time to do their work in a stable&lt;br /&gt;
background.  The release itself includes all localizations made up to&lt;br /&gt;
the release date (as PO files). cjl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sugar may want to provide localization for one or more mediums of instruction (e.g. Spanish, French, Arabic). Since this would imply that files for these localizations are available at release, SugarLabs should decide which, if any, of these languages are to be supported.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Agreed that a core set of languages should be completed prior to&lt;br /&gt;
release, not entirely sure about declaring &amp;quot;supported languages&amp;quot;, we&lt;br /&gt;
should release what we have to encourage further work. cjl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deployments (or deployment sponsors) may need localization of Sugar for specific local languages (e.g. Kinyarwanda, Haitian Creole,Sotho, Xhosa). I believe these localizations are most likely to come from Sugar/XO deployments where the language is used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You would think so, and we can talk about Khmer (Cambodian) at some&lt;br /&gt;
other time, but the reality is that you run into odd things more often&lt;br /&gt;
than you would think, sometimes for the reasons you mention below&lt;br /&gt;
(language-of-instruction), sometimes it is more complex than that. - cjl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, strange things happen. For example, Rwanda is one of the largest and most active deployments. However, there is no Kinyarwanda localization. The reason is probably that in Rwanda the OLPC laptops are part of a path to English. They are introduced at the fourth grade, the first year when the required medium of instruction is English. While Kinyarwanda is a subject in grades 4-6, the priority is using the XOs to facilitate learning in English, Mathematics, and Science.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I believe that the Pootle files are distributed and installed with the released image. This should mean that XO users who know English and the native language could provide the localization. Once it is complete, the files can be installed on the XOs at the deployment and the localization would be available at the deployment. Ideally, localization would be done by the students as a learning activity. For example, in Rwanda, localization to Kinyarwanda would help students a lot in learning English. Sameer Verma has provided an excellent tutorial on how to do localization which could become the base for a guide to be included in the release (e.g. as an xol file). [[&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Oh, it were only that easy...  In reality, the technical means for&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;bootstrapping&amp;quot; localization at the local level do not exist.  That is&lt;br /&gt;
a large and complex topic that I would behappy to discuss further, at6&lt;br /&gt;
length.  One issue ismaking it possible to touch and change PO files&lt;br /&gt;
on local machines (I do have some thoughts), another is capturing that&lt;br /&gt;
local work back at the central Pootle server for the benefit of&lt;br /&gt;
others.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What you describe is an ideal situation that is not currently possible&lt;br /&gt;
(local bootstrapping), in reality we need the L10n to happen on our&lt;br /&gt;
centralized Pootle server to get them back out. - cjl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Actually I think we would have all the pieces required for a local bootstrapping scenario. There are friendly local .po editors, or it could even be done with a spreadsheet. The issue here is it requires greater preparation from logistics/technical people, and extra work afterwards from coordinators as strings need to be guaranteed to reach Pootle in the end (this is the hard bit). [[User:Sebastian|Sebastian]] ([[User talk:Sebastian|talk]]) 02:58, 25 February 2016 (EST)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, the translation manager would be responsible to identify deployments which use specific local languages and work with them to organize &#039;L10n&#039; days for new releases. The translation manager should then interface with Pootle to submit the localization files for review and acceptance by Pootle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sugar development could review Sugar (Python) activities to see if they support Pootle and attempt, eg. through GSOC, to get activities upgraded to implement Pootle and to include a base set of English Pootle files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Perhaps OLPC France could be tasked to provide French localization as part of the release process. For Spanish, perhaps Sebastian Silva (Peru) or Plan Ceibal could accept responsibility for Spanish.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other comments:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The most important consideration is what the local people really want…&lt;br /&gt;
not what we think they want or think they should want. Maybe they are happy&lt;br /&gt;
with English. On the other hand, maybe they would prefer their own local&lt;br /&gt;
language (or dialect). Don&#039;t assume anything. Don&#039;t ask just one person.&lt;br /&gt;
Ask enough people to get a genuine consensus. Caryl &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Using students to provide localization is an excellent educational&lt;br /&gt;
activity. However, it needs to be overseen by an &amp;quot;expert&amp;quot; (maybe their&lt;br /&gt;
teacher) to insure it is both accurate and appropriate before submission to&lt;br /&gt;
Pootle. Caryl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Spanish of Mexico is slightly different from the Spanish of Peru&lt;br /&gt;
and/or the Spanish of Argentina (etc., etc,, etc). Using students for&lt;br /&gt;
localization could be helpful here and, I&#039;m sure for other languages. Caryl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Again, for Spanish… why not look to our largest Sugar deployment,&lt;br /&gt;
Uruguay, for enlisting students to help? One of the SLOBs (José Miguel&lt;br /&gt;
García) is Uruguayan as is super-star teacher Rosamel Ramirez. Caryl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Applying to GSOC for help in any aspect with this work seems like a &amp;quot;no&lt;br /&gt;
brainer&amp;quot; but the deadline for applications for 2016 was yesterday! [image:&lt;br /&gt;
Emoji] - Caryl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The success of the first translation will depend on how established /&lt;br /&gt;
knowledgeable the local community is. Reviewing the first round of Haitian&lt;br /&gt;
Creole translations, which I think were done by volunteers, you notice some&lt;br /&gt;
obvious problems, like inconsistent terms. I&#039;ve personally seen students&lt;br /&gt;
and teachers become confused by these issues when using the computer. They&lt;br /&gt;
keep using it anyway, but it definitely affects the user experience. Now,&lt;br /&gt;
hopefully the attitude of &amp;quot;this is the wrong way to say it&amp;quot; will inspire&lt;br /&gt;
the next round of volunteers to do a better translation - but that&#039;s a big&lt;br /&gt;
assumption to make. Sora &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
I think it&#039;s important to remember that in many of these places, language&lt;br /&gt;
ideology is something communities are working through. All the research&lt;br /&gt;
supports literacy / learning in the mother-tongue language, but in many&lt;br /&gt;
places the languages kids speak at home are seen as inferior to the ones&lt;br /&gt;
they learn in school - not just because the one they learn in school is&lt;br /&gt;
more widely-spoken, but because of myths that the language spoken at home&lt;br /&gt;
is not &amp;quot;advanced&amp;quot; enough to study something like science / math / tech.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, basically, if the first translation is not adequate, there may not be a&lt;br /&gt;
second translation. People may decide &amp;quot;This language is not adequate for&lt;br /&gt;
using the computer&amp;quot; instead &amp;quot;Our translation is not adequate; let&#039;s make it&lt;br /&gt;
better.&amp;quot;&#039; Sora&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Another hole in the i18n infrastructure is with our Javascript activities.&lt;br /&gt;
Maybe worth a GSOC project to shore it up. - Walter&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For javascript L10n, start with these links:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;a href=http://www.localeplanet.com/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/a&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;a href=https://blog.mozilla.org/webdev/2011/10/06/i18njs-internationalize-your-javascript-with-a-little-help-from-json-and-the-server/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/a&amp;gt; - cjl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tony37</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Translation_Proposal&amp;diff=97019</id>
		<title>Translation Proposal</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Translation_Proposal&amp;diff=97019"/>
		<updated>2016-02-25T07:14:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tony37: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Translation Proposal==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;A goal of Sugar Labs is to enable our users to experience Sugar in their own native language.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[Note: The current mission statements focus on languages (localize to as many languages as possible with high quality). The above statement is intended to focus on users not languages. I believe our goal should be to enable our users to experience Sugar in their native language.]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This goal requires two steps - internationalization (I18n) and localization (l10n). The first step (I18n) is to provide tools and documentation to facilitate the second step (L10n). Sugar has adopted Pootle as the primary tool for I18n. However, there are two important elements which&lt;br /&gt;
do not lend themselves to this approach. &lt;br /&gt;
* First are the FLOSS manuals (documentation) and its Sugar activity embodiment, Help Activity. &lt;br /&gt;
* Second, the Sugar-web-activities (based on html5 and javascript). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In general, I18n is the reponsibility of the Sugar development team. Localization, l10n, requires effort by volunteers who know the native language as well as English (the language of the POT master files). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sugar is distributed in a release (e.g. Sugar 0.108 is released in 13.2.7) with the  master files updated for new and changed strings. These master files are available from http://translate.sugarlabs.org&amp;quot;. Specifically, the files for the current releases of Sugar are identified as projects: sugar and sugar-toolkit-gtk3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, this site tracks localization of Sugar activities which support Pootle localization. There are currently seven activities which are integral to Sugar (not-erasable):  Browse, Image Viewer, Log, Read, Record, Terminal, and Write (excluding Journal which is localized in Sugar).  These seven activities enable Pootle localization (are projects on tranlate.sugarlabs.org). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Localization Delegate===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SugarLabs needs a Localization delegate. This is a role which Chris Leonard has filled from 2008-2013.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====L10n leadership tasks:=====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Monitoring new activity development and advocating for i18n of code&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(gettext formatting).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Setting up new languages for availability in Pootle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reaching upstream to create the glibc locales for new languages required for them to be selectable languages in Linux-based systems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Requesting github permissions for the pootle git-hub user (to enable pull of new templates, push of completed translations).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Monitoring Pootle for currency of templates, update of templates on existing languages, commit new translations.  These tasks are the responsibility of individual language team leaders, but in practice need an overseer on behalf of all languages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arranging &#039;L10n&#039; days at deployments where teachers have students improve strings in the relevant .po or supply missing strings. The outcome of an &#039;L10n&#039; day should be an updated localization for that native language. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrange for participating deployments to be publically recognized for their contribution.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===ToDo:===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The technical means for localization at the local level do not exist.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     * It must be possible to touch and change PO files on local machines in Sugar.&lt;br /&gt;
     * It must be possible to capture that local work back at the central &lt;br /&gt;
       Pootle server for the benefit of others.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Identify Sugar activities in ASLO which do not support localization (are not projects in translate.sugarlabs.org). Arrange for them to use gettext. Create master files (localize) to English.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
      * Priority to Spanish language activities&lt;br /&gt;
      * Other important or popular Sugar activities&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sugar development could review Sugar (Python) activities to see if they support Pootle and attempt, eg. through GSOC, to get activities upgraded to implement Pootle and to include a base set of English Pootle files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Define a standard I18n method for Sugarizer and sugar-web-activities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Provide the I18n infrastructure to support localization of Sugarizer and sugar-web-activities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Provide a tool to to test python source code for compliance with the needs of Pootle&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     * All strings not in comments are referenced by gettext&lt;br /&gt;
     * All strings match a msgstr in the corresponding en.po file &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Provide a tool to verify that the .po file for all localizations are included in a release.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Develop a glossary of terms needed to refer to the XO, Sugar, and actions to be taken by users (e.g. close the XO, switch to the Group View). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Develop a tool to parse the strings in the master files to identify the vocabulary used.&lt;br /&gt;
(see http://www.lextutor.ca/research/nation_waring_97.html&amp;quot; - interesting but not directly relevant&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Paul Nation developed a simple program &#039;range&#039; which scans a text and identifies words by a presence&lt;br /&gt;
in one or more included word lists. For example, one of the 1000 most frequently used words would be printed in the default font/color. A word not on this list would be printed in red. Such a tool could be used to check the base strings for consistent use of words and for use of common English words. The cited article explains whythis is important and links to specific lists of commonly used words.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prepare a GSOC task to develop an I18n strategy and supporting tools for javascript activities. The following can be a good starting point:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;http://www.localeplanet.com/&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;https://blog.mozilla.org/webdev/2011/10/06/i18njs-internationalize-your-javascript-with-a-little-help-from-json-and-the-server/&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;http://airbnb.io/polyglot.js/&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sugarizer has three translation files, including this master file: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;https://github.com/llaske/sugarizer/blob/master/locale.ini&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Original Draft==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SugarLabs needs a Localization delegate. The purpose of this proposal is to document the current Internationalization/Localization process and to define the role of the Localization delegate in that process. Some proposals for expansion/modification of the process are included.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chris Leonard is arguably the incumbent Localization delegate:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: this title needs comment. The &#039;governance&#039; page suggests that this position should be a delegate and not a co-ordinator since SLOBs cannot name a co-ordinator. I chose localization because I believe I18n (creating the framework and base) is the responsibility of sugar-devel and localization is a community responsibility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;For quite some time (starting in 2008, as I recall) under the &amp;quot;title&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
of Translation Team Coordinator I worked in that role (unpaid) and I&lt;br /&gt;
can certainly help in fleshing out details.  From 2008 - 2013 I was&lt;br /&gt;
able to dedicate adequate time to both technical aspects of i18n&lt;br /&gt;
(Pootle infrastructure and i18n advocacy/assistance to developers) as&lt;br /&gt;
well as L10n (localization mailing list, maintain L10n wiki pages,&lt;br /&gt;
support to new language communities, recruiting new localizers, etc.).&lt;br /&gt;
The good news (for me) is that in 2013 an extended period of&lt;br /&gt;
unemployment ended, the bad news is that I found myself unable to&lt;br /&gt;
continue to provide sufficient support to the community for several&lt;br /&gt;
reasons (technical issues with Pootle version migration as well as&lt;br /&gt;
development migration to github beyond my scope to manage alone) and a&lt;br /&gt;
slump in L10n activity by the community (perhaps in part because of&lt;br /&gt;
insufficient efforts to organize and rally the troops).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
My employment situation has stabilized somewhat and I would like to&lt;br /&gt;
continue to contribute to the i18n/L10n effort, but as many have&lt;br /&gt;
experienced throughout the financial crisis, my new employment&lt;br /&gt;
circumstances are only providing a fraction of the income I had made&lt;br /&gt;
in the past, so my &amp;quot;free time&amp;quot; is subject to the demands of pursuing&lt;br /&gt;
supplemental income.  I have done some work in support of Sugar Labs&lt;br /&gt;
since (e.g. Awajún glibc locale drafting), for which I might be&lt;br /&gt;
compensated for my time and effort from the TripAdvisor grant based on&lt;br /&gt;
a template agreement worked out with the SFC and the prior approval of&lt;br /&gt;
the Sugar Labs Oversight Board.  That is essentially piece-work, a&lt;br /&gt;
pre-agreed amount for a pre-agreed deliverable (a committed glibc&lt;br /&gt;
locale), I have not yet actually drawn any TripAdvsor funds for this&lt;br /&gt;
purpose, but I may make such requests in future (assuming necessary&lt;br /&gt;
pre-approvals are granted).&amp;quot; cjl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Translation has two separate parts: internationalization(I18n) and localization (L10n).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Sugar-Devel team is responsible for I18n (preparing the framework to support localization) and the community is responsible for L10n - providing translations (by default, from English) to other languages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The current process is based on Pootle [[http://pootle.translatehouse.org/]] server as the means of distributing localizations [[http://translate.sugarlabs.org]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
L10n leadership tasks:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Monitoring new activity development and advocating for i18n of code&lt;br /&gt;
(gettext formatting).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Setting up new languages for availability in Pootle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reaching upstream to create glibc locales for new languages.&lt;br /&gt;
Necessary for them to be selectable languages in Linux-based systems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Requesting github permissions for the pootle git-hub user (to enable&lt;br /&gt;
pull of new templates, push of completed translations).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Monitoring Pootle for currency of templates, update of templates on&lt;br /&gt;
existing languages, commit of new translations.  Tasks technically the&lt;br /&gt;
responsibility of individual language team leaders, but in practice&lt;br /&gt;
needing an overseer on behalf of all languages. - cjl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let&#039;s divide the languages into three groups:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* English (the base language)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Note: English is the original language of many activities, but there&lt;br /&gt;
are also many written first in Spanish, working with developers to&lt;br /&gt;
make Spanish-originating activities capable of being translated to&lt;br /&gt;
other languages (via an English bridge)  is an issue requiring&lt;br /&gt;
attention. - cjl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Mediums of instruction (languages used at deployments as a common language where more than one language is spoken)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Local language (languages used by students at home)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
English is not always the base language of our South Amreican activity&lt;br /&gt;
developers, as mentioned, this requires some careful thought and&lt;br /&gt;
action to make these Spanish-originating activities more widely&lt;br /&gt;
available in other languages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fortunately, the Pootle system can take the ongoing Spanish&lt;br /&gt;
translation of an English-originating activity and show it to&lt;br /&gt;
indigenous language translators (e.g. for Spanish to&lt;br /&gt;
Aymara/Quechua/Guarani/Awajún L10n where localizers are primarily&lt;br /&gt;
bilingual, but not English-speaking).  Similarly, French translations&lt;br /&gt;
(if present in Pootle) can facilitate L10n into the indigenous&lt;br /&gt;
languages of Francophone Africa.  This helps us create bridges to&lt;br /&gt;
indigenous languages by localization into a &amp;quot;language-of-instruction&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
e.g. Spanish, French) early in the development cycle. cjl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a new Sugar release is made, the Pootle English master files should be a part of the release. Sugar development should ensure that Pootle files are available for all software in the release.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Actually, POT template files (Pootle English master files) need to be&lt;br /&gt;
generated early in the development cycle, well before release and must&lt;br /&gt;
be updated regularly as strings change in source. Those updated&lt;br /&gt;
templates need to be synched on Pootle and made available as soon as&lt;br /&gt;
possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Typically there is a &amp;quot;string-freeze&amp;quot; declared for several weeks prior&lt;br /&gt;
to release allowing localizers time to do their work in a stable&lt;br /&gt;
background.  The release itself includes all localizations made up to&lt;br /&gt;
the release date (as PO files). cjl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sugar may want to provide localization for one or more mediums of instruction (e.g. Spanish, French, Arabic). Since this would imply that files for these localizations are available at release, SugarLabs should decide which, if any, of these languages are to be supported.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Agreed that a core set of languages should be completed prior to&lt;br /&gt;
release, not entirely sure about declaring &amp;quot;supported languages&amp;quot;, we&lt;br /&gt;
should release what we have to encourage further work. cjl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deployments (or deployment sponsors) may need localization of Sugar for specific local languages (e.g. Kinyarwanda, Haitian Creole,Sotho, Xhosa). I believe these localizations are most likely to come from Sugar/XO deployments where the language is used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You would think so, and we can talk about Khmer (Cambodian) at some&lt;br /&gt;
other time, but the reality is that you run into odd things more often&lt;br /&gt;
than you would think, sometimes for the reasons you mention below&lt;br /&gt;
(language-of-instruction), sometimes it is more complex than that. - cjl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, strange things happen. For example, Rwanda is one of the largest and most active deployments. However, there is no Kinyarwanda localization. The reason is probably that in Rwanda the OLPC laptops are part of a path to English. They are introduced at the fourth grade, the first year when the required medium of instruction is English. While Kinyarwanda is a subject in grades 4-6, the priority is using the XOs to facilitate learning in English, Mathematics, and Science.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I believe that the Pootle files are distributed and installed with the released image. This should mean that XO users who know English and the native language could provide the localization. Once it is complete, the files can be installed on the XOs at the deployment and the localization would be available at the deployment. Ideally, localization would be done by the students as a learning activity. For example, in Rwanda, localization to Kinyarwanda would help students a lot in learning English. Sameer Verma has provided an excellent tutorial on how to do localization which could become the base for a guide to be included in the release (e.g. as an xol file). [[&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Oh, it were only that easy...  In reality, the technical means for&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;bootstrapping&amp;quot; localization at the local level do not exist.  That is&lt;br /&gt;
a large and complex topic that I would behappy to discuss further, at6&lt;br /&gt;
length.  One issue ismaking it possible to touch and change PO files&lt;br /&gt;
on local machines (I do have some thoughts), another is capturing that&lt;br /&gt;
local work back at the central Pootle server for the benefit of&lt;br /&gt;
others.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What you describe is an ideal situation that is not currently possible&lt;br /&gt;
(local bootstrapping), in reality we need the L10n to happen on our&lt;br /&gt;
centralized Pootle server to get them back out. - cjl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, the translation manager would be responsible to identify deployments which use specific local languages and work with them to organize &#039;L10n&#039; days for new releases. The translation manager should then interface with Pootle to submit the localization files for review and acceptance by Pootle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sugar development could review Sugar (Python) activities to see if they support Pootle and attempt, eg. through GSOC, to get activities upgraded to implement Pootle and to include a base set of English Pootle files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Perhaps OLPC France could be tasked to provide French localization as part of the release process. For Spanish, perhaps Sebastian Silva (Peru) or Plan Ceibal could accept responsibility for Spanish.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other comments:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The most important consideration is what the local people really want…&lt;br /&gt;
not what we think they want or think they should want. Maybe they are happy&lt;br /&gt;
with English. On the other hand, maybe they would prefer their own local&lt;br /&gt;
language (or dialect). Don&#039;t assume anything. Don&#039;t ask just one person.&lt;br /&gt;
Ask enough people to get a genuine consensus. Caryl &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Using students to provide localization is an excellent educational&lt;br /&gt;
activity. However, it needs to be overseen by an &amp;quot;expert&amp;quot; (maybe their&lt;br /&gt;
teacher) to insure it is both accurate and appropriate before submission to&lt;br /&gt;
Pootle. Caryl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Spanish of Mexico is slightly different from the Spanish of Peru&lt;br /&gt;
and/or the Spanish of Argentina (etc., etc,, etc). Using students for&lt;br /&gt;
localization could be helpful here and, I&#039;m sure for other languages. Caryl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Again, for Spanish… why not look to our largest Sugar deployment,&lt;br /&gt;
Uruguay, for enlisting students to help? One of the SLOBs (José Miguel&lt;br /&gt;
García) is Uruguayan as is super-star teacher Rosamel Ramirez. Caryl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Applying to GSOC for help in any aspect with this work seems like a &amp;quot;no&lt;br /&gt;
brainer&amp;quot; but the deadline for applications for 2016 was yesterday! [image:&lt;br /&gt;
Emoji] - Caryl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The success of the first translation will depend on how established /&lt;br /&gt;
knowledgeable the local community is. Reviewing the first round of Haitian&lt;br /&gt;
Creole translations, which I think were done by volunteers, you notice some&lt;br /&gt;
obvious problems, like inconsistent terms. I&#039;ve personally seen students&lt;br /&gt;
and teachers become confused by these issues when using the computer. They&lt;br /&gt;
keep using it anyway, but it definitely affects the user experience. Now,&lt;br /&gt;
hopefully the attitude of &amp;quot;this is the wrong way to say it&amp;quot; will inspire&lt;br /&gt;
the next round of volunteers to do a better translation - but that&#039;s a big&lt;br /&gt;
assumption to make. Sora &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
I think it&#039;s important to remember that in many of these places, language&lt;br /&gt;
ideology is something communities are working through. All the research&lt;br /&gt;
supports literacy / learning in the mother-tongue language, but in many&lt;br /&gt;
places the languages kids speak at home are seen as inferior to the ones&lt;br /&gt;
they learn in school - not just because the one they learn in school is&lt;br /&gt;
more widely-spoken, but because of myths that the language spoken at home&lt;br /&gt;
is not &amp;quot;advanced&amp;quot; enough to study something like science / math / tech.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, basically, if the first translation is not adequate, there may not be a&lt;br /&gt;
second translation. People may decide &amp;quot;This language is not adequate for&lt;br /&gt;
using the computer&amp;quot; instead &amp;quot;Our translation is not adequate; let&#039;s make it&lt;br /&gt;
better.&amp;quot;&#039; Sora&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Another hole in the i18n infrastructure is with our Javascript activities.&lt;br /&gt;
Maybe worth a GSOC project to shore it up. - Walter&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For javascript L10n, start with these links:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;a href=http://www.localeplanet.com/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/a&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;a href=https://blog.mozilla.org/webdev/2011/10/06/i18njs-internationalize-your-javascript-with-a-little-help-from-json-and-the-server/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/a&amp;gt; - cjl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tony37</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Translation_Proposal&amp;diff=97011</id>
		<title>Translation Proposal</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Translation_Proposal&amp;diff=97011"/>
		<updated>2016-02-21T06:16:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tony37: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;SugarLabs needs a Localization delegate. The purpose of this proposal is to document the current Internationalization/Localization process and to define the role of the Localization delegate in that process. Some proposals for expansion/modification of the process are included.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chris Leonard is arguably the incumbent Localization delegate:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: this title needs comment. The &#039;governance&#039; page suggests that this position should be a delegate and not a co-ordinator since SLOBs cannot name a co-ordinator. I chose localization because I believe I18n (creating the framework and base) is the responsibility of sugar-devel and localization is a community responsibility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;For quite some time (starting in 2008, as I recall) under the &amp;quot;title&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
of Translation Team Coordinator I worked in that role (unpaid) and I&lt;br /&gt;
can certainly help in fleshing out details.  From 2008 - 2013 I was&lt;br /&gt;
able to dedicate adequate time to both technical aspects of i18n&lt;br /&gt;
(Pootle infrastructure and i18n advocacy/assistance to developers) as&lt;br /&gt;
well as L10n (localization mailing list, maintain L10n wiki pages,&lt;br /&gt;
support to new language communities, recruiting new localizers, etc.).&lt;br /&gt;
The good news (for me) is that in 2013 an extended period of&lt;br /&gt;
unemployment ended, the bad news is that I found myself unable to&lt;br /&gt;
continue to provide sufficient support to the community for several&lt;br /&gt;
reasons (technical issues with Pootle version migration as well as&lt;br /&gt;
development migration to github beyond my scope to manage alone) and a&lt;br /&gt;
slump in L10n activity by the community (perhaps in part because of&lt;br /&gt;
insufficient efforts to organize and rally the troops).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
My employment situation has stabilized somewhat and I would like to&lt;br /&gt;
continue to contribute to the i18n/L10n effort, but as many have&lt;br /&gt;
experienced throughout the financial crisis, my new employment&lt;br /&gt;
circumstances are only providing a fraction of the income I had made&lt;br /&gt;
in the past, so my &amp;quot;free time&amp;quot; is subject to the demands of pursuing&lt;br /&gt;
supplemental income.  I have done some work in support of Sugar Labs&lt;br /&gt;
since (e.g. Awajún glibc locale drafting), for which I might be&lt;br /&gt;
compensated for my time and effort from the TripAdvisor grant based on&lt;br /&gt;
a template agreement worked out with the SFC and the prior approval of&lt;br /&gt;
the Sugar Labs Oversight Board.  That is essentially piece-work, a&lt;br /&gt;
pre-agreed amount for a pre-agreed deliverable (a committed glibc&lt;br /&gt;
locale), I have not yet actually drawn any TripAdvsor funds for this&lt;br /&gt;
purpose, but I may make such requests in future (assuming necessary&lt;br /&gt;
pre-approvals are granted).&amp;quot; cjl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Translation has two separate parts: internationalization(I18n) and localization (L10n).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Sugar-Devel team is responsible for I18n (preparing the framework to support localization) and the community is responsible for L10n - providing translations (by default, from English) to other languages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The current process is based on Pootle [[http://pootle.translatehouse.org/]] server as the means of distributing localizations [[http://translate.sugarlabs.org]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
L10n leadership tasks:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Monitoring new activity development and advocating for i18n of code&lt;br /&gt;
(gettext formatting).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Setting up new languages for availability in Pootle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reaching upstream to create glibc locales for new languages.&lt;br /&gt;
Necessary for them to be selectable languages in Linux-based systems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Requesting github permissions for the pootle git-hub user (to enable&lt;br /&gt;
pull of new templates, push of completed translations).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Monitoring Pootle for currency of templates, update of templates on&lt;br /&gt;
existing languages, commit of new translations.  Tasks technically the&lt;br /&gt;
responsibility of individual language team leaders, but in practice&lt;br /&gt;
needing an overseer on behalf of all languages. - cjl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let&#039;s divide the languages into three groups:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
    - English (the base language)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Note: English is the original language of many activities, but there&lt;br /&gt;
are also many written first in Spanish, working with developers to&lt;br /&gt;
make Spanish-originating activities capable of being translated to&lt;br /&gt;
other languages (via an English bridge)  is an issue requiring&lt;br /&gt;
attention. - cjl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
    - Mediums of instruction (languages used at deployments as a common language where more than one language is spoken)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
    - Local language (languages used by students at home)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
English is not always the base language of our South Amreican activity&lt;br /&gt;
developers, as mentioned, this requires some careful thought and&lt;br /&gt;
action to make these Spanish-originating activities more widely&lt;br /&gt;
available in other languages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fortunately, the Pootle system can take the ongoing Spanish&lt;br /&gt;
translation of an English-originating activity and show it to&lt;br /&gt;
indigenous language translators (e.g. for Spanish to&lt;br /&gt;
Aymara/Quechua/Guarani/Awajún L10n where localizers are primarily&lt;br /&gt;
bilingual, but not English-speaking).  Similarly, French translations&lt;br /&gt;
(if present in Pootle) can facilitate L10n into the indigenous&lt;br /&gt;
languages of Francophone Africa.  This helps us create bridges to&lt;br /&gt;
indigenous languages by localization into a &amp;quot;language-of-instruction&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
e.g. Spanish, French) early in the development cycle. cjl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a new Sugar release is made, the Pootle English master files should be a part of the release. Sugar development should ensure that Pootle files are available for all software in the release.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Actually, POT template files (Pootle English master files) need to be&lt;br /&gt;
generated early in the development cycle, well before release and must&lt;br /&gt;
be updated regularly as strings change in source. Those updated&lt;br /&gt;
templates need to be synched on Pootle and made available as soon as&lt;br /&gt;
possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Typically there is a &amp;quot;string-freeze&amp;quot; declared for several weeks prior&lt;br /&gt;
to release allowing localizers time to do their work in a stable&lt;br /&gt;
background.  The release itself includes all localizations made up to&lt;br /&gt;
the release date (as PO files). cjl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sugar may want to provide localization for one or more mediums of instruction (e.g. Spanish, French, Arabic). Since this would imply that files for these localizations are available at release, SugarLabs should decide which, if any, of these languages are to be supported.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Agreed that a core set of languages should be completed prior to&lt;br /&gt;
release, not entirely sure about declaring &amp;quot;supported languages&amp;quot;, we&lt;br /&gt;
should release what we have to encourage further work. cjl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deployments (or deployment sponsors) may need localization of Sugar for specific local languages (e.g. Kinyarwanda, Haitian Creole,Sotho, Xhosa). I believe these localizations are most likely to come from Sugar/XO deployments where the language is used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You would think so, and we can talk about Khmer (Cambodian) at some&lt;br /&gt;
other time, but the reality is that you run into odd things more often&lt;br /&gt;
than you would think, sometimes for the reasons you mention below&lt;br /&gt;
(language-of-instruction), sometimes it is more complex than that. - cjl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, strange things happen. For example, Rwanda is one of the largest and most active deployments. However, there is no Kinyarwanda localization. The reason is probably that in Rwanda the OLPC laptops are part of a path to English. They are introduced at the fourth grade, the first year when the required medium of instruction is English. While Kinyarwanda is a subject in grades 4-6, the priority is using the XOs to facilitate learning in English, Mathematics, and Science.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I believe that the Pootle files are distributed and installed with the released image. This should mean that XO users who know English and the native language could provide the localization. Once it is complete, the files can be installed on the XOs at the deployment and the localization would be available at the deployment. Ideally, localization would be done by the students as a learning activity. For example, in Rwanda, localization to Kinyarwanda would help students a lot in learning English. Sameer Verma has provided an excellent tutorial on how to do localization which could become the base for a guide to be included in the release (e.g. as an xol file). [[&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Oh, it were only that easy...  In reality, the technical means for&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;bootstrapping&amp;quot; localization at the local level do not exist.  That is&lt;br /&gt;
a large and complex topic that I would behappy to discuss further, at6&lt;br /&gt;
length.  One issue ismaking it possible to touch and change PO files&lt;br /&gt;
on local machines (I do have some thoughts), another is capturing that&lt;br /&gt;
local work back at the central Pootle server for the benefit of&lt;br /&gt;
others.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What you describe is an ideal situation that is not currently possible&lt;br /&gt;
(local bootstrapping), in reality we need the L10n to happen on our&lt;br /&gt;
centralized Pootle server to get them back out. - cjl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, the translation manager would be responsible to identify deployments which use specific local languages and work with them to organize &#039;L10n&#039; days for new releases. The translation manager should then interface with Pootle to submit the localization files for review and acceptance by Pootle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sugar development could review Sugar (Python) activities to see if they support Pootle and attempt, eg. through GSOC, to get activities upgraded to implement Pootle and to include a base set of English Pootle files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Perhaps OLPC France could be tasked to provide French localization as part of the release process. For Spanish, perhaps Sebastian Silva (Peru) or Plan Ceibal could accept responsibility for Spanish.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other comments:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The most important consideration is what the local people really want…&lt;br /&gt;
not what we think they want or think they should want. Maybe they are happy&lt;br /&gt;
with English. On the other hand, maybe they would prefer their own local&lt;br /&gt;
language (or dialect). Don&#039;t assume anything. Don&#039;t ask just one person.&lt;br /&gt;
Ask enough people to get a genuine consensus. Caryl &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Using students to provide localization is an excellent educational&lt;br /&gt;
activity. However, it needs to be overseen by an &amp;quot;expert&amp;quot; (maybe their&lt;br /&gt;
teacher) to insure it is both accurate and appropriate before submission to&lt;br /&gt;
Pootle. Caryl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Spanish of Mexico is slightly different from the Spanish of Peru&lt;br /&gt;
and/or the Spanish of Argentina (etc., etc,, etc). Using students for&lt;br /&gt;
localization could be helpful here and, I&#039;m sure for other languages. Caryl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Again, for Spanish… why not look to our largest Sugar deployment,&lt;br /&gt;
Uruguay, for enlisting students to help? One of the SLOBs (José Miguel&lt;br /&gt;
García) is Uruguayan as is super-star teacher Rosamel Ramirez. Caryl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Applying to GSOC for help in any aspect with this work seems like a &amp;quot;no&lt;br /&gt;
brainer&amp;quot; but the deadline for applications for 2016 was yesterday! [image:&lt;br /&gt;
Emoji] - Caryl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The success of the first translation will depend on how established /&lt;br /&gt;
knowledgeable the local community is. Reviewing the first round of Haitian&lt;br /&gt;
Creole translations, which I think were done by volunteers, you notice some&lt;br /&gt;
obvious problems, like inconsistent terms. I&#039;ve personally seen students&lt;br /&gt;
and teachers become confused by these issues when using the computer. They&lt;br /&gt;
keep using it anyway, but it definitely affects the user experience. Now,&lt;br /&gt;
hopefully the attitude of &amp;quot;this is the wrong way to say it&amp;quot; will inspire&lt;br /&gt;
the next round of volunteers to do a better translation - but that&#039;s a big&lt;br /&gt;
assumption to make. Sora &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
I think it&#039;s important to remember that in many of these places, language&lt;br /&gt;
ideology is something communities are working through. All the research&lt;br /&gt;
supports literacy / learning in the mother-tongue language, but in many&lt;br /&gt;
places the languages kids speak at home are seen as inferior to the ones&lt;br /&gt;
they learn in school - not just because the one they learn in school is&lt;br /&gt;
more widely-spoken, but because of myths that the language spoken at home&lt;br /&gt;
is not &amp;quot;advanced&amp;quot; enough to study something like science / math / tech.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, basically, if the first translation is not adequate, there may not be a&lt;br /&gt;
second translation. People may decide &amp;quot;This language is not adequate for&lt;br /&gt;
using the computer&amp;quot; instead &amp;quot;Our translation is not adequate; let&#039;s make it&lt;br /&gt;
better.&amp;quot;&#039; Sora&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Another hole in the i18n infrastructure is with our Javascript activities.&lt;br /&gt;
Maybe worth a GSOC project to shore it up. - Walter&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For javascript L10n, start with these links:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;a href=http://www.localeplanet.com/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/a&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;a href=https://blog.mozilla.org/webdev/2011/10/06/i18njs-internationalize-your-javascript-with-a-little-help-from-json-and-the-server/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/a&amp;gt; - cjl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tony37</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Translation_Proposal&amp;diff=97010</id>
		<title>Translation Proposal</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Translation_Proposal&amp;diff=97010"/>
		<updated>2016-02-21T06:06:01Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tony37: Very rough draft of report to SLOBs (due for March meeting)&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;SugarLabs needs a Localization delegate. The purpose of this proposal is to document the current Internationalization/Localization process and to define the role of the Localization delegate in that process. Some proposals for expansion/modification of the process are included.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chris Leonard is arguably the incumbent Localization delegate:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: this title needs comment. The &#039;governance&#039; page suggests that this position should be a delegate and not a co-ordinator since SLOBs cannot name a co-ordinator. I chose localization because I believe I18n (creating the framework and base) is the responsibility of sugar-devel and localization is a community responsibility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;For quite some time (starting in 2008, as I recall) under the &amp;quot;title&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
of Translation Team Coordinator I worked in that role (unpaid) and I&lt;br /&gt;
can certainly help in fleshing out details.  From 2008 - 2013 I was&lt;br /&gt;
able to dedicate adequate time to both technical aspects of i18n&lt;br /&gt;
(Pootle infrastructure and i18n advocacy/assistance to developers) as&lt;br /&gt;
well as L10n (localization mailing list, maintain L10n wiki pages,&lt;br /&gt;
support to new language communities, recruiting new localizers, etc.).&lt;br /&gt;
The good news (for me) is that in 2013 an extended period of&lt;br /&gt;
unemployment ended, the bad news is that I found myself unable to&lt;br /&gt;
continue to provide sufficient support to the community for several&lt;br /&gt;
reasons (technical issues with Pootle version migration as well as&lt;br /&gt;
development migration to github beyond my scope to manage alone) and a&lt;br /&gt;
slump in L10n activity by the community (perhaps in part because of&lt;br /&gt;
insufficient efforts to organize and rally the troops).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
My employment situation has stabilized somewhat and I would like to&lt;br /&gt;
continue to contribute to the i18n/L10n effort, but as many have&lt;br /&gt;
experienced throughout the financial crisis, my new employment&lt;br /&gt;
circumstances are only providing a fraction of the income I had made&lt;br /&gt;
in the past, so my &amp;quot;free time&amp;quot; is subject to the demands of pursuing&lt;br /&gt;
supplemental income.  I have done some work in support of Sugar Labs&lt;br /&gt;
since (e.g. Awajún glibc locale drafting), for which I might be&lt;br /&gt;
compensated for my time and effort from the TripAdvisor grant based on&lt;br /&gt;
a template agreement worked out with the SFC and the prior approval of&lt;br /&gt;
the Sugar Labs Oversight Board.  That is essentially piece-work, a&lt;br /&gt;
pre-agreed amount for a pre-agreed deliverable (a committed glibc&lt;br /&gt;
locale), I have not yet actually drawn any TripAdvsor funds for this&lt;br /&gt;
purpose, but I may make such requests in future (assuming necessary&lt;br /&gt;
pre-approvals are granted).&amp;quot; cjl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Translation has two separate parts: internationalization(I18n) and localization (L10n).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Sugar-Devel team is responsible for I18n (preparing the framework to support localization) and the community is responsible for L10n - providing translations (by default, from English) to other languages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The current process is based on Pootle [[http://pootle.translatehouse.org/]] server as the means of distributing localizations [[http://translate.sugarlabs.org]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
L10n leadership tasks:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Monitoring new activity development and advocating for i18n of code&lt;br /&gt;
(gettext formatting).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Setting up new languages for availability in Pootle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reaching upstream to create glibc locales for new languages.&lt;br /&gt;
Necessary for them to be selectable languages in Linux-based systems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Requesting github permissions for the pootle git-hub user (to enable&lt;br /&gt;
pull of new templates, push of completed translations).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Monitoring Pootle for currency of templates, update of templates on&lt;br /&gt;
existing languages, commit of new translations.  Tasks technically the&lt;br /&gt;
responsibility of individual language team leaders, but in practice&lt;br /&gt;
needing an overseer on behalf of all languages. - cjl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let&#039;s divide the languages into three groups:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
    - English (the base language)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Note: English is the original language of many activities, but there&lt;br /&gt;
are also many written first in Spanish, working with developers to&lt;br /&gt;
make Spanish-originating activities capable of being translated to&lt;br /&gt;
other languages (via an English bridge)  is an issue requiring&lt;br /&gt;
attention. - cjl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
    - Mediums of instruction (languages used at deployments as a common language where more than one language is spoken)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
    - Local language (languages used by students at home)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
English is not always the base language of our South Amreican activity&lt;br /&gt;
developers, as mentioned, this requires some careful thought and&lt;br /&gt;
action to make these Spanish-originating activities more widely&lt;br /&gt;
available in other languages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fortunately, the Pootle system can take the ongoing Spanish&lt;br /&gt;
translation of an English-originating activity and show it to&lt;br /&gt;
indigenous language translators (e.g. for Spanish to&lt;br /&gt;
Aymara/Quechua/Guarani/Awajún L10n where localizers are primarily&lt;br /&gt;
bilingual, but not English-speaking).  Similarly, French translations&lt;br /&gt;
(if present in Pootle) can facilitate L10n into the indigenous&lt;br /&gt;
languages of Francophone Africa.  This helps us create bridges to&lt;br /&gt;
indigenous languages by localization into a &amp;quot;language-of-instruction&amp;quot;,&lt;br /&gt;
e.g. Spanish, French) early in the development cycle. cjl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a new Sugar release is made, the Pootle English master files should be a part of the release. Sugar development should ensure that Pootle files are available for all software in the release.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Actually, POT template files (Pootle English master files) need to be&lt;br /&gt;
generated early in the development cycle, well before release and must&lt;br /&gt;
be updated regularly as strings change in source. Those updated&lt;br /&gt;
templates need to be synched on Pootle and made available as soon as&lt;br /&gt;
possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Typically there is a &amp;quot;string-freeze&amp;quot; declared for several weeks prior&lt;br /&gt;
to release allowing localizers time to do their work in a stable&lt;br /&gt;
background.  The release itself includes all localizations made up to&lt;br /&gt;
the release date (as PO files). cjl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sugar may want to provide localization for one or more mediums of instruction (e.g. Spanish, French, Arabic). Since this would imply that files for these localizations are available at release, SugarLabs should decide which, if any, of these languages are to be supported.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Agreed that a core set of languages should be completed prior to&lt;br /&gt;
release, not entirely sure about declaring &amp;quot;supported languages&amp;quot;, we&lt;br /&gt;
should release what we have to encourage further work. cjl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deployments (or deployment sponsors) may need localization of Sugar for specific local languages (e.g. Kinyarwanda, Haitian Creole,Sotho, Xhosa). I believe these localizations are most likely to come from Sugar/XO deployments where the language is used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You would think so, and we can talk about Khmer (Cambodian) at some&lt;br /&gt;
other time, but the reality is that you run into odd things more often&lt;br /&gt;
than you would think, sometimes for the reasons you mention below&lt;br /&gt;
(language-of-instruction), sometimes it is more complex than that. - cjl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, strange things happen. For example, Rwanda is one of the largest and most active deployments. However, there is no Kinyarwanda localization. The reason is probably that in Rwanda the OLPC laptops are part of a path to English. They are introduced at the fourth grade, the first year when the required medium of instruction is English. While Kinyarwanda is a subject in grades 4-6, the priority is using the XOs to facilitate learning in English, Mathematics, and Science.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I believe that the Pootle files are distributed and installed with the released image. This should mean that XO users who know English and the native language could provide the localization. Once it is complete, the files can be installed on the XOs at the deployment and the localization would be available at the deployment. Ideally, localization would be done by the students as a learning activity. For example, in Rwanda, localization to Kinyarwanda would help students a lot in learning English. Sameer Verma has provided an excellent tutorial on how to do localization which could become the base for a guide to be included in the release (e.g. as an xol file). [[&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Oh, it were only that easy...  In reality, the technical means for&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;bootstrapping&amp;quot; localization at the local level do not exist.  That is&lt;br /&gt;
a large and complex topic that I would behappy to discuss further, at6&lt;br /&gt;
length.  One issue ismaking it possible to touch and change PO files&lt;br /&gt;
on local machines (I do have some thoughts), another is capturing that&lt;br /&gt;
local work back at the central Pootle server for the benefit of&lt;br /&gt;
others.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What you describe is an ideal situation that is not currently possible&lt;br /&gt;
(local bootstrapping), in reality we need the L10n to happen on our&lt;br /&gt;
centralized Pootle server to get them back out. - cjl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, the translation manager would be responsible to identify deployments which use specific local languages and work with them to organize &#039;L10n&#039; days for new releases. The translation manager should then interface with Pootle to submit the localization files for review and acceptance by Pootle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sugar development could review Sugar (Python) activities to see if they support Pootle and attempt, eg. through GSOC, to get activities upgraded to implement Pootle and to include a base set of English Pootle files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Perhaps OLPC France could be tasked to provide French localization as part of the release process. For Spanish, perhaps Sebastian Silva (Peru) or Plan Ceibal could accept responsibility for Spanish.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other comments:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The most important consideration is what the local people really want…&lt;br /&gt;
not what we think they want or think they should want. Maybe they are happy&lt;br /&gt;
with English. On the other hand, maybe they would prefer their own local&lt;br /&gt;
language (or dialect). Don&#039;t assume anything. Don&#039;t ask just one person.&lt;br /&gt;
Ask enough people to get a genuine consensus. Caryl &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Using students to provide localization is an excellent educational&lt;br /&gt;
activity. However, it needs to be overseen by an &amp;quot;expert&amp;quot; (maybe their&lt;br /&gt;
teacher) to insure it is both accurate and appropriate before submission to&lt;br /&gt;
Pootle. Caryl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Spanish of Mexico is slightly different from the Spanish of Peru&lt;br /&gt;
and/or the Spanish of Argentina (etc., etc,, etc). Using students for&lt;br /&gt;
localization could be helpful here and, I&#039;m sure for other languages. Caryl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Again, for Spanish… why not look to our largest Sugar deployment,&lt;br /&gt;
Uruguay, for enlisting students to help? One of the SLOBs (José Miguel&lt;br /&gt;
García) is Uruguayan as is super-star teacher Rosamel Ramirez. Caryl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Applying to GSOC for help in any aspect with this work seems like a &amp;quot;no&lt;br /&gt;
brainer&amp;quot; but the deadline for applications for 2016 was yesterday! [image:&lt;br /&gt;
Emoji] - Caryl&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The success of the first translation will depend on how established /&lt;br /&gt;
knowledgeable the local community is. Reviewing the first round of Haitian&lt;br /&gt;
Creole translations, which I think were done by volunteers, you notice some&lt;br /&gt;
obvious problems, like inconsistent terms. I&#039;ve personally seen students&lt;br /&gt;
and teachers become confused by these issues when using the computer. They&lt;br /&gt;
keep using it anyway, but it definitely affects the user experience. Now,&lt;br /&gt;
hopefully the attitude of &amp;quot;this is the wrong way to say it&amp;quot; will inspire&lt;br /&gt;
the next round of volunteers to do a better translation - but that&#039;s a big&lt;br /&gt;
assumption to make. Sora &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
I think it&#039;s important to remember that in many of these places, language&lt;br /&gt;
ideology is something communities are working through. All the research&lt;br /&gt;
supports literacy / learning in the mother-tongue language, but in many&lt;br /&gt;
places the languages kids speak at home are seen as inferior to the ones&lt;br /&gt;
they learn in school - not just because the one they learn in school is&lt;br /&gt;
more widely-spoken, but because of myths that the language spoken at home&lt;br /&gt;
is not &amp;quot;advanced&amp;quot; enough to study something like science / math / tech.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, basically, if the first translation is not adequate, there may not be a&lt;br /&gt;
second translation. People may decide &amp;quot;This language is not adequate for&lt;br /&gt;
using the computer&amp;quot; instead &amp;quot;Our translation is not adequate; let&#039;s make it&lt;br /&gt;
better.&amp;quot;&#039; Sora&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tony37</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Wish_list&amp;diff=97007</id>
		<title>Wish list</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Wish_list&amp;diff=97007"/>
		<updated>2016-02-21T04:19:43Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tony37: /* Translation */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;[[Category:Wish list]]&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is a page composed of selected [[:Category:Wish list | wish list pages]] on the Sugar Labs wiki.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Visit [[:Category:Wish list]] for the known lists.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please click a section heading below to visit a featured wish list, and then add your wish.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[[Teacher feedback]]==&lt;br /&gt;
{{:Teacher feedback}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[[Sugar/Wish list|Sugar wish list]]==&lt;br /&gt;
{{:Sugar/Wish list}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
=== &#039;&#039;&#039;Create a Sugar installation script that users can find with the default GNOME software installer&#039;&#039;&#039; ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;gt;&amp;quot;Fedora 20&#039;s default GNOME3 graphical software installer tool fails to find Sugar, reportedly as Sugar is not considered to be an &#039;application&#039;.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is a significant problem.  Sugar will be more successful if Linux users can easily find it by a simple keyword search in the default installer.  A user should not have to install a new installation app (yumex) in order to find Sugar.  I suggest that the team create an &amp;quot;application&amp;quot; that (i) meets Fedora&#039;s criteria for applications and (ii) automatically executes a script that downloads and installs the necessary components of Sugar.  Better yet, the Sugar Learning Platform Package App could even give a user a set of choices of available components and/or activity packages to add to the script.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[[Activity Library/Wish list|Activity Library wish list]]==&lt;br /&gt;
{{:Activity Library/Wish list}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[[Features/GTK3/API wish list]]==&lt;br /&gt;
{{:Features/GTK3/API_wish_list}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[[School Server Wish List]]==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[[Translation Proposal]]==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Request New Features]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tony37</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Wish_list&amp;diff=97006</id>
		<title>Wish list</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Wish_list&amp;diff=97006"/>
		<updated>2016-02-21T04:10:39Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tony37: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;[[Category:Wish list]]&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is a page composed of selected [[:Category:Wish list | wish list pages]] on the Sugar Labs wiki.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Visit [[:Category:Wish list]] for the known lists.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please click a section heading below to visit a featured wish list, and then add your wish.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[[Teacher feedback]]==&lt;br /&gt;
{{:Teacher feedback}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[[Sugar/Wish list|Sugar wish list]]==&lt;br /&gt;
{{:Sugar/Wish list}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
=== &#039;&#039;&#039;Create a Sugar installation script that users can find with the default GNOME software installer&#039;&#039;&#039; ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;gt;&amp;quot;Fedora 20&#039;s default GNOME3 graphical software installer tool fails to find Sugar, reportedly as Sugar is not considered to be an &#039;application&#039;.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is a significant problem.  Sugar will be more successful if Linux users can easily find it by a simple keyword search in the default installer.  A user should not have to install a new installation app (yumex) in order to find Sugar.  I suggest that the team create an &amp;quot;application&amp;quot; that (i) meets Fedora&#039;s criteria for applications and (ii) automatically executes a script that downloads and installs the necessary components of Sugar.  Better yet, the Sugar Learning Platform Package App could even give a user a set of choices of available components and/or activity packages to add to the script.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[[Activity Library/Wish list|Activity Library wish list]]==&lt;br /&gt;
{{:Activity Library/Wish list}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[[Features/GTK3/API wish list]]==&lt;br /&gt;
{{:Features/GTK3/API_wish_list}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[[School Server Wish List]]==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[[Translation]]==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Request New Features]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tony37</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Oversight_Board/2015-2016-candidates&amp;diff=96721</id>
		<title>Oversight Board/2015-2016-candidates</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Oversight_Board/2015-2016-candidates&amp;diff=96721"/>
		<updated>2015-12-29T03:38:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tony37: /* Candidates */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;[[Category:Oversight board]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Governance]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Team]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Election==&lt;br /&gt;
All seven (7) seats are open for election / re-election to the [[Oversight Board|Sugar Labs Oversight Board]] for 2016-2018.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Candidates==&lt;br /&gt;
Here are the candidates&lt;br /&gt;
* Edward [[User:Mokurai | Mokurai]] Cherlin [[Open Educational Resources]] (New OER project in planning stage)&lt;br /&gt;
* Claudia Urrea (http://wiki.sugarlabs.org/go/User:Claudia_Urrea)&lt;br /&gt;
* Laura Victoria Vargas [http://pe.sugarlabs.org/ir/~kaametza Sugar Evolution]&lt;br /&gt;
* Adam Holt ([[User:Holt|platform]])&lt;br /&gt;
* Walter Bender ([[User:Walter|Sugar Stable/Sugar Future]])&lt;br /&gt;
* Sam Parkinson ([[User:SAMdroid#Platform_2015]])&lt;br /&gt;
* Jose Miguel Garcia (http://wiki.sugarlabs.org/go/User:Jmgarcia)&lt;br /&gt;
* Lionel Laské (https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/go/User:Llaske)&lt;br /&gt;
* Sameer Verma (https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/go/User:Sverma)&lt;br /&gt;
* Tony Anderson ([[User:tony37|platform]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==References==&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Oversight_Board/2014-2015-candidates]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Oversight_Board/2013-2014-candidates]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Oversight_Board/2012-2013-candidates]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Oversight_Board/2011-2012-candidates]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Oversight_Board/2010-2011-candidates]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Oversight_Board/2009-2010-candidates]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Sugar Labs/Members]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tony37</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Platform&amp;diff=96720</id>
		<title>Platform</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Platform&amp;diff=96720"/>
		<updated>2015-12-29T03:30:00Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tony37: Created page with &amp;quot;My name is Tony Anderson. I&amp;#039;m a retired computer professional. As an independent volunteer, I have  been in full-time support of the OLPC concept and XO deployments since 2007...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;My name is Tony Anderson. I&#039;m a retired computer professional. As an independent volunteer, I have &lt;br /&gt;
been in full-time support of the OLPC concept and XO deployments since 2007.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As a volunteer initially at OLE Nepal, my assignment was to support the school server and later to work with Interns preparing to make XO deployments to remote areas of Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 2010, started work as a volunteer in Rwanda, which has a national OLPC program (the XO is shown on their currency). Working with that program increased my direct experience with the requirements to support a deployment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Supporting Laptops to Lesotho introduced me first-hand to the problems of deployments in very remote locations, especially the need for electrical support (both schools there are solar powered because the electrical grid doesn&#039;t reach - so there is no electrical experience in the community).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Recently, have started support of two deployments on Palawan in the Philippines. One is a primary school with XO-1.5. The second is a secondary school with refurbished Dell laptops (Core Duo).&lt;br /&gt;
The latter provides an opportunity to see how much of the available school server content can be useful for older students. My goal is to install Sugar on Ubuntu on these laptops (Not immediately possible because James Cameron&#039;s Sugar desktop only works in 64-bit architecture),&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For me, the goal of one laptop per child is to use computers to provide a more meaningful educational experience for students at community schools which are on the wrong side of the &#039;digital divide&#039;. One primary assumption is that the value of the computer grows with the amount of time the student has access to it - hence, one laptop per child. This strongly contrasts with the conventional computer lab concept in which students are scheduled to use the laptops during specific periods to learn about computers. The educational value of the computer is in its support for learning across the curriculum, learning about computers is the natural result of their use (no one goes to class to learn to use a mobile).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Experience has shown that such a deployment requires a school server to provide local access to information from the internet. The economics are very favorable since very large hard drives are inexpensive (1TB for $60)and use of a server to deliver web pages and files does not require a high-powered processor. Currently a schoolserver can be provided for about the cost of two XOs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
My primary day-day effort is to strengthen the integration of Sugar on the XO with the school server and to add additional services and content. The BERNIE project is an attempt to put all of the software and content needed to deploy XOs with a school server on a single 1TB hard drive.&lt;br /&gt;
This has proven much more difficult than expected because of the rapid changes to the software and the wealth of new content becoming available. At a school, the software and content needs to be updated only once a year at the beginning of each school year. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sugar must move away from a dependency on the XO and be readily available for a wide range of platforms. This is existential because SugarLabs will fail without a large and growing base of users. SOAS is a valuable step, but we to be able to deploy laptops or tablets which requires installation of Sugar on the computer.  James Cameron&#039;s efforts to provide Sugar on Ubuntu is one example. Lionel Laske&#039;s effort to provide a web based Sugar experience is another.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the same time, SugarLabs has a responsibility to provide Long Term_Support for the XOs in the field (most of which are XO-1). Most deployments depended on outside donors to acquire their laptops and do not have the funds to replace them with newer equipment. These deployments will continue to use them as long as they function. Most deployed XOs are still using the original installed software (e.g. 0.82), a consequence of the high logistical cost to service them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SugarLabs needs to extend the OLPC concept to include deployments with only a classroom set of laptops which are moved from class to class during the week. As Walter Bender pointed out at the Malaysia Summit, one laptop per child means that there are enough so that in use there is one available for each child in the class. This implies some attention to enabling the multiple users to save and access their own work. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sugar needs to recognize the incredibly valuable asset represented by ASLO (our app store). We need to encourage the development of new activities and to encourage the upgrade of existing ones. We need to wrestle with the decision to focus on Python or on Javascript in future development investments.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tony37</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=User:Tony37&amp;diff=96718</id>
		<title>User:Tony37</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=User:Tony37&amp;diff=96718"/>
		<updated>2015-12-29T02:26:44Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tony37: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;I have been a volunteer with OLE Nepal and later in Rwanda. I have posted several &lt;br /&gt;
activities, all of which are in the sandbox for one reason or another, mostly the last 5% of &lt;br /&gt;
a project takes 50% of the time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[School Server Wish List]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Platform]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tony37</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=User:Tony37&amp;diff=96717</id>
		<title>User:Tony37</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=User:Tony37&amp;diff=96717"/>
		<updated>2015-12-29T02:26:15Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tony37: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;I have been a volunteer with OLE Nepal and later in Rwanda. I have posted several &lt;br /&gt;
activities, all of which are in the sandbox for one reason or another, mostly the last 5% of &lt;br /&gt;
a project takes 50% of the time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[School Server Wish List]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Platform]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tony37</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Summer_of_Code/2015&amp;diff=94582</id>
		<title>Summer of Code/2015</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Summer_of_Code/2015&amp;diff=94582"/>
		<updated>2015-03-08T01:33:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tony37: Add idea for GSOC&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Students&#039;&#039;&#039;: See our guide on [[Summer_of_Code#How_to_participate|how to participate in Google Summer of Code]] for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Project candidates ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the table below is a list of projects potential participants might contribute to in the GSoC program.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Note 0: These are project ideas from Sugar Labs contributors. Students, feel free to propose your ideas as well.&lt;br /&gt;
;Note 1: We are focusing on the Javascript components within Sugar this summer. It means that you&#039;ve got to write activities for Sugar Web and Sugarizer. More information: on Sugar Web [https://github.com/sugarlabs/sugar-docs/blob/master/web-architecture.md][https://github.com/sugarlabs/sugar-docs/blob/master/activity.md] and on Sugarizer [http://sugarizer.org]&lt;br /&gt;
;Note 2: Potential mentors, please feel free to add ideas to this list. Also, feel free to add your name to a project you&#039;d be willing to co-mentor.&lt;br /&gt;
;Note 3: Potential students, more project ideas can be found on our [[Features]] page.&lt;br /&gt;
;Note 4: Accepted projects are in &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;font color=&amp;quot;#00bb00&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Green&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sugar Core ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=1 cellpadding=3 style=&amp;quot;border: 1px solid white; border-collapse: collapse; background: #e3e4e5;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
 |-style=&amp;quot;background:#787878; color: white;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!  !! Title !! Mentor !! Project&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!valign=top | [[File:git_logo.png|90px|thumb|center]] ||valign=top width=&amp;quot;15%&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#e3e4e5;&amp;quot; |Git backend||valign=top width=&amp;quot;15%&amp;quot; | Martin Abente Lahaye and Walter Bender ||align=left valign=top|&lt;br /&gt;
;Brief explanation: The Sugar Journal doesn&#039;t do a great job of supporting versioning or forking. This project is to build a backend for the Journal that is based on git, which does support versioning and forking. By building on top of a git hosting site we get the added benefit of network access as well.&lt;br /&gt;
;Expected results: Working code and an integration with Turtle Blocks&lt;br /&gt;
;Knowledge prerequisite: Strong background in Git and scripting languages such as Python, Ruby and JavaScript.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!valign=top | [[File:Cordova_sugar.png|90px|center|thumb]] || valign=top  style=&amp;quot;background:#e3e4e5;&amp;quot;  | Cordova/PhoneGap container for Sugar || valign=top | Puneet Kaur and Lionel Laské||align=left valign=top |&lt;br /&gt;
;Brief explanation: Making cordova plugins for sugar and demonstrating the working plugins via sugar activities, incooperating cordova plugins with the existing sugar activities visit : http://sugarcordova.blogspot.com/ for more info&lt;br /&gt;
;Expected results: Working Demonstration of new plugins and new activities based on implemented plugins&lt;br /&gt;
;Knowledge prerequisite: Strong background in JavaScript,python&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!valign=top | || valign=top  style=&amp;quot;background:#e3e4e5;&amp;quot;  | Performance tuning on machines with limited memory || valign=top | Samuel Greenfeld and James Cameron||align=left valign=top |&lt;br /&gt;
;Brief explanation: The newer Sugar builds have performance issues on some old hardware with limited memory. This is keeping some Sugar deployments from upgrading. This project is to look into the performance issues and tune Sugar for low-memory devices.&lt;br /&gt;
;Expected results: build suitable for running on OLPC XO-1 hardware&lt;br /&gt;
;Knowledge prerequisite:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!valign=top | || valign=top  style=&amp;quot;background:#e3e4e5;&amp;quot;  | Re-design collaboration with web technologies || valign=top | Martin Abente Lahaye and Walter Bender ||align=left valign=top |&lt;br /&gt;
;Brief explanation: Now that JavaScript has become a first class citizen in the Sugar ecosystem, we must re-design our collaboration model to allow collaboration between web activities regardless of the platform.&lt;br /&gt;
;Knowledge prerequisite: JavaScript, web sockets, web services.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sugar Activities ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=1 cellpadding=3 style=&amp;quot;border: 1px solid white; border-collapse: collapse; background: #e3e4e5;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
 |-style=&amp;quot;background:#787878; color: white;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!  !! Title !! Mentor !! Project&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!valign=top | [[File:turtlejs.png|90px|thumb|center]] ||valign=top width=&amp;quot;15%&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#e3e4e5;&amp;quot; |Turtle Blocks 3D Javascript||valign=top width=&amp;quot;15%&amp;quot; | Tony Forster and Walter Bender||align=left valign=top|&lt;br /&gt;
;Brief explanation: The Python version of Turtle Blocks 3D is based on GTK since Sugar uses GTK and GTK is largely incompatible with OpenGL. In a Javascript version, we could use OpenGL and take advantage of many more graphics libraries, such as 3D lighting models and texture mapping.&lt;br /&gt;
;Expected results: A new Turtle Blocks spin that adds basic 3D transforms to Turtle Blocks (e.g., setxyz, pitch, roll, yaw); camera and lighting models; surface texture mapping; and a rich set of example projects. &lt;br /&gt;
;Knowledge prerequisite: Strong background in Javascript&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!valign=top | [[File:turtlejs.png|90px|thumb|center]] ||valign=top width=&amp;quot;15%&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#e3e4e5;&amp;quot; |Turtle Blocks export as Javascript||valign=top width=&amp;quot;15%&amp;quot; | Walter Bender||align=left valign=top|&lt;br /&gt;
;Brief explanation: The Python version of Turtle Blocks allows the user to export their project as Python code. We need an equivalent Javascript export for the Javascript version.&lt;br /&gt;
;Expected results: Working code integrated into Turtle Blocks JS&lt;br /&gt;
;Knowledge prerequisite: Strong background in Javascript&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!valign=top | [[File:turtlejs.png|90px|thumb|center]] ||valign=top width=&amp;quot;15%&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#e3e4e5;&amp;quot; |Turtle Blocks inline Javascript||valign=top width=&amp;quot;15%&amp;quot; | Walter Bender||align=left valign=top|&lt;br /&gt;
;Brief explanation: There are several block-based programming environments that allow the user to extend the language in line, such as Blocky and Pencil Code. (Turtle Blocks uses plugins for this, but they are imported). The goal of this project is to write an in-line block editor for Turtle Blocks (Javascript version).&lt;br /&gt;
;Expected results: Working code integrated into Turtle Blocks JS&lt;br /&gt;
;Knowledge prerequisite: Strong background in Javascript&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!valign=top | [[File:turtlejs.png|90px|thumb|center]] ||valign=top width=&amp;quot;15%&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#e3e4e5;&amp;quot; |Turtle Blocks debugging tools||valign=top width=&amp;quot;15%&amp;quot; | Cynthia Solomon and Walter Bender||align=left valign=top|&lt;br /&gt;
;Brief explanation: There are several debugging tools in Turtle Blocks: the ability to set breakpoints, step through code, and inspect variables. But we could use a more comprehensive approach, including a mechanism for tracking progress over time.&lt;br /&gt;
;Expected results: Working code integrated into Turtle Blocks JS&lt;br /&gt;
;Knowledge prerequisite: Strong background in Javascript&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!valign=top | [[File:turtlejs.png|90px|thumb|center]] ||valign=top width=&amp;quot;15%&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#e3e4e5;&amp;quot; |Turtle Blocks for in-line programming||valign=top width=&amp;quot;15%&amp;quot; | Gonzalo Odiard and Walter Bender||align=left valign=top|&lt;br /&gt;
;Brief explanation: Often we&#039;d like users to be able to extend or modify an activity. Rather than doing this by writing Python or Javascript, why not let them use the block language of Turtle Blocks as an in-line editor. For example, in the Turtle Pond activity, the user can upload Python code representing search algorithms for the turtle as it tries to find its way out of the pond. Why not use a block editor to write the search algorithm?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using the Turtle Blocks engine as an editor inside existing activities would be the preferred mechanism, as oppose to constantly extending Turtle Blocks itself. This would (1) let the editor be more specific to the needs of the individual activity; (2) lessen the burden on the user for installing plugins and extensions; (3) circumvent situations where there are barriers to sharing data between activities -- e.g., running outside of Sugar; and (4) perhaps encourage more developers to incorporate more programmatic elements in their activities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Expected results: Integration into the Physics Activity&lt;br /&gt;
;Knowledge prerequisite: Strong background in Javascript/Python&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!valign=top | [[File:mouse-music.png|90px|thumb|center]] ||valign=top width=&amp;quot;15%&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#e3e4e5;&amp;quot; |Music Blocks||valign=top width=&amp;quot;15%&amp;quot; |Devin Ulibarri and Marnen Laibow-Koser||align=left valign=top|&lt;br /&gt;
;Brief explanation: Using a framework similar to Turtle Blocks Javascript, build a suite of music tools for introducing the basic concepts of scale, beat, chord, phrasing, sequencing, transformations, etc. See some of Devin&#039;s sketches at [http://people.sugarlabs.org/walter/2015-02-16%20Mouse%20Music.pdf].&lt;br /&gt;
;Expected results: Working code &lt;br /&gt;
;Knowledge prerequisite: Strong background in Javascript&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!valign=top | [[File:confusion.png|90px|thumb|center]] ||valign=top width=&amp;quot;15%&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#e3e4e5;&amp;quot; |Beyond Flashcards: Programming to ReadJS||valign=top width=&amp;quot;15%&amp;quot; | and Walter Bender||align=left valign=top|&lt;br /&gt;
;Brief explanation: Back in the 1980s, IBM had a literacy program, &amp;quot;Writing to Read&amp;quot;. The gist was that writing was a great way to spark a child&#039;s interest in reading. What if writing code could achieve a similar result? The project is to explore how programming might be incorporated into a literacy program. Like turtle, only simple sentences instead of stacks. It would be a &amp;quot;whole word&amp;quot; approach rather than a &amp;quot;phonics&amp;quot; approach: they can take &amp;quot;sentences&amp;quot; and make paragraphs that result in animations.&lt;br /&gt;
;Expected results: Working prototype&lt;br /&gt;
;Knowledge prerequisite: Strong background in Javascript&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sugar Activities (Ports) ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These are existing Python activities we&#039;d like to see ported to JavaScript. In porting we expect that the activities will take on new UI features and pedagogical significance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=1 cellpadding=3 style=&amp;quot;border: 1px solid white; border-collapse: collapse; background: #e3e4e5;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
 |-style=&amp;quot;background:#787878; color: white;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!  !! Title !! Mentor !! Project&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!valign=top | [[File:Gsoc2015 llaske.svg|90px|thumb|center]] ||valign=top width=&amp;quot;15%&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#e3e4e5;&amp;quot; |Sugar Web Basic Activity Set||valign=top width=&amp;quot;15%&amp;quot; |Lionel Laské||align=left valign=top|&lt;br /&gt;
Using Sugar Web Framework - the JavaScript Framework for Sugar - you will have to develop and enhance basic Sugar activity set including activities: Calculate, Paint, Memorize and Record. All activities should use Sugar features (specific UI, journal and collaboration) and should work both on Sugar/Fedora and Sugarizer/Web.&lt;br /&gt;
Pre-requisite: &lt;br /&gt;
* Good level on HTML5/JavaScript and knowledge of frameworks to handle Canvas objects.&lt;br /&gt;
* Knowledge of PhoneGap/Cordova&lt;br /&gt;
* Understanding of Python&lt;br /&gt;
* Good capacity to do reverse engineering on existing code.&lt;br /&gt;
More information: Sugar Web [https://github.com/sugarlabs/sugar-docs/blob/master/web-architecture.md]&lt;br /&gt;
[https://github.com/sugarlabs/sugar-docs/blob/master/activity.md], Sugarizer [http://sugarizer.org], Calculate [http://activities.sugarlabs.org/en/sugar/addon/4076], Paint [http://activities.sugarlabs.org/en/sugar/addon/4082][http://activities.sugarlabs.org/en/sugar/addon/4695], Memorize [http://activities.sugarlabs.org/en/sugar/addon/4063][http://activities.sugarlabs.org/en/sugar/addon/4693] and Record [http://activities.sugarlabs.org/en/sugar/addon/4081].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!valign=top | [[File:abacus.jpg|90px|thumb|center]] ||valign=top width=&amp;quot;15%&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#e3e4e5;&amp;quot; |Abacus JS||valign=top width=&amp;quot;15%&amp;quot; | Walter Bender||align=left valign=top|&lt;br /&gt;
;Brief explanation: Port of the Abacus activity.&lt;br /&gt;
;Expected results: &lt;br /&gt;
;Knowledge prerequisite: Strong background in Javascript&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!valign=top | [[File:fototoon.png|90px|thumb|center]] ||valign=top width=&amp;quot;15%&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#e3e4e5;&amp;quot; |Fototoons JS||valign=top width=&amp;quot;15%&amp;quot; |Gonzalo Odiard||align=left valign=top|&lt;br /&gt;
;Brief explanation: Port of Fototoons.&lt;br /&gt;
;Expected results: &lt;br /&gt;
;Knowledge prerequisite: Strong background in Javascript&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!valign=top | [[File:Activity-physics-55x55.png|90px|thumb|center]] ||valign=top width=&amp;quot;15%&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#e3e4e5;&amp;quot; |Physics JS||valign=top width=&amp;quot;15%&amp;quot; | Walter Bender||align=left valign=top|&lt;br /&gt;
;Brief explanation: Port of Physics.&lt;br /&gt;
;Expected results: &lt;br /&gt;
;Knowledge prerequisite: Strong background in Javascript&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!valign=top | [[File:Dimensions-icon.png|90px|thumb|center]] ||valign=top width=&amp;quot;15%&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#e3e4e5;&amp;quot; |Dimensions JS||valign=top width=&amp;quot;15%&amp;quot; | Walter Bender||align=left valign=top|&lt;br /&gt;
;Brief explanation: Port of Dimensions.&lt;br /&gt;
;Expected results: &lt;br /&gt;
;Knowledge prerequisite: Strong background in Javascript&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!valign=top | [[File:Spirolaterals-icon.svg|90px|thumb|center]] ||valign=top width=&amp;quot;15%&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#e3e4e5;&amp;quot; |Spirolaterals JS||valign=top width=&amp;quot;15%&amp;quot; | Walter Bender||align=left valign=top|&lt;br /&gt;
;Brief explanation: Port of Spirolaterals.&lt;br /&gt;
;Expected results: &lt;br /&gt;
;Knowledge prerequisite: Strong background in Javascript&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!valign=top | [[File:Turtle-Flags.png|90px|thumb|center]] ||valign=top width=&amp;quot;15%&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#e3e4e5;&amp;quot; |Turtle Flags JS||valign=top width=&amp;quot;15%&amp;quot; | Walter Bender||align=left valign=top|&lt;br /&gt;
;Brief explanation: Port of Turtle Flags.&lt;br /&gt;
;Expected results: &lt;br /&gt;
;Knowledge prerequisite: Strong background in Javascript&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!valign=top | [[File:confusion.png|90px|thumb|center]] ||valign=top width=&amp;quot;15%&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#e3e4e5;&amp;quot; |Turtle Confusion JS||valign=top width=&amp;quot;15%&amp;quot; | Walter Bender||align=left valign=top|&lt;br /&gt;
;Brief explanation: Port of Turtle Confusion.&lt;br /&gt;
;Expected results: &lt;br /&gt;
;Knowledge prerequisite: Strong background in Javascript&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!valign=top |  ||valign=top width=&amp;quot;15%&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#e3e4e5;&amp;quot; |Image Viewer JS||valign=top width=&amp;quot;15%&amp;quot; | Walter Bender||align=left valign=top|&lt;br /&gt;
;Brief explanation: Port of Image Viewer (including image processing package)&lt;br /&gt;
;Expected results: &lt;br /&gt;
;Knowledge prerequisite: Strong background in Javascript&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Web Technology ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sugar is based on the Python programming language. A major new emphasis is on web techologies: HTML5, CSS, and Javascript. There is a need to help &lt;br /&gt;
our users learn these technologies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=1 cellpadding=3 style=&amp;quot;border: 1px solid white; border-collapse: collapse; background: #e3e4e5;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
 |-style=&amp;quot;background:#787878; color: white;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!  !! Title !! Mentor !! Project&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!valign=top | [[File:GSOC_Browse.png|90px|thumb|center]] ||valign=top width=&amp;quot;15%&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#e3e4e5;&amp;quot; |Web Confusion||valign=top width=&amp;quot;15%&amp;quot; |Tony Anderson||align=left valign=top|&lt;br /&gt;
Create a representative set of web pages as challenges to learners who are developing skills in HTML and CSS. The idea is comparable to Turtle Confusion &lt;br /&gt;
which provides a set of figures to be created using TurtleBlocks. The web pages should not require Javascript. Creative use of images, audio and video should be encouraged (users have access to a camera and microphone and so can create media).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pre-requisite: &lt;br /&gt;
* Good knowledge of HTML and CSS and creative design skills&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=1 cellpadding=3 style=&amp;quot;border: 1px solid white; border-collapse: collapse; background: #e3e4e5;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
 |-style=&amp;quot;background:#787878; color: white;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!  !! Title !! Mentor !! Project&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!valign=top | [[File:GSOC_Browse.png|90px|thumb|center]] ||valign=top width=&amp;quot;15%&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#e3e4e5;&amp;quot; |Interactive Javascript Shell||valign=top width=&amp;quot;15%&amp;quot; |Tony Anderson||align=left valign=top|&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are many online tools that allow the user to type in javascript and then immediately run it. This is very useful in teaching a language.&lt;br /&gt;
Research available tools and their design, create an open source tool which can be run from an offline host (e.g. school server) or on the XO to support user learning of Javascript.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pre-requisite: &lt;br /&gt;
* Good knowledge of javascript&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
==Subpages==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Special:PrefixIndex/{{PAGENAMEE}}/}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tony37</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=File:GSOC_Browse.png&amp;diff=94581</id>
		<title>File:GSOC Browse.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=File:GSOC_Browse.png&amp;diff=94581"/>
		<updated>2015-03-08T01:13:49Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tony37: Browse activity icon for use to represent web&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Browse activity icon for use to represent web&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tony37</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Open_Educational_Resources&amp;diff=84262</id>
		<title>Open Educational Resources</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Open_Educational_Resources&amp;diff=84262"/>
		<updated>2012-11-24T08:11:59Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tony37: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Open Educational Resources (OERs) are digital replacements for textbooks available under some form of Free license, such as Creative Commons. There are many projects to create OERs, including the Sugar Labs [[Replacing Textbooks]] project, and projects of state and national governments, NGOs, professional associations, and individual contributors. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most OERs are PDFs of existing content, including printed textbooks, but there are also innovative projects to produce interactive OERs using a variety of software, including Sugar, Logo, and Smalltalk, and to rethink educational content based on research into child development and computers in education. Much more research and development will be needed in this direction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Globally, there is a need for OERs in several hundred subjects. Each country needs about 100 for 12 grades, usually divided into semesters, with five subjects taught at a time. Local content is needed for topics such as health, history, geography, literature, civics, and agriculture in more than 190 countries, some of which can share large portions. Materials for learning to speak, read, and write numerous languages are needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:OERlogo.svg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Public Domain OER logo from Wikimedia Commons&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==External Links==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Countries===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Bangladesh is the first country we know of to digitize a complete set of textbooks for grades 1-12. Resources listed below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Uruguay is seeking up to 1,000 digital learning resources in a Request For Proposals (RFP). The Sugar Labs [[Replacing Textbooks]] program wanted to offer some to them, but it turned out to be impractical.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* South Korea [http://www.koreatimes.co.kr/www/news/nation/2011/07/117_89881.html has announced] a plan to digitize all of its textbooks and to provide all students with computers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Sources and Directories===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In no particular order. Please add more if you find them. How do these &lt;br /&gt;
facilities compare with one another? &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.curriki.org/xwiki/bin/view/Main/Browse Curriki] free and open K-12 resources&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The [http://www.librarianchick.com/ Librarian Chick catalog] of free digital educational resources&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The [http://www.clrn.org/fdti/ California Free Digital Textbook Initiative] at high school level&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The [http://www.shuttleworthfoundation.org/projects/free-high-school-science-texts/ Shuttleworth Foundation&#039;s Free high school science texts]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://cnx.org/lenses/siyavula Connexions] free and open K-9 textbooks from the Shuttleworth Foundation&#039;s Siyavula project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://collegeopentextbooks.org/ College Open Textbooks]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.merlot.org/ MERLOT] (Multimedia Educational Resource for Learning and Online Teaching)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://wiki.waveplace.org/display/wp/Courseware Waveplace OERs for Haiti]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://collegeopentextbooks.ning.com/ College Open Textbooks Community]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.col.org/ Commonwealth of Learning]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://wikieducator.org/OERF:Home Open educational Resource Foundation]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://lemill.net/ LeMill] Web community for finding, authoring and sharing open educational resources in multiple languages&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.peacecorps.gov/wws/index.cfm Peace Corps World Wise Schools]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.ocwconsortium.org/en/aboutus/whatisocw OpenCourseWare Consortium] at university level&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://groups.diigo.com/group/math-links Math Links] - educators sharing interesting resources around the teaching and learning of mathematics&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.opentapestry.com/ Open Tapestry] 110,000 listings. Replaces OER Recommender.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.infokosh.bangladesh.gov.bd/ Bangladesh National e-Content Repository] in Bangla. Story: [http://www.priyo.com/tech/2011/02/28/pm-opens-e-content-repository-20905.html PM opens e-content repository]. 30,000 teachers, 148 government organisations and 50 local and foreign non-government organisations. 50,000 pages, planned to increase to 5,000,000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.ebook.gov.bd/ e-Book ::. ই-বুক জগতে স্বাগতম] in Bangla. Story: [http://www.priyo.com/tech/2011/04/24/pm-opens-online-version-textbo-24355.html PM opens online version of textbooks] Access to Information (A2I) Project of the PM’s Office and the National Curriculum and Textbook Board (NCTB) jointly transformed 33 primary level and 73 secondary level textbooks into e-books in collaboration with the UNDP.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.floridastandards.org/resources/ResourceHomepage.aspx Florida Standards - resources] - collection of links to reviewed OERs - some are commercially created, some are open&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://laptop.moodle.com.au/ OLPC Australia Moodle server]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.tele-task.de/de/archive/lecture/overview/5819/ Alan Kay videos on computers in education]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.openculture.com/free_textbooks 150 Free Textbooks] - list by subject, many are high school (Grades 9-12)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://docs.google.com/document/d/1jgEQ2GydgaExXNLPOYZn8WMJaFZoFp3CpTonMIrHO64/edit?pli=1 First-year Spanish resources, college level]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Commercial Publishers of OERs===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It&#039;s true. Free OERs plus paid services.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.ck12.org CK-12]] Primary and Secondary&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.flatworldknowledge.com/ Flatworld Knowledge] College&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Discussions===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.wsis-community.org/pg/groups/14358/open-educational-resources-oer/ UNESCO WSIS Platform of Communities Open Educational Resources (OER)]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://openeducation.zunia.org/post/open-educational-resources-oers/ World Bank Zunia OER discussion]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Other OER Logos===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.unesco.org/new/en/communication-and-information/access-to-knowledge/open-educational-resources/global-oer-logo/ UNESCO OER Logos] under Creative Commons-BY-SA licenses permitting modifications, including further translations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:UNESCO_OER_logo.svg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
UNESCO English OER logo&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Oer-rmx.svg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Remix of UNESCO English OER logo&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tony37</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Open_Educational_Resources&amp;diff=84261</id>
		<title>Open Educational Resources</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Open_Educational_Resources&amp;diff=84261"/>
		<updated>2012-11-24T08:09:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tony37: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Open Educational Resources (OERs) are digital replacements for textbooks available under some form of Free license, such as Creative Commons. There are many projects to create OERs, including the Sugar Labs [[Replacing Textbooks]] project, and projects of state and national governments, NGOs, professional associations, and individual contributors. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most OERs are PDFs of existing content, including printed textbooks, but there are also innovative projects to produce interactive OERs using a variety of software, including Sugar, Logo, and Smalltalk, and to rethink educational content based on research into child development and computers in education. Much more research and development will be needed in this direction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Globally, there is a need for OERs in several hundred subjects. Each country needs about 100 for 12 grades, usually divided into semesters, with five subjects taught at a time. Local content is needed for topics such as health, history, geography, literature, civics, and agriculture in more than 190 countries, some of which can share large portions. Materials for learning to speak, read, and write numerous languages are needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:OERlogo.svg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Public Domain OER logo from Wikimedia Commons&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==External Links==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Countries===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Bangladesh is the first country we know of to digitize a complete set of textbooks for grades 1-12. Resources listed below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Uruguay is seeking up to 1,000 digital learning resources in a Request For Proposals (RFP). The Sugar Labs [[Replacing Textbooks]] program wanted to offer some to them, but it turned out to be impractical.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* South Korea [http://www.koreatimes.co.kr/www/news/nation/2011/07/117_89881.html has announced] a plan to digitize all of its textbooks and to provide all students with computers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Sources and Directories===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In no particular order. Please add more if you find them. How do these &lt;br /&gt;
facilities compare with one another? &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.curriki.org/xwiki/bin/view/Main/Browse Curriki] free and open K-12 resources&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The [http://www.librarianchick.com/ Librarian Chick catalog] of free digital educational resources&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The [http://www.clrn.org/fdti/ California Free Digital Textbook Initiative] at high school level&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The [http://www.shuttleworthfoundation.org/projects/free-high-school-science-texts/ Shuttleworth Foundation&#039;s Free high school science texts]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://cnx.org/lenses/siyavula] free and open K-9 textbooks from the Shuttleworth Foundation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://collegeopentextbooks.org/ College Open Textbooks]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.merlot.org/ MERLOT] (Multimedia Educational Resource for Learning and Online Teaching)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://wiki.waveplace.org/display/wp/Courseware Waveplace OERs for Haiti]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://collegeopentextbooks.ning.com/ College Open Textbooks Community]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.col.org/ Commonwealth of Learning]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://wikieducator.org/OERF:Home Open educational Resource Foundation]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://lemill.net/ LeMill] Web community for finding, authoring and sharing open educational resources in multiple languages&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.peacecorps.gov/wws/index.cfm Peace Corps World Wise Schools]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.ocwconsortium.org/en/aboutus/whatisocw OpenCourseWare Consortium] at university level&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://groups.diigo.com/group/math-links Math Links] - educators sharing interesting resources around the teaching and learning of mathematics&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.opentapestry.com/ Open Tapestry] 110,000 listings. Replaces OER Recommender.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.infokosh.bangladesh.gov.bd/ Bangladesh National e-Content Repository] in Bangla. Story: [http://www.priyo.com/tech/2011/02/28/pm-opens-e-content-repository-20905.html PM opens e-content repository]. 30,000 teachers, 148 government organisations and 50 local and foreign non-government organisations. 50,000 pages, planned to increase to 5,000,000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.ebook.gov.bd/ e-Book ::. ই-বুক জগতে স্বাগতম] in Bangla. Story: [http://www.priyo.com/tech/2011/04/24/pm-opens-online-version-textbo-24355.html PM opens online version of textbooks] Access to Information (A2I) Project of the PM’s Office and the National Curriculum and Textbook Board (NCTB) jointly transformed 33 primary level and 73 secondary level textbooks into e-books in collaboration with the UNDP.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.floridastandards.org/resources/ResourceHomepage.aspx Florida Standards - resources] - collection of links to reviewed OERs - some are commercially created, some are open&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://laptop.moodle.com.au/ OLPC Australia Moodle server]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.tele-task.de/de/archive/lecture/overview/5819/ Alan Kay videos on computers in education]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.openculture.com/free_textbooks 150 Free Textbooks] - list by subject, many are high school (Grades 9-12)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://docs.google.com/document/d/1jgEQ2GydgaExXNLPOYZn8WMJaFZoFp3CpTonMIrHO64/edit?pli=1 First-year Spanish resources, college level]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Commercial Publishers of OERs===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It&#039;s true. Free OERs plus paid services.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.ck12.org CK-12]] Primary and Secondary&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.flatworldknowledge.com/ Flatworld Knowledge] College&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Discussions===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.wsis-community.org/pg/groups/14358/open-educational-resources-oer/ UNESCO WSIS Platform of Communities Open Educational Resources (OER)]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://openeducation.zunia.org/post/open-educational-resources-oers/ World Bank Zunia OER discussion]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Other OER Logos===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.unesco.org/new/en/communication-and-information/access-to-knowledge/open-educational-resources/global-oer-logo/ UNESCO OER Logos] under Creative Commons-BY-SA licenses permitting modifications, including further translations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:UNESCO_OER_logo.svg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
UNESCO English OER logo&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Oer-rmx.svg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Remix of UNESCO English OER logo&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tony37</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=File:Kls_demo_2.tar.bz2&amp;diff=83962</id>
		<title>File:Kls demo 2.tar.bz2</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=File:Kls_demo_2.tar.bz2&amp;diff=83962"/>
		<updated>2012-11-09T22:10:54Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tony37: Compressed file with sample Learn.activity content and scripts to set up Learn.activity in Sugar.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Compressed file with sample Learn.activity content and scripts to set up Learn.activity in Sugar.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tony37</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Activities/Learn&amp;diff=83961</id>
		<title>Activities/Learn</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Activities/Learn&amp;diff=83961"/>
		<updated>2012-11-09T21:44:29Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tony37: /* Prepare a removable drive */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;[[Category:Activities]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Activity-learn.png‎]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://activities.sugarlabs.org/en-US/sugar/addon/4430 Activity] | [ Source]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In a classroom, the Learn activity takes the role of the traditional textbook. In this analogy it is not the &lt;br /&gt;
textbook, it is a bound blank book. It includes an edit mode which enables a deployment to create the units and lessons (milestones and Learn activities) that make up the textbook.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Learn is a component of the Karma Learning System. When installed as a part of KLS, it is tightly integrated with the schoolserver. The primary design goal is to provide local copies of lessons as needed so that the student can use them when not connected to the school server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Version 61 enables evaluation of the activity independently of a schoolserver by using a USB removable drive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Prepare a removable drive===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The removable drive can be a usb flash drive or an SD card.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you run the Terminal activity and enter the command: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 ls /media&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
,you should see /media/XXX (where XXX is the label of your removable drive).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On 12.0.1 and later releases use /run/media/olpc/XXX.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make sure the label XXX does not have spaces. A label such as /media/kls is fine. A label such as &lt;br /&gt;
/media/Store N Go does not work.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Learn activity requires a recent (12+) version of Firefox. While Firefox is installed on versions of &lt;br /&gt;
Sugar with the Gnome desktop, the version doe not provide the needed capabilities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the Firefox website, download the compressed Firefox file, e.g. firefox-*.tar.bz2, where &#039;*&#039; is the &lt;br /&gt;
version number of the latest Firefox release, e.g. 16.0. Copy this file to the XXX drive. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From this website download these files and copy them to the XXX drive:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Kls_demo_2.tar.bz2]] is a 50mb file which contains the sample content kls and other files &lt;br /&gt;
for the Learn activity. Unpack it with the command:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
tar -xvjf Kls_demo_2.tar.bz2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This populates the drive with the scripts and the kls folder which contains the sample content. Optionally, delete the compressed file: Kls_demo_2.tar.bz2:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
rm -rf Kls_demo_2.tar.bz2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
xo-custom is a script which sets up the XO to use the Learn.activity. It installs Firefox from the tar file on the XXX drive. It  modifies two files in Sugar: sugar-launch and SimpleHTTPServer.py. Finally it sets up the XO to start the localhost daemon at boot. These changes do not affect normal operation of Sugar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Download learn-61.xo from the activities.sugarlabs.org site. Copy this bundle to the XXX drive.&lt;br /&gt;
Download showntell-12.xo from the Activities.Sugarlabs.org. Copy this bundle to the xxx drive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When this is done, the command: ls /media/XXX should show the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 firefox-*.tar.bz2&lt;br /&gt;
 kls&lt;br /&gt;
 Kls_demo_2.tar.bz2&lt;br /&gt;
 learn-61.xo&lt;br /&gt;
 localhost.service&lt;br /&gt;
 rc.local&lt;br /&gt;
 readme&lt;br /&gt;
 showntell-12.xo&lt;br /&gt;
 SimplerHTTPServer.py&lt;br /&gt;
 sugar-launch&lt;br /&gt;
 xo-custom&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Execute the install script===&lt;br /&gt;
Now mount the XXX drive on the XO.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Launch the Terminal activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the commands:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 cd /media/XXX or cd /run/media/olpc/XXX&lt;br /&gt;
 bash xo-custom&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon completion of these commands, the script shuts down the XO.&lt;br /&gt;
The XO is now ready. Restart to use Learn.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Firefox Preferences===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are some Firefox preferences that need to be set. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In View/Toolbars only Menu Bar and Navigation Toolbar should be checked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Navigate to: about:config. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set browser.tabs.onTop to false (A personal preference, normally students do not use Firefox tabs)&lt;br /&gt;
Set dom.allow_scripts_to_close_windows to true. (Enables quit button to work)&lt;br /&gt;
Set layout.css.dpi to 96. (better fit for XO screen resolution) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In &#039;Tabs&#039;, uncheck &#039;Always show the tab bar&#039;. Students do not normally use tabs in Firefox.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Customize the navigation toolbar. Add the full-screen icon. Choose small icons. In a deployment without internet, the Google icon can be removed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Students are advised to use fullscreen mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Firefox tries to refresh pages from a cache in memory. This can sometimes prevent changes in screens to be immediately visible. In this case, use alt+F5 to refresh the page from the source. Note: on the XO keyboard, &lt;br /&gt;
F5 is the smallest dot in the currently unused block of seven dots in the center of the top row.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Principal Screens==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Main Screen===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Learn-mainscreen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All Learn screens have a header and footer. The header is used for navigation (right side) and providing special functions (left). The center provides a title for the screen. The footer is used for navigation within a Learn activity and to provides special capabilities to that activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The main screen has no navigation on the header. The &#039;Staff&#039; button allows you to switch mode from staff (priviliged) mode to that of a student in fourth (p4), fifth (p5), or sixth grade (p6). The school icon in KLS opens a page showing the teacher a list of students and their current status. The Moodle button is a link to Moodel (http://schoolserver). The last button is the normal &#039;quit&#039; button. Learn is designed to be run in the Firefox fullscreen mode. This means that Firefox navigation is available by moving the cursor to the top of the screen, but that students do not normally have to deal with &#039;http&#039; addresses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The main screen shows the available subjects. In this case English, Mathematics, and Science (the three subjects supported on the laptops by the Ministry of Education in Rwanda). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The rocket icon is the Explore subject. In this version it contains examples of mini-lessons introducing the XO and Learn. It is intended to offer students access to mini-courses on a wide range of topics outside the classroom which they are encouraged to explore. When a student completes a mini-course, they receive a badge which is shown on their page (visible by clicking the school icon on their main page).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the context of KLS, the classroom refers to lessons aligned with the curriculum applicable to the deployment and not the physical location. Using Scratch in the physical classroom may still not be part of the curriculum, while doing an English activity at home is certainly &#039;in the classroom&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Laboratory===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:laboratory.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Laboratory subject is visible only to staff. It is set up to enable teachers (and the deployment) to build the units and lessons for the next term. In this case it is set up for Term 3 of 2012 which begins in September.&lt;br /&gt;
Note that the Laboratory anticipates the addition of French as a subject in Term 3. Note: also that subject menus provide a breadcrumb back to the main screen. Each of the twelve courses contains no milestones or activities.&lt;br /&gt;
Milestones and activities are added using the edit capability which is explained below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Course Menu===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:course_menu.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu is only visible to staff members. This is the English course menu. There are three courses: sje421, sje521, and sje621. While not required, it is convenient to use a code in naming courses. In this case, sj is the Saint Jacobs school in Kigali, Rwanda. The e is English. The 4 is fourth grade (p4). The 2 represents school year 2012. The 1 represents the first term.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In student mode, the students go directly from the main screen to the next screen - the milestone ladder. Within KLS, Learn downloads milestones automatically so that the student has on his laptop enough work for about three weeks before a connection to the school server is required. Staff may need to access any milestone in any course and so need this screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Milestone Ladder===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:milestone_menu.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This screen shows two milestones from the beginning of Term 1. Each milestone represents about one week&#039;s work &lt;br /&gt;
for the student. This version of the Learn.activity contains the first two milestones in each subject and course.&lt;br /&gt;
These milestones were created by the teachers at the Saint Jacobs school in Kigali. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Activity Ladder===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:activity_ladder.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A milestone or unit should provide the instruction needed for a student to achieve a specific learning objective.&lt;br /&gt;
The lessons (or activities or tasks) which provide this instruction are shown in the activity ladder. There are two modes of presentation, open and normal. In the open mode, the student has access to any activity. Normally, the students are directed to the day&#039;s activity by the teacher. In the normal mode, students work through the activities (and milestones) in sequence. In this mode, students work independently completing the work at their own pace. This means the teacher must be able to accommodate the fact that not all students are working on the same milestone or activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The word activity is heavily overloaded in the Sugar environment. Learn is a Sugar activity. The Activity Ladder shows Learn activities. Often lesson will be used to refer to a Learn activity to avoid confusion with Sugar activity. This is not a good solution, since a lesson plan may involve more than one Sugar activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Activity===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:activity_example.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is an example of an activity. The similarity to a textbook page is not accidental. In Rwanda, most students do not have paper textbooks and so the teacher copies the relevant material from the textbook to the blackboard. The students copy this information to their copy books. As a consequence, the teachers who were new to computers created lessons that look like what they put on the blackboard. Even this is helpful because it frees about half a period previously spent copying to and from the blackboard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The buttons (edit and up arrow) on the right of the header are used in creating lessons which will be explained below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Content==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This version of the Learn activity contains sample of the content which would be available in an installation of the Karma Learning System. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Class Subjects===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The English, Mathematics, and Science buttons show the first two milestones for Term 1 at École Saint Jacobs in courses for P4, P5, and P6. These milestones were created by the teachers at a workshop held in Nevember and December, 2011.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Laboratory subject is visible only to staff members. It is set up to enable creation of milestones for Ennglish, Mathematics, Science, and French for Term 3 which begins in September, 2012.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Explore===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:explore_subjects.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The sample coontent in the Explore subject is organized into six courses:&lt;br /&gt;
#examples&lt;br /&gt;
#getstarted&lt;br /&gt;
#learn&lt;br /&gt;
#lesson&lt;br /&gt;
#quiz&lt;br /&gt;
#library&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Examples====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The examples course has three milestones:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Basic Lessons=====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This milestone illustrates the capabilities of basic lessons. These are five activities (or lessons) &lt;br /&gt;
in this milestone:&lt;br /&gt;
#text only (lesson in French from Haiti)&lt;br /&gt;
#text plus image (lesson from École Shalom in Haiti)&lt;br /&gt;
#multi-screen lesson (lesson from Siyavula)&lt;br /&gt;
#text + image with audio (lesson from Rwanda Curriculum Workshop 2010).&lt;br /&gt;
#text with interactive quiz (taken from a past P6 leaving exam in Haiti (French)).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Sugar Activities====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The second milestone shows some examples of using a Sugar activity in a lesson. The Learn activity stores the lesson content in a bundle in the Journal and then resumes the activity from that Journal object. To return to the Learn activity, quit the &#039;launched&#039; activity.&lt;br /&gt;
#ShowNTell - This activity launches ShowNTell with a slide show illustrating how to use Turtle Blocks to draw Vertical, Horizontal, and Oblique lines. This is an example of a &#039;Step-by-Step&#039;. This concept is explained in more detail below.&lt;br /&gt;
#Quiz - This activity launches the Quiz activity with a quiz on body parts (in French). Look for version 6 on activities.sugarlabs.org which will support this example. The current version 5 does not work.&lt;br /&gt;
#Memorize - This activity launches the Memorize activity with a bundle on Roman Numerals.&lt;br /&gt;
#Turtle Blocks (Turtle Art) - This activity launches Turtle Blocks in support of the first example.&lt;br /&gt;
#Wordsearch - This example launches the Wordsearch activity with a specific wordlist. This requires a modification to Wordsearch to be able to use a bundle when resumed from the Journal. This example does not work with Version 1 (It launches Wordsearch but the word list is the default sample).&lt;br /&gt;
#British Council - This activity does not launch a Sugar activity. It does show an example of having students read a short story with audio. This is one of a group of thirty-four stories which can be used in a deployment by arrangement with the British Council. These stories have one or more separate exercises in reading comprehension or vocabulary development which can also be used with Learn by arrangement with the British Council.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Khan Academy====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This milestone has two activities:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#video - This activity plays the Basic Addition video by launching the Jukebox activity. Any Khan Academy video can be used with the Learn activity, currently after conversion to .ogv format. At École Saint Jacobs, the Mathematics subject in Term 2 has about a dozen of these videos covering basic arithmetic topics.&lt;br /&gt;
#exercises - Many Khan Academy videos are accompanied by exercises. This example runs the exercise associated with the Basic Addition video. This exercise is in a format which is no longer used on the Khan Academy site. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Get Started===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The getstarted course has four milestones. Each milestone is a section from the 0.82 version of the Help activity (http://laptop.org/8.2.0/manual/). This illustrates how documentation can be made into Learn activities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Learn===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The learn course has three milestones. The first milestone describes the use of the Gnome desktop which may be installed on an XO in recent builds of the software. The next two milestones describe building courses and milestones. Much of this material is not applicable to this version of Learn, but does illustrate how courses can be constructed. These milestones were created using the tools in Learn.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Lesson===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The lesson course has a single milestone with a single activity. This activity launches the ShowNTell activity to show a step-by-step method to create a new activity. This step-by-step is incomplete but illustrates the procedure. When using Learn to launch Sugar activities,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Quiz===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The quiz course has three milestones which describe how to build a question bank using Moodle and how to create quiz activities using these questions. This procedure works, but seems too complex for routine use. It is likely that an alternative using a Django will be needed to simplify this process and make it more usable. The concept of an item or question bank is very important in the context of schools which are heavily involved in preparing students for national examinations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Library===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The library course describes how to use the Library activity to access the school&#039;s digital library. Since this &lt;br /&gt;
library is maintained on the schoos server, this capability is only available in a deployment. The three activities are examples of using ShowNTell to present a &#039;Step-by-Step&#039; slide show.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Student View==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Main Screen===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Student_main.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the main screen as seen by a student. Notice that the Laboratory subject is not visible. Also the school button in the top right of the header has been replaced by an xo symbol. This button in a deployment will show the student a record of his achievements and act as a portfolio in the context of the Learn activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Milestone Ladder===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Student_milestone_ladder.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the student view, a click on a classroom subject in the main screen shows the milestone ladder. At the start of the term, the first milestone has a yellow cap showing that this is the current milestone. A completed milestone has a green cap. Notice the second milestone has a blue cap. The Learn activity automatically downloads one or more milestones for the student automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The deployment sets a quota and a minimum number of milestones. When a milestone is completed, if the next milestone and those after it that are shown with a blue cap are less than the miniumum, the next milestone in the ladder is loaded. If this exceeds the quota, the first milestone already completed is removed from the XO (and the cap shows as light green (chartreuse). This system allows automatic management of the XO store. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Activity Ladder===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Student_activity_ladder.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activity ladder works in a similar way. A completed activity is shown with a green flag. The current activity is shown with a yellow flag. The activities to be done are shown in blue. The Learn activity downloads milestones and so all activities in the current milestone are on the XO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Activity===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Student_activity.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activity view is unchanged; however, notice that the on the right-side of the header, the student does not have an edit button. Instead the student has a check mark button. WHen the student finishes an activity, he or she clicks on this button to continue to the next activity. This button runs a script which records the results from the activity in the Journal (an object shown with the Learn icon and a title of &#039;Attempt&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In a deployment, the Journal is backed up to the school server. These objects are stored in a log folder and the information is later moved to a database. It is then made available to teachers and to the student when requested.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Independent Study===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Many teachers organize their classes so that all students are working on the same lesson. In these classrooms, &lt;br /&gt;
the Learn activities are worked on in class for a specific period of time (e.g. for 20 minutes in a 45 minute period). Learn supports a course being designated for independent study mode (as described above), but this is optional. When a course is not in the independent study mode, the milestone and activity ladders work exactly as they do in the staff mode. However, the activity screen still shows a check mark button and the results of the activity can be recorded in the Journal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Managing Educational Content==&lt;br /&gt;
Within the Karma Learning System, the Learn activity delivers educational content stored on the school server. From one academic year to the next, this content needs to be updated based on the experience of the teachers in using the content, changes in the curriculum, and new resources that become available. Many schools divide the academic year into semesters or terms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One strategy is to keep the current terms content in the main menu. Content from previous years or terms are kept as Resouces on the school server but not linked to the learning system. Content for the next term can be developed in a Laboratory subject visible only to the staff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The reality is that in most deployments, the first task will be to develop a baseline of content sufficient for the academic year. This may take some years to accomplish. Once a baseline is reached, the Laboratory can be initialized from the Resources from previous terms. The focus of the staff will be on improving the courses and incorporating new material. Until that time, the focus will be on creating lessons based on turning paper lesson plans into computer-based lessons.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Learn activity supports this process at the milestone level. Managing subjects and courses requires the efforts of an adminstrator with technical knowledge. This intervention is very important to manage the rotation of content between terms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This document assumes that there ia a Laboratory subject and that the courses there are the ones needed in the next academic period.&lt;br /&gt;
===Creating Milestones===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:empty_course.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the fourth grade English course for term 3 in the Laboratory subject (sje423).&lt;br /&gt;
The course is empty, there are no milestones in the ladder. A typical course for one term will have&lt;br /&gt;
about ten milestones. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding the Milestone====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The teacher for this course can create a new milestone by clicking on the edit button to the right of &lt;br /&gt;
the header.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Adding_a_milestone_1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The teacher clicked on the + button to add a milestone. The new milestone shows in the list. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding a label and description====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The teacher clicked on the edit button for this milestone. The first &lt;br /&gt;
entry allows the creation of a label. It is in numerical sequence by default. However, the teacher &lt;br /&gt;
entered 3/9 to show that the milestone will be used in week one of the term which &lt;br /&gt;
starts on the third of September. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The second entry contains the description of &lt;br /&gt;
the milestone that shows up on the milestone ladder when the cursor hovers over the milestone icon.&lt;br /&gt;
The teacher clicks on the third entry (&#039;done&#039;) to complete the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Done====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Adding_a_milestone_2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the teacher is satisfied, he or she clicks on the green check mark to commit the changes. A click on the X cancels the changes. Note that this screen can also be used to delete a milestone and to rearrange the sequence of milestones (when there are more than one).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Creating Activities===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Course_with_milestone.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now the empty course has a milestone. Note the cap of the milestone is blue since the milestone is on the XO.&lt;br /&gt;
Next, the teacher clicks on the milestone. Naturally, this reveals an empty milestone with no activities on &lt;br /&gt;
the activity ladder. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:empty_activity_ladder.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A typical milestone has sufficient activities so that a typical student will take a week to &lt;br /&gt;
complete it. If a teacher equates an activity to a lesson requiring one class period to complete, the number of activities is likely to be four to five. If the teacher expects some or most of the activities to be completed outside of class, this number can double. The guiding concept is that completing a milestone should represent achievement of an important learning objective. The number and nature of the activities should be proportional so that the student does not become discouraged. A milestone with forty activities would certainly be daunting!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:new_activity_1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create an activity, as before, the teacher clicks on the edit button in the header. The difference is that &lt;br /&gt;
the teacher has a number of choices in the type of activity. In this case, the teacher selects t00 for a basic &lt;br /&gt;
activity. The other options will be described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:new_activity_2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In a similar way, the teacher assigns a label and description to the activity. In this case, the teacher has &lt;br /&gt;
labeled the activity as &#039;I&#039; to show the type of activity, &#039;introduction&#039;.  As before when the teacher is satisfied, he or she clicks on the green check mark to commit the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Creating Basic Activities===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:activity_5.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The teacher clicks on the activity. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:activity_6.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the default activity created by the Learn activity. The teacher clicks on the edit button to &lt;br /&gt;
enter the edit mode [ckeditor].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Editor===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:editor_1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default lesson is loaded into the editor. The buttons on the header to the right are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#save - click on this button to save changes&lt;br /&gt;
#audio - add an audio track to the lesson - explained below&lt;br /&gt;
#image - add an image to the lesson - explained below&lt;br /&gt;
#quit - quit activity, not normally used in this context&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The arrow to the left of the header leaves the edit mode and returns to the activity. If the user &lt;br /&gt;
returns to the activity before clicking on the save button, changes will be lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:editor_4.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The editor is WYSIWYG (What you see is what you get). However, the actual appearance of the lesson will &lt;br /&gt;
differ because of the different style sheets applied. In addition, images are not shown in edit mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The editor has a toolbar with icons. Most of these icons are common to most editors. There are three &lt;br /&gt;
rows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First row:&lt;br /&gt;
*Source - switches the view from WYSIWYG to the html view.  &lt;br /&gt;
*Cut, copy, and paste are the first three icons in the second block.&lt;br /&gt;
*The rounded arrows in the next block are for &#039;undo&#039; and &#039;do&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
*The two in the third block are  &#039;find&#039; and &#039;find and replace&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The remaining icons in this row are not useful in this context.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Second row:&lt;br /&gt;
*The first block formats text: bold, italic, underline, and strike-through. The next two set the superscript and &lt;br /&gt;
subscript modes, respectively. &lt;br /&gt;
*The icons in the second block set numbered or bullet list modes, increase or decrease indent. Skipping two icons,&lt;br /&gt;
there are icons to control alignment: left, center, right, and justify.&lt;br /&gt;
*The fourth icon in the last block inserts a horizontal rule. This is used to mark the boundary between screens in a multiple-screen lesson. The next two insert special characters such as a smiley or a division symbol. The last two are not useful in this context.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Third row:&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;styles&#039; selects a style to use, the ones available are not very useful in this context.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;Format&#039; defaults to normal text. However, use this list to select various style headers. For example, &lt;br /&gt;
the lesson title is normally Heading 1. Sub-title may be Heading 2 and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;Font&#039; allows selection of a font to use. Changing font is not often needed in this context.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;Size&#039; allows a change in the font size. To change the font size, you must first &#039;select&#039; the text to &lt;br /&gt;
apply the change to. Move the cursor to the left of the first character to be changed. Hold the left &lt;br /&gt;
mouse button down while moving the cursor along the line of text. The background of the text will turn dark to &lt;br /&gt;
show that the text is selected. Release the left mouse key when the correct text is selected. Now change the&lt;br /&gt;
font-size.&lt;br /&gt;
*The next two icons allow change to the text color and to the background color respectively. This works the &lt;br /&gt;
same way as &#039;font-size&#039;, you select the text and then select a color. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:editor_2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This image shows the beginning of the lesson. The title could be centered by using the center icon on the toolbar. Select the title as described above and click on the center-alignment icon. The A section title &lt;br /&gt;
could be a Heading 2. Select the text (including the A.) and click on the second list in the bottom row. A &lt;br /&gt;
list of formats appears, click on Heading 2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:editor_3.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The teacher has clicked on the &#039;save&#039; icon (an image of a &#039;floppy drive&#039;) and then clicked on the right arrow &lt;br /&gt;
to return to the activity. The activity now shows the text entered in the editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Adding Images===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:image_1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking on the camera icon in the header will (after some moments) show this screen. It shows thumbnails of all &lt;br /&gt;
of the images available to be added to the lesson. In this case, these are the screen shots I used in &lt;br /&gt;
preparing this page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The images are those found in the Journal plus any images in /home/olpc/Documents. In recent builds of Sugar, &lt;br /&gt;
this folder is visible in the Journal and acts like a mounted usb drive. This means that images obtained from &lt;br /&gt;
the internet, a digital camera or a mobile phone can be copied to a usb drive. When this drive is mounted, it will appear at the bottom of the Journal screen along with an icon for the /home/olpc/Downloads folder. By selecting the usb drive (or SD card) containing the images, the relevant ones can be dragged to the folder. Alternatively, the images can be dragged to the Journal. In either case, a thumbnail will appear on this screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:image_2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this case, the middle image in the top row was selected (click on the thumbnail). This screen allows the teacher to specify the size and location of the image. The width of 600 represents one-half of the screen. The height of 450 gives a 4:3 aspect ratio.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The next entry specifies the screen on which the image will appear. In single-screen lessons this is, of course, 1.&lt;br /&gt;
In multi-screen lessons, the teacher might want a different image on each screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An entry of 1L specifies that the image should be at the top left of the screen. An entry of 1R specifies the right side. An entry of 1 specifies the image should be centered. When the image is on the left, text will appear to its right. If right is specified, text will appear to the left. When an image is centered, text will begin &lt;br /&gt;
below the image.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The teacher clicks on the OK entry to commit the change.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:image_3.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This shows the image in the lesson. Since 1L was entered, the image is on the left with text to the right.&lt;br /&gt;
Note: images currently can only be located at the top of a screen and only one image can be on each screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Adding Audio Clips===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clipping on the microphone adds an audio clip to the lesson. It works the same way as the image icon &lt;br /&gt;
except that the user only needs to click on the correct audio clip since no location or size information is &lt;br /&gt;
needed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A lesson with an audio clip shows a play button in the left-side of the footer. It is a toggle so that &lt;br /&gt;
when the audio is playing it shows a &#039;pause&#039; symbol. The audio continues if play is pressed after a pause.&lt;br /&gt;
To restart the audio, it is necessary to go back to the activity ladder and select the activity again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Adding Questions===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An interactive quiz can easily be added to any lesson/activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:quiz_in_editor.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The quiz is entered in edit mode using a special format developed by Moodle called &#039;gift&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The questions are entered between the following lines:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
/*Quiz&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     questions go here&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
/* &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The word Quiz (capitol Q) must be entered after /* with no spaces. The &#039;*/&#039; is on a separate line. The questions are entered between these two lines separated by a blank line. Here are some example questions:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
/*Quiz &lt;br /&gt;
The Learn activity is part of the Karma Learning System.{T}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The OLPC laptop is often referred to by two letters. What are they? {=XO =xo}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There {=are} many people world-wide supporting the OLPC project. [is are]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One of these organizations is not related to the others. Which one? {=CIA ~OLPC ~Sugarlabs ~Red Hat}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*/ &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The first question is True-False. Answers are shown between braces &#039;{ }&#039;. The answer to a True-False question may be any of T, t, True, true, F, f, False, false. Note that, unlike the other answers, an equal sign &#039;=&#039; is not needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The second question is short answer. Acceptable answers (one or more) are given between braces. In this case, XO and xo will be accepted as correct. Xo and xO would be considered incorrect.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The third question is a cloze. It is identical to the short answer except the braces are within the text. The student will see a blank (underlines) where the braces are entered along with a place to enter the answer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The fourth question is multiple-choice. The choices are given between braces. The correct answer is indicated by the equal sign &#039;=&#039;. The incorrect choices (distractors) are indicated by the tilde sign &#039;~&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The quiz is created when the lesson is saved. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:quiz question.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the student opens the lesson, there will be a &#039;Start&#039; button shown on the bottom right of the screen. The screen gives information (e.g. a diagram) needed to answer the questions and/or instructions on answering the questions (e.g. round your answer to two decimal places).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the student presses the Start button, he is given the questions one at a time in the order they appear in the lesson (not randomized).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This capability is based on the jquizme library.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using Karma Templates===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating an activity, the teacher can choose among a menu of activity types from t00 - a basic activity &lt;br /&gt;
to t20.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:new_activity_1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activity types are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#t00 Basic - a normal textbook-style lesson with optional images, audio, or quiz components.&lt;br /&gt;
#t01 Adding up to 10 - a Karma game which currently has no options for customization.&lt;br /&gt;
#t02 Crossword - a crossword puzzle to find a hidden word. A teacher can create a custom crossword puzzle.&lt;br /&gt;
#t03 Hangman - a traditional hangman. A teacher can provide the wordlist.&lt;br /&gt;
$t04 Identification - not currently usable&lt;br /&gt;
#t05 Mad-libs - A teacher can provide the clues and story.&lt;br /&gt;
#t06 Matching - a Karma implementation of Concentration. The teacher can provide the words and images.&lt;br /&gt;
#t07 Matching Pairs - a matching activity. The teacher can provide the list of matching words.&lt;br /&gt;
#t08 Multiple-choice sentence - multiple choices for words in the sentence (e.g. is/are). The teacher can supply the word choices and sentences.&lt;br /&gt;
#t09 Puzzle - rearrange pieces of a picture in alphabetical or numerical order to see the completed picture. The teacher can supply images.&lt;br /&gt;
#t10 Quick Arithmetic - student is challenged to provide sums mentally. Currently customizing is not supported.&lt;br /&gt;
#t11 Scrambled sentences - not operational&lt;br /&gt;
#t14 Vocabulary - not operational&lt;br /&gt;
#t15 Vocabulary with game - not operational&lt;br /&gt;
#t16 What is this? - matching images against words. The teacher can supply words and images (images not automated).&lt;br /&gt;
#t17 Anagram - rearrange letters to form a word naming an image. Teacher can supply words and images (images not automated).&lt;br /&gt;
#t18 Maths introduction - not operational&lt;br /&gt;
#t19 Maths guided practice - not operational&lt;br /&gt;
#t20 Maths evaluation - not operational&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The best way to see how these activity types work is to go to the Laboratory and in any course add a milestone.&lt;br /&gt;
Then add activities selecting the various types. The result is an example of the activity type. By entering &lt;br /&gt;
the editmode, the source.txt file defining that activity is shown. It can be edited to make a custom version &lt;br /&gt;
that fits the milestone. For example, a crossword could be constructed using some words from the week&#039;s vocabulary list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of these templates were created by Peter Gijsels in a visit to Rwanda in 2011. They illustrate how &lt;br /&gt;
activities can be created using the Karma library and html5 web techniques (css, javascript, jquery). It is intended that this library be expanded to include more useful educational activity types.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using Sugar Activities===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is currently no automated support for creating these lessons. It requires some command-line knowledge. &lt;br /&gt;
When a lesson is opened in the edit mode, the file being edited is &#039;source.txt&#039;. The first line of this file &lt;br /&gt;
contains a directive to launch a specific Sugar activity, e.g.,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;!--B:TurtleArt,lines_lesson.ta,application/x-turtle-art--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For technical reasons, this line appears in the edit mode as:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 /*B:TurtleArt,lines_lesson.ta,application/x-turtle-art*/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The source.txt file uses html5 markup in which &amp;lt;!-- and --&amp;gt; enclose a comment. As a result, this line is &lt;br /&gt;
not visible in the editor. By converting the markup to /* */, the user can create and edit this line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The B: is required to signal this comment contains a directive. There are three parts to the directive separated by commas:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#name of the Sugar activity. This is the same as the name in /home/olpc/Activities minus the activity. &lt;br /&gt;
So Turtle Art (Blocks) appears as /home/olpc/Activities/TurtleArt.activity. &lt;br /&gt;
#file name of the activity bundle (lines_lesson.ta) including the file extension. This bundle must be in &lt;br /&gt;
the folder for this lesson in Learn. &lt;br /&gt;
#mime_type of the bundle. The mime_type of a bundle is given in /home/olpc/Activities/TurtleArt.activity/activity/activity.info. For &#039;some.activity&#039;, look in /home/olpc/Activities/some.activity/activity/activity.info.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A Sugar activity can be launched as a new start by:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
/*B:some.activity*/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Learn.activity creates a Journal object with the bundle file as data. It then resumes the activity from this Journal object.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that not all activities are able to resume from a Journal object and not all activities support processing data files. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to quit the launched activity when finished to return to the Learn activity. Sugar treats the launched activity as a window opened by Learn and so gets confused if the user tries to return to Learn via the frame.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Integration in the Karma Learning System==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When Learn is used with a school server as part of the Karma Learning System, the subjects, courses, milestones, and activities are stored on the school server. Students are assigned laptops by the school so that KLS knows the grade level of each student (and the staff status of members of the staff). Learn on the first launch downloads the content needed to start for students based on their grade. Staff see a milestone ladder where the cap may be blue as seen in the screenshots above or a light blue (cyan). Milestones with a cyan cap are not downloaded to the laptop. A click on the milestones causes the milestone to be downloaded. In this way teachers can look at and edit any activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As part of KLS, Learn stores the results of each activity in the Journal. When the laptop connects with the schoolserver, a backup script uploads new journal entries to the school server. Journal entries which produced documents are uploaded to the Journal. Other entries are uploaded to the log. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In KLS, the Journal is kept on the school server. The laptop has some, but not all of the entries. This offers three advantages: (1) if storage becomes full on the laptop, deleting Journal entries only deletes the local copy. The Journal item is still available when needed, (2) if a laptop becomes unusable, the student can begin working with a different one retaining full access to his Journal from the previous laptop, and (3) there are no &#039;empty&#039; Journal entries with titles of xyz.activity. The user must supply a meaningful name for each Journal entry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
KLS provides the teacher with access to a class list. For each student, the list shows the current status of that student in each course (the milestone and activity last completed). The teacher can &#039;drill down&#039; by clicking on the status - to see a complete list of milestones and activities completed. Click on a milestone and activity shows the number of attempts, total time spent, the result, and any other details such as questions and answers to quizzes. This information is derived from the students Journal and log stored on the school server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As a part of KLS, Learn provides download of milestones from the school server. Milestones and activities modified by the teacher may be uploaded to the school server and, thus, become available to students. If the student has already downloaded a milestone, he or she won&#039;t see the change. A reset button is provided on the header of the activity ladder for the milestone which will delete the local copy and download the updated copy.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tony37</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Activities/Learn&amp;diff=83960</id>
		<title>Activities/Learn</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Activities/Learn&amp;diff=83960"/>
		<updated>2012-11-09T21:36:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tony37: /* Prepare a removable drive */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;[[Category:Activities]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Activity-learn.png‎]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://activities.sugarlabs.org/en-US/sugar/addon/4430 Activity] | [ Source]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In a classroom, the Learn activity takes the role of the traditional textbook. In this analogy it is not the &lt;br /&gt;
textbook, it is a bound blank book. It includes an edit mode which enables a deployment to create the units and lessons (milestones and Learn activities) that make up the textbook.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Learn is a component of the Karma Learning System. When installed as a part of KLS, it is tightly integrated with the schoolserver. The primary design goal is to provide local copies of lessons as needed so that the student can use them when not connected to the school server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Version 61 enables evaluation of the activity independently of a schoolserver by using a USB removable drive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Prepare a removable drive===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The removable drive can be a usb flash drive or an SD card.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you run the Terminal activity and enter the command: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 ls /media&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
,you should see /media/XXX (where XXX is the label of your removable drive).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On 12.0.1 and later releases use /run/media/olpc/XXX.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make sure the label XXX does not have spaces. A label such as /media/kls is fine. A label such as &lt;br /&gt;
/media/Store N Go does not work.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Learn activity requires a recent (12+) version of Firefox. While Firefox is installed on versions of &lt;br /&gt;
Sugar with the Gnome desktop, the version doe not provide the needed capabilities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the Firefox website, download the compressed Firefox file, e.g. firefox-*.tar.bz2, where &#039;*&#039; is the &lt;br /&gt;
version number of the latest Firefox release, e.g. 16.0. Copy this file to the XXX drive. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From this website download these files and copy them to the XXX drive:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Kls_demo_2.tar.bz2]] is a 50mb file which contains the sample content kls and other files &lt;br /&gt;
for the Learn activity. Unpack it with the command:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
tar -xvjf Kls_demo_2.tar.bz2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There will now be a folder: kls. This folder contains a sample of the content which would normally be found on the school server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:xo-custom]] is a script which installs Learn from the bundle. It installs Firefox from the tar file on the XXX drive. It  modifies two files in Sugar: sugar-launch and SimpleHTTPServer.py. These changes have no effect on &lt;br /&gt;
normal Sugar use. Finally it sets up the XO to start the localhost daemon at boot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Download learn-61.xo from the activities.sugarlabs.org site. Copy this bundle to the XXX drive.&lt;br /&gt;
Download showntell-12.xo from the Activities.Sugarlabs.org. Copy this bundle to the xxx drive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When this is done, the command: ls /media/XXX should show the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 firefox-*.tar.bz2&lt;br /&gt;
 kls&lt;br /&gt;
 Kls_demo_2.tar.bz2&lt;br /&gt;
 learn-61.xo&lt;br /&gt;
 localhost.service&lt;br /&gt;
 rc.local&lt;br /&gt;
 readme&lt;br /&gt;
 showntell-12.xo&lt;br /&gt;
 SimplerHTTPServer.py&lt;br /&gt;
 sugar-launch&lt;br /&gt;
 xo-custom&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Execute the install script===&lt;br /&gt;
Now mount the XXX drive on the XO.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Launch the Terminal activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the commands:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 cd /media/XXX or cd /run/media/olpc/XXX&lt;br /&gt;
 bash xo-custom&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon completion of these commands, the script shuts down the XO.&lt;br /&gt;
The XO is now ready. Restart to use Learn.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Firefox Preferences===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are some Firefox preferences that need to be set. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In View/Toolbars only Menu Bar and Navigation Toolbar should be checked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Navigate to: about:config. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set browser.tabs.onTop to false (A personal preference, normally students do not use Firefox tabs)&lt;br /&gt;
Set dom.allow_scripts_to_close_windows to true. (Enables quit button to work)&lt;br /&gt;
Set layout.css.dpi to 96. (better fit for XO screen resolution) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In &#039;Tabs&#039;, uncheck &#039;Always show the tab bar&#039;. Students do not normally use tabs in Firefox.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Customize the navigation toolbar. Add the full-screen icon. Choose small icons. In a deployment without internet, the Google icon can be removed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Students are advised to use fullscreen mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Firefox tries to refresh pages from a cache in memory. This can sometimes prevent changes in screens to be immediately visible. In this case, use alt+F5 to refresh the page from the source. Note: on the XO keyboard, &lt;br /&gt;
F5 is the smallest dot in the currently unused block of seven dots in the center of the top row.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Principal Screens==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Main Screen===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Learn-mainscreen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All Learn screens have a header and footer. The header is used for navigation (right side) and providing special functions (left). The center provides a title for the screen. The footer is used for navigation within a Learn activity and to provides special capabilities to that activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The main screen has no navigation on the header. The &#039;Staff&#039; button allows you to switch mode from staff (priviliged) mode to that of a student in fourth (p4), fifth (p5), or sixth grade (p6). The school icon in KLS opens a page showing the teacher a list of students and their current status. The Moodle button is a link to Moodel (http://schoolserver). The last button is the normal &#039;quit&#039; button. Learn is designed to be run in the Firefox fullscreen mode. This means that Firefox navigation is available by moving the cursor to the top of the screen, but that students do not normally have to deal with &#039;http&#039; addresses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The main screen shows the available subjects. In this case English, Mathematics, and Science (the three subjects supported on the laptops by the Ministry of Education in Rwanda). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The rocket icon is the Explore subject. In this version it contains examples of mini-lessons introducing the XO and Learn. It is intended to offer students access to mini-courses on a wide range of topics outside the classroom which they are encouraged to explore. When a student completes a mini-course, they receive a badge which is shown on their page (visible by clicking the school icon on their main page).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the context of KLS, the classroom refers to lessons aligned with the curriculum applicable to the deployment and not the physical location. Using Scratch in the physical classroom may still not be part of the curriculum, while doing an English activity at home is certainly &#039;in the classroom&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Laboratory===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:laboratory.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Laboratory subject is visible only to staff. It is set up to enable teachers (and the deployment) to build the units and lessons for the next term. In this case it is set up for Term 3 of 2012 which begins in September.&lt;br /&gt;
Note that the Laboratory anticipates the addition of French as a subject in Term 3. Note: also that subject menus provide a breadcrumb back to the main screen. Each of the twelve courses contains no milestones or activities.&lt;br /&gt;
Milestones and activities are added using the edit capability which is explained below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Course Menu===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:course_menu.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu is only visible to staff members. This is the English course menu. There are three courses: sje421, sje521, and sje621. While not required, it is convenient to use a code in naming courses. In this case, sj is the Saint Jacobs school in Kigali, Rwanda. The e is English. The 4 is fourth grade (p4). The 2 represents school year 2012. The 1 represents the first term.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In student mode, the students go directly from the main screen to the next screen - the milestone ladder. Within KLS, Learn downloads milestones automatically so that the student has on his laptop enough work for about three weeks before a connection to the school server is required. Staff may need to access any milestone in any course and so need this screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Milestone Ladder===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:milestone_menu.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This screen shows two milestones from the beginning of Term 1. Each milestone represents about one week&#039;s work &lt;br /&gt;
for the student. This version of the Learn.activity contains the first two milestones in each subject and course.&lt;br /&gt;
These milestones were created by the teachers at the Saint Jacobs school in Kigali. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Activity Ladder===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:activity_ladder.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A milestone or unit should provide the instruction needed for a student to achieve a specific learning objective.&lt;br /&gt;
The lessons (or activities or tasks) which provide this instruction are shown in the activity ladder. There are two modes of presentation, open and normal. In the open mode, the student has access to any activity. Normally, the students are directed to the day&#039;s activity by the teacher. In the normal mode, students work through the activities (and milestones) in sequence. In this mode, students work independently completing the work at their own pace. This means the teacher must be able to accommodate the fact that not all students are working on the same milestone or activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The word activity is heavily overloaded in the Sugar environment. Learn is a Sugar activity. The Activity Ladder shows Learn activities. Often lesson will be used to refer to a Learn activity to avoid confusion with Sugar activity. This is not a good solution, since a lesson plan may involve more than one Sugar activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Activity===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:activity_example.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is an example of an activity. The similarity to a textbook page is not accidental. In Rwanda, most students do not have paper textbooks and so the teacher copies the relevant material from the textbook to the blackboard. The students copy this information to their copy books. As a consequence, the teachers who were new to computers created lessons that look like what they put on the blackboard. Even this is helpful because it frees about half a period previously spent copying to and from the blackboard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The buttons (edit and up arrow) on the right of the header are used in creating lessons which will be explained below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Content==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This version of the Learn activity contains sample of the content which would be available in an installation of the Karma Learning System. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Class Subjects===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The English, Mathematics, and Science buttons show the first two milestones for Term 1 at École Saint Jacobs in courses for P4, P5, and P6. These milestones were created by the teachers at a workshop held in Nevember and December, 2011.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Laboratory subject is visible only to staff members. It is set up to enable creation of milestones for Ennglish, Mathematics, Science, and French for Term 3 which begins in September, 2012.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Explore===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:explore_subjects.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The sample coontent in the Explore subject is organized into six courses:&lt;br /&gt;
#examples&lt;br /&gt;
#getstarted&lt;br /&gt;
#learn&lt;br /&gt;
#lesson&lt;br /&gt;
#quiz&lt;br /&gt;
#library&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Examples====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The examples course has three milestones:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Basic Lessons=====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This milestone illustrates the capabilities of basic lessons. These are five activities (or lessons) &lt;br /&gt;
in this milestone:&lt;br /&gt;
#text only (lesson in French from Haiti)&lt;br /&gt;
#text plus image (lesson from École Shalom in Haiti)&lt;br /&gt;
#multi-screen lesson (lesson from Siyavula)&lt;br /&gt;
#text + image with audio (lesson from Rwanda Curriculum Workshop 2010).&lt;br /&gt;
#text with interactive quiz (taken from a past P6 leaving exam in Haiti (French)).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Sugar Activities====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The second milestone shows some examples of using a Sugar activity in a lesson. The Learn activity stores the lesson content in a bundle in the Journal and then resumes the activity from that Journal object. To return to the Learn activity, quit the &#039;launched&#039; activity.&lt;br /&gt;
#ShowNTell - This activity launches ShowNTell with a slide show illustrating how to use Turtle Blocks to draw Vertical, Horizontal, and Oblique lines. This is an example of a &#039;Step-by-Step&#039;. This concept is explained in more detail below.&lt;br /&gt;
#Quiz - This activity launches the Quiz activity with a quiz on body parts (in French). Look for version 6 on activities.sugarlabs.org which will support this example. The current version 5 does not work.&lt;br /&gt;
#Memorize - This activity launches the Memorize activity with a bundle on Roman Numerals.&lt;br /&gt;
#Turtle Blocks (Turtle Art) - This activity launches Turtle Blocks in support of the first example.&lt;br /&gt;
#Wordsearch - This example launches the Wordsearch activity with a specific wordlist. This requires a modification to Wordsearch to be able to use a bundle when resumed from the Journal. This example does not work with Version 1 (It launches Wordsearch but the word list is the default sample).&lt;br /&gt;
#British Council - This activity does not launch a Sugar activity. It does show an example of having students read a short story with audio. This is one of a group of thirty-four stories which can be used in a deployment by arrangement with the British Council. These stories have one or more separate exercises in reading comprehension or vocabulary development which can also be used with Learn by arrangement with the British Council.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Khan Academy====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This milestone has two activities:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#video - This activity plays the Basic Addition video by launching the Jukebox activity. Any Khan Academy video can be used with the Learn activity, currently after conversion to .ogv format. At École Saint Jacobs, the Mathematics subject in Term 2 has about a dozen of these videos covering basic arithmetic topics.&lt;br /&gt;
#exercises - Many Khan Academy videos are accompanied by exercises. This example runs the exercise associated with the Basic Addition video. This exercise is in a format which is no longer used on the Khan Academy site. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Get Started===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The getstarted course has four milestones. Each milestone is a section from the 0.82 version of the Help activity (http://laptop.org/8.2.0/manual/). This illustrates how documentation can be made into Learn activities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Learn===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The learn course has three milestones. The first milestone describes the use of the Gnome desktop which may be installed on an XO in recent builds of the software. The next two milestones describe building courses and milestones. Much of this material is not applicable to this version of Learn, but does illustrate how courses can be constructed. These milestones were created using the tools in Learn.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Lesson===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The lesson course has a single milestone with a single activity. This activity launches the ShowNTell activity to show a step-by-step method to create a new activity. This step-by-step is incomplete but illustrates the procedure. When using Learn to launch Sugar activities,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Quiz===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The quiz course has three milestones which describe how to build a question bank using Moodle and how to create quiz activities using these questions. This procedure works, but seems too complex for routine use. It is likely that an alternative using a Django will be needed to simplify this process and make it more usable. The concept of an item or question bank is very important in the context of schools which are heavily involved in preparing students for national examinations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Library===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The library course describes how to use the Library activity to access the school&#039;s digital library. Since this &lt;br /&gt;
library is maintained on the schoos server, this capability is only available in a deployment. The three activities are examples of using ShowNTell to present a &#039;Step-by-Step&#039; slide show.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Student View==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Main Screen===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Student_main.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the main screen as seen by a student. Notice that the Laboratory subject is not visible. Also the school button in the top right of the header has been replaced by an xo symbol. This button in a deployment will show the student a record of his achievements and act as a portfolio in the context of the Learn activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Milestone Ladder===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Student_milestone_ladder.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the student view, a click on a classroom subject in the main screen shows the milestone ladder. At the start of the term, the first milestone has a yellow cap showing that this is the current milestone. A completed milestone has a green cap. Notice the second milestone has a blue cap. The Learn activity automatically downloads one or more milestones for the student automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The deployment sets a quota and a minimum number of milestones. When a milestone is completed, if the next milestone and those after it that are shown with a blue cap are less than the miniumum, the next milestone in the ladder is loaded. If this exceeds the quota, the first milestone already completed is removed from the XO (and the cap shows as light green (chartreuse). This system allows automatic management of the XO store. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Activity Ladder===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Student_activity_ladder.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activity ladder works in a similar way. A completed activity is shown with a green flag. The current activity is shown with a yellow flag. The activities to be done are shown in blue. The Learn activity downloads milestones and so all activities in the current milestone are on the XO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Activity===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Student_activity.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activity view is unchanged; however, notice that the on the right-side of the header, the student does not have an edit button. Instead the student has a check mark button. WHen the student finishes an activity, he or she clicks on this button to continue to the next activity. This button runs a script which records the results from the activity in the Journal (an object shown with the Learn icon and a title of &#039;Attempt&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In a deployment, the Journal is backed up to the school server. These objects are stored in a log folder and the information is later moved to a database. It is then made available to teachers and to the student when requested.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Independent Study===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Many teachers organize their classes so that all students are working on the same lesson. In these classrooms, &lt;br /&gt;
the Learn activities are worked on in class for a specific period of time (e.g. for 20 minutes in a 45 minute period). Learn supports a course being designated for independent study mode (as described above), but this is optional. When a course is not in the independent study mode, the milestone and activity ladders work exactly as they do in the staff mode. However, the activity screen still shows a check mark button and the results of the activity can be recorded in the Journal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Managing Educational Content==&lt;br /&gt;
Within the Karma Learning System, the Learn activity delivers educational content stored on the school server. From one academic year to the next, this content needs to be updated based on the experience of the teachers in using the content, changes in the curriculum, and new resources that become available. Many schools divide the academic year into semesters or terms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One strategy is to keep the current terms content in the main menu. Content from previous years or terms are kept as Resouces on the school server but not linked to the learning system. Content for the next term can be developed in a Laboratory subject visible only to the staff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The reality is that in most deployments, the first task will be to develop a baseline of content sufficient for the academic year. This may take some years to accomplish. Once a baseline is reached, the Laboratory can be initialized from the Resources from previous terms. The focus of the staff will be on improving the courses and incorporating new material. Until that time, the focus will be on creating lessons based on turning paper lesson plans into computer-based lessons.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Learn activity supports this process at the milestone level. Managing subjects and courses requires the efforts of an adminstrator with technical knowledge. This intervention is very important to manage the rotation of content between terms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This document assumes that there ia a Laboratory subject and that the courses there are the ones needed in the next academic period.&lt;br /&gt;
===Creating Milestones===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:empty_course.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the fourth grade English course for term 3 in the Laboratory subject (sje423).&lt;br /&gt;
The course is empty, there are no milestones in the ladder. A typical course for one term will have&lt;br /&gt;
about ten milestones. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding the Milestone====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The teacher for this course can create a new milestone by clicking on the edit button to the right of &lt;br /&gt;
the header.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Adding_a_milestone_1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The teacher clicked on the + button to add a milestone. The new milestone shows in the list. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding a label and description====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The teacher clicked on the edit button for this milestone. The first &lt;br /&gt;
entry allows the creation of a label. It is in numerical sequence by default. However, the teacher &lt;br /&gt;
entered 3/9 to show that the milestone will be used in week one of the term which &lt;br /&gt;
starts on the third of September. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The second entry contains the description of &lt;br /&gt;
the milestone that shows up on the milestone ladder when the cursor hovers over the milestone icon.&lt;br /&gt;
The teacher clicks on the third entry (&#039;done&#039;) to complete the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Done====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Adding_a_milestone_2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the teacher is satisfied, he or she clicks on the green check mark to commit the changes. A click on the X cancels the changes. Note that this screen can also be used to delete a milestone and to rearrange the sequence of milestones (when there are more than one).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Creating Activities===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Course_with_milestone.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now the empty course has a milestone. Note the cap of the milestone is blue since the milestone is on the XO.&lt;br /&gt;
Next, the teacher clicks on the milestone. Naturally, this reveals an empty milestone with no activities on &lt;br /&gt;
the activity ladder. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:empty_activity_ladder.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A typical milestone has sufficient activities so that a typical student will take a week to &lt;br /&gt;
complete it. If a teacher equates an activity to a lesson requiring one class period to complete, the number of activities is likely to be four to five. If the teacher expects some or most of the activities to be completed outside of class, this number can double. The guiding concept is that completing a milestone should represent achievement of an important learning objective. The number and nature of the activities should be proportional so that the student does not become discouraged. A milestone with forty activities would certainly be daunting!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:new_activity_1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create an activity, as before, the teacher clicks on the edit button in the header. The difference is that &lt;br /&gt;
the teacher has a number of choices in the type of activity. In this case, the teacher selects t00 for a basic &lt;br /&gt;
activity. The other options will be described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:new_activity_2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In a similar way, the teacher assigns a label and description to the activity. In this case, the teacher has &lt;br /&gt;
labeled the activity as &#039;I&#039; to show the type of activity, &#039;introduction&#039;.  As before when the teacher is satisfied, he or she clicks on the green check mark to commit the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Creating Basic Activities===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:activity_5.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The teacher clicks on the activity. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:activity_6.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the default activity created by the Learn activity. The teacher clicks on the edit button to &lt;br /&gt;
enter the edit mode [ckeditor].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Editor===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:editor_1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default lesson is loaded into the editor. The buttons on the header to the right are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#save - click on this button to save changes&lt;br /&gt;
#audio - add an audio track to the lesson - explained below&lt;br /&gt;
#image - add an image to the lesson - explained below&lt;br /&gt;
#quit - quit activity, not normally used in this context&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The arrow to the left of the header leaves the edit mode and returns to the activity. If the user &lt;br /&gt;
returns to the activity before clicking on the save button, changes will be lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:editor_4.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The editor is WYSIWYG (What you see is what you get). However, the actual appearance of the lesson will &lt;br /&gt;
differ because of the different style sheets applied. In addition, images are not shown in edit mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The editor has a toolbar with icons. Most of these icons are common to most editors. There are three &lt;br /&gt;
rows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First row:&lt;br /&gt;
*Source - switches the view from WYSIWYG to the html view.  &lt;br /&gt;
*Cut, copy, and paste are the first three icons in the second block.&lt;br /&gt;
*The rounded arrows in the next block are for &#039;undo&#039; and &#039;do&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
*The two in the third block are  &#039;find&#039; and &#039;find and replace&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The remaining icons in this row are not useful in this context.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Second row:&lt;br /&gt;
*The first block formats text: bold, italic, underline, and strike-through. The next two set the superscript and &lt;br /&gt;
subscript modes, respectively. &lt;br /&gt;
*The icons in the second block set numbered or bullet list modes, increase or decrease indent. Skipping two icons,&lt;br /&gt;
there are icons to control alignment: left, center, right, and justify.&lt;br /&gt;
*The fourth icon in the last block inserts a horizontal rule. This is used to mark the boundary between screens in a multiple-screen lesson. The next two insert special characters such as a smiley or a division symbol. The last two are not useful in this context.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Third row:&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;styles&#039; selects a style to use, the ones available are not very useful in this context.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;Format&#039; defaults to normal text. However, use this list to select various style headers. For example, &lt;br /&gt;
the lesson title is normally Heading 1. Sub-title may be Heading 2 and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;Font&#039; allows selection of a font to use. Changing font is not often needed in this context.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;Size&#039; allows a change in the font size. To change the font size, you must first &#039;select&#039; the text to &lt;br /&gt;
apply the change to. Move the cursor to the left of the first character to be changed. Hold the left &lt;br /&gt;
mouse button down while moving the cursor along the line of text. The background of the text will turn dark to &lt;br /&gt;
show that the text is selected. Release the left mouse key when the correct text is selected. Now change the&lt;br /&gt;
font-size.&lt;br /&gt;
*The next two icons allow change to the text color and to the background color respectively. This works the &lt;br /&gt;
same way as &#039;font-size&#039;, you select the text and then select a color. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:editor_2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This image shows the beginning of the lesson. The title could be centered by using the center icon on the toolbar. Select the title as described above and click on the center-alignment icon. The A section title &lt;br /&gt;
could be a Heading 2. Select the text (including the A.) and click on the second list in the bottom row. A &lt;br /&gt;
list of formats appears, click on Heading 2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:editor_3.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The teacher has clicked on the &#039;save&#039; icon (an image of a &#039;floppy drive&#039;) and then clicked on the right arrow &lt;br /&gt;
to return to the activity. The activity now shows the text entered in the editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Adding Images===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:image_1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking on the camera icon in the header will (after some moments) show this screen. It shows thumbnails of all &lt;br /&gt;
of the images available to be added to the lesson. In this case, these are the screen shots I used in &lt;br /&gt;
preparing this page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The images are those found in the Journal plus any images in /home/olpc/Documents. In recent builds of Sugar, &lt;br /&gt;
this folder is visible in the Journal and acts like a mounted usb drive. This means that images obtained from &lt;br /&gt;
the internet, a digital camera or a mobile phone can be copied to a usb drive. When this drive is mounted, it will appear at the bottom of the Journal screen along with an icon for the /home/olpc/Downloads folder. By selecting the usb drive (or SD card) containing the images, the relevant ones can be dragged to the folder. Alternatively, the images can be dragged to the Journal. In either case, a thumbnail will appear on this screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:image_2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this case, the middle image in the top row was selected (click on the thumbnail). This screen allows the teacher to specify the size and location of the image. The width of 600 represents one-half of the screen. The height of 450 gives a 4:3 aspect ratio.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The next entry specifies the screen on which the image will appear. In single-screen lessons this is, of course, 1.&lt;br /&gt;
In multi-screen lessons, the teacher might want a different image on each screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An entry of 1L specifies that the image should be at the top left of the screen. An entry of 1R specifies the right side. An entry of 1 specifies the image should be centered. When the image is on the left, text will appear to its right. If right is specified, text will appear to the left. When an image is centered, text will begin &lt;br /&gt;
below the image.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The teacher clicks on the OK entry to commit the change.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:image_3.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This shows the image in the lesson. Since 1L was entered, the image is on the left with text to the right.&lt;br /&gt;
Note: images currently can only be located at the top of a screen and only one image can be on each screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Adding Audio Clips===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clipping on the microphone adds an audio clip to the lesson. It works the same way as the image icon &lt;br /&gt;
except that the user only needs to click on the correct audio clip since no location or size information is &lt;br /&gt;
needed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A lesson with an audio clip shows a play button in the left-side of the footer. It is a toggle so that &lt;br /&gt;
when the audio is playing it shows a &#039;pause&#039; symbol. The audio continues if play is pressed after a pause.&lt;br /&gt;
To restart the audio, it is necessary to go back to the activity ladder and select the activity again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Adding Questions===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An interactive quiz can easily be added to any lesson/activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:quiz_in_editor.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The quiz is entered in edit mode using a special format developed by Moodle called &#039;gift&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The questions are entered between the following lines:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
/*Quiz&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     questions go here&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
/* &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The word Quiz (capitol Q) must be entered after /* with no spaces. The &#039;*/&#039; is on a separate line. The questions are entered between these two lines separated by a blank line. Here are some example questions:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
/*Quiz &lt;br /&gt;
The Learn activity is part of the Karma Learning System.{T}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The OLPC laptop is often referred to by two letters. What are they? {=XO =xo}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There {=are} many people world-wide supporting the OLPC project. [is are]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One of these organizations is not related to the others. Which one? {=CIA ~OLPC ~Sugarlabs ~Red Hat}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*/ &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The first question is True-False. Answers are shown between braces &#039;{ }&#039;. The answer to a True-False question may be any of T, t, True, true, F, f, False, false. Note that, unlike the other answers, an equal sign &#039;=&#039; is not needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The second question is short answer. Acceptable answers (one or more) are given between braces. In this case, XO and xo will be accepted as correct. Xo and xO would be considered incorrect.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The third question is a cloze. It is identical to the short answer except the braces are within the text. The student will see a blank (underlines) where the braces are entered along with a place to enter the answer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The fourth question is multiple-choice. The choices are given between braces. The correct answer is indicated by the equal sign &#039;=&#039;. The incorrect choices (distractors) are indicated by the tilde sign &#039;~&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The quiz is created when the lesson is saved. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:quiz question.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the student opens the lesson, there will be a &#039;Start&#039; button shown on the bottom right of the screen. The screen gives information (e.g. a diagram) needed to answer the questions and/or instructions on answering the questions (e.g. round your answer to two decimal places).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the student presses the Start button, he is given the questions one at a time in the order they appear in the lesson (not randomized).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This capability is based on the jquizme library.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using Karma Templates===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating an activity, the teacher can choose among a menu of activity types from t00 - a basic activity &lt;br /&gt;
to t20.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:new_activity_1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activity types are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#t00 Basic - a normal textbook-style lesson with optional images, audio, or quiz components.&lt;br /&gt;
#t01 Adding up to 10 - a Karma game which currently has no options for customization.&lt;br /&gt;
#t02 Crossword - a crossword puzzle to find a hidden word. A teacher can create a custom crossword puzzle.&lt;br /&gt;
#t03 Hangman - a traditional hangman. A teacher can provide the wordlist.&lt;br /&gt;
$t04 Identification - not currently usable&lt;br /&gt;
#t05 Mad-libs - A teacher can provide the clues and story.&lt;br /&gt;
#t06 Matching - a Karma implementation of Concentration. The teacher can provide the words and images.&lt;br /&gt;
#t07 Matching Pairs - a matching activity. The teacher can provide the list of matching words.&lt;br /&gt;
#t08 Multiple-choice sentence - multiple choices for words in the sentence (e.g. is/are). The teacher can supply the word choices and sentences.&lt;br /&gt;
#t09 Puzzle - rearrange pieces of a picture in alphabetical or numerical order to see the completed picture. The teacher can supply images.&lt;br /&gt;
#t10 Quick Arithmetic - student is challenged to provide sums mentally. Currently customizing is not supported.&lt;br /&gt;
#t11 Scrambled sentences - not operational&lt;br /&gt;
#t14 Vocabulary - not operational&lt;br /&gt;
#t15 Vocabulary with game - not operational&lt;br /&gt;
#t16 What is this? - matching images against words. The teacher can supply words and images (images not automated).&lt;br /&gt;
#t17 Anagram - rearrange letters to form a word naming an image. Teacher can supply words and images (images not automated).&lt;br /&gt;
#t18 Maths introduction - not operational&lt;br /&gt;
#t19 Maths guided practice - not operational&lt;br /&gt;
#t20 Maths evaluation - not operational&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The best way to see how these activity types work is to go to the Laboratory and in any course add a milestone.&lt;br /&gt;
Then add activities selecting the various types. The result is an example of the activity type. By entering &lt;br /&gt;
the editmode, the source.txt file defining that activity is shown. It can be edited to make a custom version &lt;br /&gt;
that fits the milestone. For example, a crossword could be constructed using some words from the week&#039;s vocabulary list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of these templates were created by Peter Gijsels in a visit to Rwanda in 2011. They illustrate how &lt;br /&gt;
activities can be created using the Karma library and html5 web techniques (css, javascript, jquery). It is intended that this library be expanded to include more useful educational activity types.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using Sugar Activities===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is currently no automated support for creating these lessons. It requires some command-line knowledge. &lt;br /&gt;
When a lesson is opened in the edit mode, the file being edited is &#039;source.txt&#039;. The first line of this file &lt;br /&gt;
contains a directive to launch a specific Sugar activity, e.g.,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;!--B:TurtleArt,lines_lesson.ta,application/x-turtle-art--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For technical reasons, this line appears in the edit mode as:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 /*B:TurtleArt,lines_lesson.ta,application/x-turtle-art*/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The source.txt file uses html5 markup in which &amp;lt;!-- and --&amp;gt; enclose a comment. As a result, this line is &lt;br /&gt;
not visible in the editor. By converting the markup to /* */, the user can create and edit this line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The B: is required to signal this comment contains a directive. There are three parts to the directive separated by commas:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#name of the Sugar activity. This is the same as the name in /home/olpc/Activities minus the activity. &lt;br /&gt;
So Turtle Art (Blocks) appears as /home/olpc/Activities/TurtleArt.activity. &lt;br /&gt;
#file name of the activity bundle (lines_lesson.ta) including the file extension. This bundle must be in &lt;br /&gt;
the folder for this lesson in Learn. &lt;br /&gt;
#mime_type of the bundle. The mime_type of a bundle is given in /home/olpc/Activities/TurtleArt.activity/activity/activity.info. For &#039;some.activity&#039;, look in /home/olpc/Activities/some.activity/activity/activity.info.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A Sugar activity can be launched as a new start by:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
/*B:some.activity*/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Learn.activity creates a Journal object with the bundle file as data. It then resumes the activity from this Journal object.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that not all activities are able to resume from a Journal object and not all activities support processing data files. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to quit the launched activity when finished to return to the Learn activity. Sugar treats the launched activity as a window opened by Learn and so gets confused if the user tries to return to Learn via the frame.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Integration in the Karma Learning System==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When Learn is used with a school server as part of the Karma Learning System, the subjects, courses, milestones, and activities are stored on the school server. Students are assigned laptops by the school so that KLS knows the grade level of each student (and the staff status of members of the staff). Learn on the first launch downloads the content needed to start for students based on their grade. Staff see a milestone ladder where the cap may be blue as seen in the screenshots above or a light blue (cyan). Milestones with a cyan cap are not downloaded to the laptop. A click on the milestones causes the milestone to be downloaded. In this way teachers can look at and edit any activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As part of KLS, Learn stores the results of each activity in the Journal. When the laptop connects with the schoolserver, a backup script uploads new journal entries to the school server. Journal entries which produced documents are uploaded to the Journal. Other entries are uploaded to the log. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In KLS, the Journal is kept on the school server. The laptop has some, but not all of the entries. This offers three advantages: (1) if storage becomes full on the laptop, deleting Journal entries only deletes the local copy. The Journal item is still available when needed, (2) if a laptop becomes unusable, the student can begin working with a different one retaining full access to his Journal from the previous laptop, and (3) there are no &#039;empty&#039; Journal entries with titles of xyz.activity. The user must supply a meaningful name for each Journal entry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
KLS provides the teacher with access to a class list. For each student, the list shows the current status of that student in each course (the milestone and activity last completed). The teacher can &#039;drill down&#039; by clicking on the status - to see a complete list of milestones and activities completed. Click on a milestone and activity shows the number of attempts, total time spent, the result, and any other details such as questions and answers to quizzes. This information is derived from the students Journal and log stored on the school server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As a part of KLS, Learn provides download of milestones from the school server. Milestones and activities modified by the teacher may be uploaded to the school server and, thus, become available to students. If the student has already downloaded a milestone, he or she won&#039;t see the change. A reset button is provided on the header of the activity ladder for the milestone which will delete the local copy and download the updated copy.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tony37</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Activities/Learn&amp;diff=83959</id>
		<title>Activities/Learn</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Activities/Learn&amp;diff=83959"/>
		<updated>2012-11-09T21:34:27Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tony37: /* Prepare a removable drive */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;[[Category:Activities]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Activity-learn.png‎]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://activities.sugarlabs.org/en-US/sugar/addon/4430 Activity] | [ Source]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In a classroom, the Learn activity takes the role of the traditional textbook. In this analogy it is not the &lt;br /&gt;
textbook, it is a bound blank book. It includes an edit mode which enables a deployment to create the units and lessons (milestones and Learn activities) that make up the textbook.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Learn is a component of the Karma Learning System. When installed as a part of KLS, it is tightly integrated with the schoolserver. The primary design goal is to provide local copies of lessons as needed so that the student can use them when not connected to the school server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Version 61 enables evaluation of the activity independently of a schoolserver by using a USB removable drive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Prepare a removable drive===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The removable drive can be a usb flash drive or an SD card.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you run the Terminal activity and enter the command: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 ls /media&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
,you should see /media/XXX (where XXX is the label of your removable drive).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On 12.0.1 and later releases use /run/media/olpc/XXX.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make sure the label XXX does not have spaces. A label such as /media/kls is fine. A label such as &lt;br /&gt;
/media/Store N Go does not work.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Learn activity requires a recent (12+) version of Firefox. While Firefox is installed on versions of &lt;br /&gt;
Sugar with the Gnome desktop, the version doe not provide the needed capabilities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the Firefox website, download the compressed Firefox file, e.g. firefox-*.tar.bz2, where &#039;*&#039; is the &lt;br /&gt;
version number of the latest Firefox release, e.g. 16.0. Copy this file to the XXX drive. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From this website download these files and copy them to the XXX drive:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Kls_demo_2.tar.bz2]] is a 50mb file which contains the sample content kls and other files &lt;br /&gt;
for the Learn activity. Unpack it with the command:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
tar -xvjf Kls_demo_2.tar.bz2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There will now be a folder: kls. This folder contains a sample of the content which would normally be found on the school server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:xo-custom]] is a script which installs Learn from the bundle. It installs Firefox from the tar file on the XXX drive. It  modifies two files in Sugar: sugar-launch and SimpleHTTPServer.py. These changes have no effect on &lt;br /&gt;
normal Sugar use. Finally it sets up the XO to start the localhost daemon at boot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Download learn-61.xo from the activities.sugarlabs.org site. Copy this bundle to the XXX drive.&lt;br /&gt;
Download showntell-12.xo from the Activities.Sugarlabs.org. Copy this bundle to the xxx drive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When this is done, the command: ls /media/XXX should show the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 firefox-*.tar.bz2&lt;br /&gt;
 kls&lt;br /&gt;
 Kls_demo_2.tar.bz2&lt;br /&gt;
 learn-61.xo&lt;br /&gt;
 localhost.service&lt;br /&gt;
 rc.local&lt;br /&gt;
 readme&lt;br /&gt;
 showntell-12.xo&lt;br /&gt;
 SimplerHTTPServer.py&lt;br /&gt;
 sugar-launch&lt;br /&gt;
 xo-custom&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Execute the install script===&lt;br /&gt;
Now mount the XXX drive on the XO.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Launch the Terminal activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the commands:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 cd /media/XXX or cd /run/media/olpc/XXX&lt;br /&gt;
 bash xo-custom&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon completion of these commands, the script shuts down the XO.&lt;br /&gt;
The XO is now ready. Restart to use Learn.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Firefox Preferences===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are some Firefox preferences that need to be set. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In View/Toolbars only Menu Bar and Navigation Toolbar should be checked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Navigate to: about:config. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set browser.tabs.onTop to false (A personal preference, normally students do not use Firefox tabs)&lt;br /&gt;
Set dom.allow_scripts_to_close_windows to true. (Enables quit button to work)&lt;br /&gt;
Set layout.css.dpi to 96. (better fit for XO screen resolution) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In &#039;Tabs&#039;, uncheck &#039;Always show the tab bar&#039;. Students do not normally use tabs in Firefox.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Customize the navigation toolbar. Add the full-screen icon. Choose small icons. In a deployment without internet, the Google icon can be removed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Students are advised to use fullscreen mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Firefox tries to refresh pages from a cache in memory. This can sometimes prevent changes in screens to be immediately visible. In this case, use alt+F5 to refresh the page from the source. Note: on the XO keyboard, &lt;br /&gt;
F5 is the smallest dot in the currently unused block of seven dots in the center of the top row.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Principal Screens==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Main Screen===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Learn-mainscreen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All Learn screens have a header and footer. The header is used for navigation (right side) and providing special functions (left). The center provides a title for the screen. The footer is used for navigation within a Learn activity and to provides special capabilities to that activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The main screen has no navigation on the header. The &#039;Staff&#039; button allows you to switch mode from staff (priviliged) mode to that of a student in fourth (p4), fifth (p5), or sixth grade (p6). The school icon in KLS opens a page showing the teacher a list of students and their current status. The Moodle button is a link to Moodel (http://schoolserver). The last button is the normal &#039;quit&#039; button. Learn is designed to be run in the Firefox fullscreen mode. This means that Firefox navigation is available by moving the cursor to the top of the screen, but that students do not normally have to deal with &#039;http&#039; addresses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The main screen shows the available subjects. In this case English, Mathematics, and Science (the three subjects supported on the laptops by the Ministry of Education in Rwanda). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The rocket icon is the Explore subject. In this version it contains examples of mini-lessons introducing the XO and Learn. It is intended to offer students access to mini-courses on a wide range of topics outside the classroom which they are encouraged to explore. When a student completes a mini-course, they receive a badge which is shown on their page (visible by clicking the school icon on their main page).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the context of KLS, the classroom refers to lessons aligned with the curriculum applicable to the deployment and not the physical location. Using Scratch in the physical classroom may still not be part of the curriculum, while doing an English activity at home is certainly &#039;in the classroom&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Laboratory===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:laboratory.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Laboratory subject is visible only to staff. It is set up to enable teachers (and the deployment) to build the units and lessons for the next term. In this case it is set up for Term 3 of 2012 which begins in September.&lt;br /&gt;
Note that the Laboratory anticipates the addition of French as a subject in Term 3. Note: also that subject menus provide a breadcrumb back to the main screen. Each of the twelve courses contains no milestones or activities.&lt;br /&gt;
Milestones and activities are added using the edit capability which is explained below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Course Menu===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:course_menu.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu is only visible to staff members. This is the English course menu. There are three courses: sje421, sje521, and sje621. While not required, it is convenient to use a code in naming courses. In this case, sj is the Saint Jacobs school in Kigali, Rwanda. The e is English. The 4 is fourth grade (p4). The 2 represents school year 2012. The 1 represents the first term.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In student mode, the students go directly from the main screen to the next screen - the milestone ladder. Within KLS, Learn downloads milestones automatically so that the student has on his laptop enough work for about three weeks before a connection to the school server is required. Staff may need to access any milestone in any course and so need this screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Milestone Ladder===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:milestone_menu.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This screen shows two milestones from the beginning of Term 1. Each milestone represents about one week&#039;s work &lt;br /&gt;
for the student. This version of the Learn.activity contains the first two milestones in each subject and course.&lt;br /&gt;
These milestones were created by the teachers at the Saint Jacobs school in Kigali. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Activity Ladder===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:activity_ladder.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A milestone or unit should provide the instruction needed for a student to achieve a specific learning objective.&lt;br /&gt;
The lessons (or activities or tasks) which provide this instruction are shown in the activity ladder. There are two modes of presentation, open and normal. In the open mode, the student has access to any activity. Normally, the students are directed to the day&#039;s activity by the teacher. In the normal mode, students work through the activities (and milestones) in sequence. In this mode, students work independently completing the work at their own pace. This means the teacher must be able to accommodate the fact that not all students are working on the same milestone or activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The word activity is heavily overloaded in the Sugar environment. Learn is a Sugar activity. The Activity Ladder shows Learn activities. Often lesson will be used to refer to a Learn activity to avoid confusion with Sugar activity. This is not a good solution, since a lesson plan may involve more than one Sugar activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Activity===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:activity_example.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is an example of an activity. The similarity to a textbook page is not accidental. In Rwanda, most students do not have paper textbooks and so the teacher copies the relevant material from the textbook to the blackboard. The students copy this information to their copy books. As a consequence, the teachers who were new to computers created lessons that look like what they put on the blackboard. Even this is helpful because it frees about half a period previously spent copying to and from the blackboard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The buttons (edit and up arrow) on the right of the header are used in creating lessons which will be explained below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Content==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This version of the Learn activity contains sample of the content which would be available in an installation of the Karma Learning System. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Class Subjects===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The English, Mathematics, and Science buttons show the first two milestones for Term 1 at École Saint Jacobs in courses for P4, P5, and P6. These milestones were created by the teachers at a workshop held in Nevember and December, 2011.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Laboratory subject is visible only to staff members. It is set up to enable creation of milestones for Ennglish, Mathematics, Science, and French for Term 3 which begins in September, 2012.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Explore===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:explore_subjects.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The sample coontent in the Explore subject is organized into six courses:&lt;br /&gt;
#examples&lt;br /&gt;
#getstarted&lt;br /&gt;
#learn&lt;br /&gt;
#lesson&lt;br /&gt;
#quiz&lt;br /&gt;
#library&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Examples====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The examples course has three milestones:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Basic Lessons=====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This milestone illustrates the capabilities of basic lessons. These are five activities (or lessons) &lt;br /&gt;
in this milestone:&lt;br /&gt;
#text only (lesson in French from Haiti)&lt;br /&gt;
#text plus image (lesson from École Shalom in Haiti)&lt;br /&gt;
#multi-screen lesson (lesson from Siyavula)&lt;br /&gt;
#text + image with audio (lesson from Rwanda Curriculum Workshop 2010).&lt;br /&gt;
#text with interactive quiz (taken from a past P6 leaving exam in Haiti (French)).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Sugar Activities====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The second milestone shows some examples of using a Sugar activity in a lesson. The Learn activity stores the lesson content in a bundle in the Journal and then resumes the activity from that Journal object. To return to the Learn activity, quit the &#039;launched&#039; activity.&lt;br /&gt;
#ShowNTell - This activity launches ShowNTell with a slide show illustrating how to use Turtle Blocks to draw Vertical, Horizontal, and Oblique lines. This is an example of a &#039;Step-by-Step&#039;. This concept is explained in more detail below.&lt;br /&gt;
#Quiz - This activity launches the Quiz activity with a quiz on body parts (in French). Look for version 6 on activities.sugarlabs.org which will support this example. The current version 5 does not work.&lt;br /&gt;
#Memorize - This activity launches the Memorize activity with a bundle on Roman Numerals.&lt;br /&gt;
#Turtle Blocks (Turtle Art) - This activity launches Turtle Blocks in support of the first example.&lt;br /&gt;
#Wordsearch - This example launches the Wordsearch activity with a specific wordlist. This requires a modification to Wordsearch to be able to use a bundle when resumed from the Journal. This example does not work with Version 1 (It launches Wordsearch but the word list is the default sample).&lt;br /&gt;
#British Council - This activity does not launch a Sugar activity. It does show an example of having students read a short story with audio. This is one of a group of thirty-four stories which can be used in a deployment by arrangement with the British Council. These stories have one or more separate exercises in reading comprehension or vocabulary development which can also be used with Learn by arrangement with the British Council.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Khan Academy====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This milestone has two activities:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#video - This activity plays the Basic Addition video by launching the Jukebox activity. Any Khan Academy video can be used with the Learn activity, currently after conversion to .ogv format. At École Saint Jacobs, the Mathematics subject in Term 2 has about a dozen of these videos covering basic arithmetic topics.&lt;br /&gt;
#exercises - Many Khan Academy videos are accompanied by exercises. This example runs the exercise associated with the Basic Addition video. This exercise is in a format which is no longer used on the Khan Academy site. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Get Started===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The getstarted course has four milestones. Each milestone is a section from the 0.82 version of the Help activity (http://laptop.org/8.2.0/manual/). This illustrates how documentation can be made into Learn activities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Learn===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The learn course has three milestones. The first milestone describes the use of the Gnome desktop which may be installed on an XO in recent builds of the software. The next two milestones describe building courses and milestones. Much of this material is not applicable to this version of Learn, but does illustrate how courses can be constructed. These milestones were created using the tools in Learn.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Lesson===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The lesson course has a single milestone with a single activity. This activity launches the ShowNTell activity to show a step-by-step method to create a new activity. This step-by-step is incomplete but illustrates the procedure. When using Learn to launch Sugar activities,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Quiz===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The quiz course has three milestones which describe how to build a question bank using Moodle and how to create quiz activities using these questions. This procedure works, but seems too complex for routine use. It is likely that an alternative using a Django will be needed to simplify this process and make it more usable. The concept of an item or question bank is very important in the context of schools which are heavily involved in preparing students for national examinations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Library===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The library course describes how to use the Library activity to access the school&#039;s digital library. Since this &lt;br /&gt;
library is maintained on the schoos server, this capability is only available in a deployment. The three activities are examples of using ShowNTell to present a &#039;Step-by-Step&#039; slide show.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Student View==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Main Screen===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Student_main.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the main screen as seen by a student. Notice that the Laboratory subject is not visible. Also the school button in the top right of the header has been replaced by an xo symbol. This button in a deployment will show the student a record of his achievements and act as a portfolio in the context of the Learn activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Milestone Ladder===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Student_milestone_ladder.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the student view, a click on a classroom subject in the main screen shows the milestone ladder. At the start of the term, the first milestone has a yellow cap showing that this is the current milestone. A completed milestone has a green cap. Notice the second milestone has a blue cap. The Learn activity automatically downloads one or more milestones for the student automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The deployment sets a quota and a minimum number of milestones. When a milestone is completed, if the next milestone and those after it that are shown with a blue cap are less than the miniumum, the next milestone in the ladder is loaded. If this exceeds the quota, the first milestone already completed is removed from the XO (and the cap shows as light green (chartreuse). This system allows automatic management of the XO store. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Activity Ladder===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Student_activity_ladder.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activity ladder works in a similar way. A completed activity is shown with a green flag. The current activity is shown with a yellow flag. The activities to be done are shown in blue. The Learn activity downloads milestones and so all activities in the current milestone are on the XO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Activity===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Student_activity.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activity view is unchanged; however, notice that the on the right-side of the header, the student does not have an edit button. Instead the student has a check mark button. WHen the student finishes an activity, he or she clicks on this button to continue to the next activity. This button runs a script which records the results from the activity in the Journal (an object shown with the Learn icon and a title of &#039;Attempt&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In a deployment, the Journal is backed up to the school server. These objects are stored in a log folder and the information is later moved to a database. It is then made available to teachers and to the student when requested.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Independent Study===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Many teachers organize their classes so that all students are working on the same lesson. In these classrooms, &lt;br /&gt;
the Learn activities are worked on in class for a specific period of time (e.g. for 20 minutes in a 45 minute period). Learn supports a course being designated for independent study mode (as described above), but this is optional. When a course is not in the independent study mode, the milestone and activity ladders work exactly as they do in the staff mode. However, the activity screen still shows a check mark button and the results of the activity can be recorded in the Journal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Managing Educational Content==&lt;br /&gt;
Within the Karma Learning System, the Learn activity delivers educational content stored on the school server. From one academic year to the next, this content needs to be updated based on the experience of the teachers in using the content, changes in the curriculum, and new resources that become available. Many schools divide the academic year into semesters or terms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One strategy is to keep the current terms content in the main menu. Content from previous years or terms are kept as Resouces on the school server but not linked to the learning system. Content for the next term can be developed in a Laboratory subject visible only to the staff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The reality is that in most deployments, the first task will be to develop a baseline of content sufficient for the academic year. This may take some years to accomplish. Once a baseline is reached, the Laboratory can be initialized from the Resources from previous terms. The focus of the staff will be on improving the courses and incorporating new material. Until that time, the focus will be on creating lessons based on turning paper lesson plans into computer-based lessons.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Learn activity supports this process at the milestone level. Managing subjects and courses requires the efforts of an adminstrator with technical knowledge. This intervention is very important to manage the rotation of content between terms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This document assumes that there ia a Laboratory subject and that the courses there are the ones needed in the next academic period.&lt;br /&gt;
===Creating Milestones===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:empty_course.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the fourth grade English course for term 3 in the Laboratory subject (sje423).&lt;br /&gt;
The course is empty, there are no milestones in the ladder. A typical course for one term will have&lt;br /&gt;
about ten milestones. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding the Milestone====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The teacher for this course can create a new milestone by clicking on the edit button to the right of &lt;br /&gt;
the header.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Adding_a_milestone_1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The teacher clicked on the + button to add a milestone. The new milestone shows in the list. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding a label and description====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The teacher clicked on the edit button for this milestone. The first &lt;br /&gt;
entry allows the creation of a label. It is in numerical sequence by default. However, the teacher &lt;br /&gt;
entered 3/9 to show that the milestone will be used in week one of the term which &lt;br /&gt;
starts on the third of September. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The second entry contains the description of &lt;br /&gt;
the milestone that shows up on the milestone ladder when the cursor hovers over the milestone icon.&lt;br /&gt;
The teacher clicks on the third entry (&#039;done&#039;) to complete the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Done====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Adding_a_milestone_2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the teacher is satisfied, he or she clicks on the green check mark to commit the changes. A click on the X cancels the changes. Note that this screen can also be used to delete a milestone and to rearrange the sequence of milestones (when there are more than one).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Creating Activities===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Course_with_milestone.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now the empty course has a milestone. Note the cap of the milestone is blue since the milestone is on the XO.&lt;br /&gt;
Next, the teacher clicks on the milestone. Naturally, this reveals an empty milestone with no activities on &lt;br /&gt;
the activity ladder. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:empty_activity_ladder.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A typical milestone has sufficient activities so that a typical student will take a week to &lt;br /&gt;
complete it. If a teacher equates an activity to a lesson requiring one class period to complete, the number of activities is likely to be four to five. If the teacher expects some or most of the activities to be completed outside of class, this number can double. The guiding concept is that completing a milestone should represent achievement of an important learning objective. The number and nature of the activities should be proportional so that the student does not become discouraged. A milestone with forty activities would certainly be daunting!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:new_activity_1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create an activity, as before, the teacher clicks on the edit button in the header. The difference is that &lt;br /&gt;
the teacher has a number of choices in the type of activity. In this case, the teacher selects t00 for a basic &lt;br /&gt;
activity. The other options will be described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:new_activity_2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In a similar way, the teacher assigns a label and description to the activity. In this case, the teacher has &lt;br /&gt;
labeled the activity as &#039;I&#039; to show the type of activity, &#039;introduction&#039;.  As before when the teacher is satisfied, he or she clicks on the green check mark to commit the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Creating Basic Activities===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:activity_5.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The teacher clicks on the activity. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:activity_6.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the default activity created by the Learn activity. The teacher clicks on the edit button to &lt;br /&gt;
enter the edit mode [ckeditor].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Editor===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:editor_1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default lesson is loaded into the editor. The buttons on the header to the right are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#save - click on this button to save changes&lt;br /&gt;
#audio - add an audio track to the lesson - explained below&lt;br /&gt;
#image - add an image to the lesson - explained below&lt;br /&gt;
#quit - quit activity, not normally used in this context&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The arrow to the left of the header leaves the edit mode and returns to the activity. If the user &lt;br /&gt;
returns to the activity before clicking on the save button, changes will be lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:editor_4.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The editor is WYSIWYG (What you see is what you get). However, the actual appearance of the lesson will &lt;br /&gt;
differ because of the different style sheets applied. In addition, images are not shown in edit mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The editor has a toolbar with icons. Most of these icons are common to most editors. There are three &lt;br /&gt;
rows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First row:&lt;br /&gt;
*Source - switches the view from WYSIWYG to the html view.  &lt;br /&gt;
*Cut, copy, and paste are the first three icons in the second block.&lt;br /&gt;
*The rounded arrows in the next block are for &#039;undo&#039; and &#039;do&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
*The two in the third block are  &#039;find&#039; and &#039;find and replace&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The remaining icons in this row are not useful in this context.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Second row:&lt;br /&gt;
*The first block formats text: bold, italic, underline, and strike-through. The next two set the superscript and &lt;br /&gt;
subscript modes, respectively. &lt;br /&gt;
*The icons in the second block set numbered or bullet list modes, increase or decrease indent. Skipping two icons,&lt;br /&gt;
there are icons to control alignment: left, center, right, and justify.&lt;br /&gt;
*The fourth icon in the last block inserts a horizontal rule. This is used to mark the boundary between screens in a multiple-screen lesson. The next two insert special characters such as a smiley or a division symbol. The last two are not useful in this context.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Third row:&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;styles&#039; selects a style to use, the ones available are not very useful in this context.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;Format&#039; defaults to normal text. However, use this list to select various style headers. For example, &lt;br /&gt;
the lesson title is normally Heading 1. Sub-title may be Heading 2 and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;Font&#039; allows selection of a font to use. Changing font is not often needed in this context.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;Size&#039; allows a change in the font size. To change the font size, you must first &#039;select&#039; the text to &lt;br /&gt;
apply the change to. Move the cursor to the left of the first character to be changed. Hold the left &lt;br /&gt;
mouse button down while moving the cursor along the line of text. The background of the text will turn dark to &lt;br /&gt;
show that the text is selected. Release the left mouse key when the correct text is selected. Now change the&lt;br /&gt;
font-size.&lt;br /&gt;
*The next two icons allow change to the text color and to the background color respectively. This works the &lt;br /&gt;
same way as &#039;font-size&#039;, you select the text and then select a color. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:editor_2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This image shows the beginning of the lesson. The title could be centered by using the center icon on the toolbar. Select the title as described above and click on the center-alignment icon. The A section title &lt;br /&gt;
could be a Heading 2. Select the text (including the A.) and click on the second list in the bottom row. A &lt;br /&gt;
list of formats appears, click on Heading 2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:editor_3.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The teacher has clicked on the &#039;save&#039; icon (an image of a &#039;floppy drive&#039;) and then clicked on the right arrow &lt;br /&gt;
to return to the activity. The activity now shows the text entered in the editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Adding Images===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:image_1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking on the camera icon in the header will (after some moments) show this screen. It shows thumbnails of all &lt;br /&gt;
of the images available to be added to the lesson. In this case, these are the screen shots I used in &lt;br /&gt;
preparing this page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The images are those found in the Journal plus any images in /home/olpc/Documents. In recent builds of Sugar, &lt;br /&gt;
this folder is visible in the Journal and acts like a mounted usb drive. This means that images obtained from &lt;br /&gt;
the internet, a digital camera or a mobile phone can be copied to a usb drive. When this drive is mounted, it will appear at the bottom of the Journal screen along with an icon for the /home/olpc/Downloads folder. By selecting the usb drive (or SD card) containing the images, the relevant ones can be dragged to the folder. Alternatively, the images can be dragged to the Journal. In either case, a thumbnail will appear on this screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:image_2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this case, the middle image in the top row was selected (click on the thumbnail). This screen allows the teacher to specify the size and location of the image. The width of 600 represents one-half of the screen. The height of 450 gives a 4:3 aspect ratio.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The next entry specifies the screen on which the image will appear. In single-screen lessons this is, of course, 1.&lt;br /&gt;
In multi-screen lessons, the teacher might want a different image on each screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An entry of 1L specifies that the image should be at the top left of the screen. An entry of 1R specifies the right side. An entry of 1 specifies the image should be centered. When the image is on the left, text will appear to its right. If right is specified, text will appear to the left. When an image is centered, text will begin &lt;br /&gt;
below the image.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The teacher clicks on the OK entry to commit the change.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:image_3.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This shows the image in the lesson. Since 1L was entered, the image is on the left with text to the right.&lt;br /&gt;
Note: images currently can only be located at the top of a screen and only one image can be on each screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Adding Audio Clips===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clipping on the microphone adds an audio clip to the lesson. It works the same way as the image icon &lt;br /&gt;
except that the user only needs to click on the correct audio clip since no location or size information is &lt;br /&gt;
needed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A lesson with an audio clip shows a play button in the left-side of the footer. It is a toggle so that &lt;br /&gt;
when the audio is playing it shows a &#039;pause&#039; symbol. The audio continues if play is pressed after a pause.&lt;br /&gt;
To restart the audio, it is necessary to go back to the activity ladder and select the activity again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Adding Questions===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An interactive quiz can easily be added to any lesson/activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:quiz_in_editor.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The quiz is entered in edit mode using a special format developed by Moodle called &#039;gift&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The questions are entered between the following lines:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
/*Quiz&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     questions go here&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
/* &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The word Quiz (capitol Q) must be entered after /* with no spaces. The &#039;*/&#039; is on a separate line. The questions are entered between these two lines separated by a blank line. Here are some example questions:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
/*Quiz &lt;br /&gt;
The Learn activity is part of the Karma Learning System.{T}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The OLPC laptop is often referred to by two letters. What are they? {=XO =xo}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There {=are} many people world-wide supporting the OLPC project. [is are]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One of these organizations is not related to the others. Which one? {=CIA ~OLPC ~Sugarlabs ~Red Hat}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*/ &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The first question is True-False. Answers are shown between braces &#039;{ }&#039;. The answer to a True-False question may be any of T, t, True, true, F, f, False, false. Note that, unlike the other answers, an equal sign &#039;=&#039; is not needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The second question is short answer. Acceptable answers (one or more) are given between braces. In this case, XO and xo will be accepted as correct. Xo and xO would be considered incorrect.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The third question is a cloze. It is identical to the short answer except the braces are within the text. The student will see a blank (underlines) where the braces are entered along with a place to enter the answer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The fourth question is multiple-choice. The choices are given between braces. The correct answer is indicated by the equal sign &#039;=&#039;. The incorrect choices (distractors) are indicated by the tilde sign &#039;~&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The quiz is created when the lesson is saved. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:quiz question.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the student opens the lesson, there will be a &#039;Start&#039; button shown on the bottom right of the screen. The screen gives information (e.g. a diagram) needed to answer the questions and/or instructions on answering the questions (e.g. round your answer to two decimal places).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the student presses the Start button, he is given the questions one at a time in the order they appear in the lesson (not randomized).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This capability is based on the jquizme library.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using Karma Templates===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating an activity, the teacher can choose among a menu of activity types from t00 - a basic activity &lt;br /&gt;
to t20.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:new_activity_1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activity types are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#t00 Basic - a normal textbook-style lesson with optional images, audio, or quiz components.&lt;br /&gt;
#t01 Adding up to 10 - a Karma game which currently has no options for customization.&lt;br /&gt;
#t02 Crossword - a crossword puzzle to find a hidden word. A teacher can create a custom crossword puzzle.&lt;br /&gt;
#t03 Hangman - a traditional hangman. A teacher can provide the wordlist.&lt;br /&gt;
$t04 Identification - not currently usable&lt;br /&gt;
#t05 Mad-libs - A teacher can provide the clues and story.&lt;br /&gt;
#t06 Matching - a Karma implementation of Concentration. The teacher can provide the words and images.&lt;br /&gt;
#t07 Matching Pairs - a matching activity. The teacher can provide the list of matching words.&lt;br /&gt;
#t08 Multiple-choice sentence - multiple choices for words in the sentence (e.g. is/are). The teacher can supply the word choices and sentences.&lt;br /&gt;
#t09 Puzzle - rearrange pieces of a picture in alphabetical or numerical order to see the completed picture. The teacher can supply images.&lt;br /&gt;
#t10 Quick Arithmetic - student is challenged to provide sums mentally. Currently customizing is not supported.&lt;br /&gt;
#t11 Scrambled sentences - not operational&lt;br /&gt;
#t14 Vocabulary - not operational&lt;br /&gt;
#t15 Vocabulary with game - not operational&lt;br /&gt;
#t16 What is this? - matching images against words. The teacher can supply words and images (images not automated).&lt;br /&gt;
#t17 Anagram - rearrange letters to form a word naming an image. Teacher can supply words and images (images not automated).&lt;br /&gt;
#t18 Maths introduction - not operational&lt;br /&gt;
#t19 Maths guided practice - not operational&lt;br /&gt;
#t20 Maths evaluation - not operational&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The best way to see how these activity types work is to go to the Laboratory and in any course add a milestone.&lt;br /&gt;
Then add activities selecting the various types. The result is an example of the activity type. By entering &lt;br /&gt;
the editmode, the source.txt file defining that activity is shown. It can be edited to make a custom version &lt;br /&gt;
that fits the milestone. For example, a crossword could be constructed using some words from the week&#039;s vocabulary list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of these templates were created by Peter Gijsels in a visit to Rwanda in 2011. They illustrate how &lt;br /&gt;
activities can be created using the Karma library and html5 web techniques (css, javascript, jquery). It is intended that this library be expanded to include more useful educational activity types.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using Sugar Activities===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is currently no automated support for creating these lessons. It requires some command-line knowledge. &lt;br /&gt;
When a lesson is opened in the edit mode, the file being edited is &#039;source.txt&#039;. The first line of this file &lt;br /&gt;
contains a directive to launch a specific Sugar activity, e.g.,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;!--B:TurtleArt,lines_lesson.ta,application/x-turtle-art--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For technical reasons, this line appears in the edit mode as:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 /*B:TurtleArt,lines_lesson.ta,application/x-turtle-art*/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The source.txt file uses html5 markup in which &amp;lt;!-- and --&amp;gt; enclose a comment. As a result, this line is &lt;br /&gt;
not visible in the editor. By converting the markup to /* */, the user can create and edit this line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The B: is required to signal this comment contains a directive. There are three parts to the directive separated by commas:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#name of the Sugar activity. This is the same as the name in /home/olpc/Activities minus the activity. &lt;br /&gt;
So Turtle Art (Blocks) appears as /home/olpc/Activities/TurtleArt.activity. &lt;br /&gt;
#file name of the activity bundle (lines_lesson.ta) including the file extension. This bundle must be in &lt;br /&gt;
the folder for this lesson in Learn. &lt;br /&gt;
#mime_type of the bundle. The mime_type of a bundle is given in /home/olpc/Activities/TurtleArt.activity/activity/activity.info. For &#039;some.activity&#039;, look in /home/olpc/Activities/some.activity/activity/activity.info.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A Sugar activity can be launched as a new start by:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
/*B:some.activity*/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Learn.activity creates a Journal object with the bundle file as data. It then resumes the activity from this Journal object.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that not all activities are able to resume from a Journal object and not all activities support processing data files. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to quit the launched activity when finished to return to the Learn activity. Sugar treats the launched activity as a window opened by Learn and so gets confused if the user tries to return to Learn via the frame.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Integration in the Karma Learning System==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When Learn is used with a school server as part of the Karma Learning System, the subjects, courses, milestones, and activities are stored on the school server. Students are assigned laptops by the school so that KLS knows the grade level of each student (and the staff status of members of the staff). Learn on the first launch downloads the content needed to start for students based on their grade. Staff see a milestone ladder where the cap may be blue as seen in the screenshots above or a light blue (cyan). Milestones with a cyan cap are not downloaded to the laptop. A click on the milestones causes the milestone to be downloaded. In this way teachers can look at and edit any activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As part of KLS, Learn stores the results of each activity in the Journal. When the laptop connects with the schoolserver, a backup script uploads new journal entries to the school server. Journal entries which produced documents are uploaded to the Journal. Other entries are uploaded to the log. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In KLS, the Journal is kept on the school server. The laptop has some, but not all of the entries. This offers three advantages: (1) if storage becomes full on the laptop, deleting Journal entries only deletes the local copy. The Journal item is still available when needed, (2) if a laptop becomes unusable, the student can begin working with a different one retaining full access to his Journal from the previous laptop, and (3) there are no &#039;empty&#039; Journal entries with titles of xyz.activity. The user must supply a meaningful name for each Journal entry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
KLS provides the teacher with access to a class list. For each student, the list shows the current status of that student in each course (the milestone and activity last completed). The teacher can &#039;drill down&#039; by clicking on the status - to see a complete list of milestones and activities completed. Click on a milestone and activity shows the number of attempts, total time spent, the result, and any other details such as questions and answers to quizzes. This information is derived from the students Journal and log stored on the school server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As a part of KLS, Learn provides download of milestones from the school server. Milestones and activities modified by the teacher may be uploaded to the school server and, thus, become available to students. If the student has already downloaded a milestone, he or she won&#039;t see the change. A reset button is provided on the header of the activity ladder for the milestone which will delete the local copy and download the updated copy.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tony37</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Activities/Learn&amp;diff=83953</id>
		<title>Activities/Learn</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Activities/Learn&amp;diff=83953"/>
		<updated>2012-11-09T01:54:19Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tony37: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;[[Category:Activities]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Activity-learn.png‎]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://activities.sugarlabs.org/en-US/sugar/addon/4430 Activity] | [ Source]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In a classroom, the Learn activity takes the role of the traditional textbook. In this analogy it is not the &lt;br /&gt;
textbook, it is a bound blank book. It includes an edit mode which enables a deployment to create the units and lessons (milestones and Learn activities) that make up the textbook.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Learn is a component of the Karma Learning System. When installed as a part of KLS, it is tightly integrated with the schoolserver. The primary design goal is to provide local copies of lessons as needed so that the student can use them when not connected to the school server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Version 61 enables evaluation of the activity independently of a schoolserver by using a USB removable drive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Prepare a removable drive===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The removable drive can be a usb flash drive or an SD card.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you run the Terminal activity and enter the command: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 ls /media&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
,you should see /media/XXX (where XXX is the label of your removable drive).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On 12.0.1 and later releases use /run/media/olpc/XXX.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Learn activity requires a recent (4+) version of Firefox. While Firefox is installed on versions of &lt;br /&gt;
Sugar with the Gnome desktop, the version precedes version 4.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the Firefox website, download the compressed Firefox file, e.g. firefox-*.tar.bz2, where &#039;*&#039; is the &lt;br /&gt;
version number of the latest Firefox release, e.g. 13.0. Copy this file to the XXX drive. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From this website download these files and copy them to the XXX drive:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Kls_demo_2.tar.bz2]] is a 45mb file which contains the sample content kls and other files &lt;br /&gt;
for the Learn activity. Unpack it with the command:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
tar -xvjf Kls_demo_2.tar.bz2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There will now be a folder: kls. This folder contains a sample of the content which would normally be found on the school server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:xo-custom]] is a script which installs Learn from the bundle. It installs Firefox from the tar file on the XXX drive. It  modifies two files in Sugar: sugar-launch and SimpleHTTPServer.py. These changes have no effect on &lt;br /&gt;
normal Sugar use. Finally it sets up the XO to start the localhost daemon at boot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Download learn-61.xo from the activities.sugarlabs.org site. Copy this bundle to the XXX drive.&lt;br /&gt;
Download showntell-12.xo from the Activities.Sugarlabs.org. Copy this bundle to the xxx drive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When this is done, the command: ls /media/XXX should show the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 firefox-*.tar.bz2&lt;br /&gt;
 kls&lt;br /&gt;
 Kls_demo_2.tar.bz2&lt;br /&gt;
 learn-61.xo&lt;br /&gt;
 localhost.service&lt;br /&gt;
 rc.local&lt;br /&gt;
 readme&lt;br /&gt;
 showntell-12.xo&lt;br /&gt;
 SimplerHTTPServer.py&lt;br /&gt;
 sugar-launch&lt;br /&gt;
 xo-custom&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Execute the install script===&lt;br /&gt;
Now mount the XXX drive on the XO.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Launch the Terminal activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the commands:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 cd /media/XXX or cd /run/media/olpc/XXX&lt;br /&gt;
 bash xo-custom&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon completion of these commands, the script shuts down the XO.&lt;br /&gt;
The XO is now ready. Restart to use Learn.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Firefox Preferences===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are some Firefox preferences that need to be set. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In View/Toolbars only Menu Bar and Navigation Toolbar should be checked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Navigate to: about:config. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set browser.tabs.onTop to false (A personal preference, normally students do not use Firefox tabs)&lt;br /&gt;
Set dom.allow_scripts_to_close_windows to true. (Enables quit button to work)&lt;br /&gt;
Set layout.css.dpi to 96. (better fit for XO screen resolution) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In &#039;Tabs&#039;, uncheck &#039;Always show the tab bar&#039;. Students do not normally use tabs in Firefox.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Customize the navigation toolbar. Add the full-screen icon. Choose small icons. In a deployment without internet, the Google icon can be removed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Students are advised to use fullscreen mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Firefox tries to refresh pages from a cache in memory. This can sometimes prevent changes in screens to be immediately visible. In this case, use alt+F5 to refresh the page from the source. Note: on the XO keyboard, &lt;br /&gt;
F5 is the smallest dot in the currently unused block of seven dots in the center of the top row.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Principal Screens==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Main Screen===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Learn-mainscreen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All Learn screens have a header and footer. The header is used for navigation (right side) and providing special functions (left). The center provides a title for the screen. The footer is used for navigation within a Learn activity and to provides special capabilities to that activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The main screen has no navigation on the header. The &#039;Staff&#039; button allows you to switch mode from staff (priviliged) mode to that of a student in fourth (p4), fifth (p5), or sixth grade (p6). The school icon in KLS opens a page showing the teacher a list of students and their current status. The Moodle button is a link to Moodel (http://schoolserver). The last button is the normal &#039;quit&#039; button. Learn is designed to be run in the Firefox fullscreen mode. This means that Firefox navigation is available by moving the cursor to the top of the screen, but that students do not normally have to deal with &#039;http&#039; addresses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The main screen shows the available subjects. In this case English, Mathematics, and Science (the three subjects supported on the laptops by the Ministry of Education in Rwanda). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The rocket icon is the Explore subject. In this version it contains examples of mini-lessons introducing the XO and Learn. It is intended to offer students access to mini-courses on a wide range of topics outside the classroom which they are encouraged to explore. When a student completes a mini-course, they receive a badge which is shown on their page (visible by clicking the school icon on their main page).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the context of KLS, the classroom refers to lessons aligned with the curriculum applicable to the deployment and not the physical location. Using Scratch in the physical classroom may still not be part of the curriculum, while doing an English activity at home is certainly &#039;in the classroom&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Laboratory===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:laboratory.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Laboratory subject is visible only to staff. It is set up to enable teachers (and the deployment) to build the units and lessons for the next term. In this case it is set up for Term 3 of 2012 which begins in September.&lt;br /&gt;
Note that the Laboratory anticipates the addition of French as a subject in Term 3. Note: also that subject menus provide a breadcrumb back to the main screen. Each of the twelve courses contains no milestones or activities.&lt;br /&gt;
Milestones and activities are added using the edit capability which is explained below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Course Menu===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:course_menu.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu is only visible to staff members. This is the English course menu. There are three courses: sje421, sje521, and sje621. While not required, it is convenient to use a code in naming courses. In this case, sj is the Saint Jacobs school in Kigali, Rwanda. The e is English. The 4 is fourth grade (p4). The 2 represents school year 2012. The 1 represents the first term.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In student mode, the students go directly from the main screen to the next screen - the milestone ladder. Within KLS, Learn downloads milestones automatically so that the student has on his laptop enough work for about three weeks before a connection to the school server is required. Staff may need to access any milestone in any course and so need this screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Milestone Ladder===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:milestone_menu.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This screen shows two milestones from the beginning of Term 1. Each milestone represents about one week&#039;s work &lt;br /&gt;
for the student. This version of the Learn.activity contains the first two milestones in each subject and course.&lt;br /&gt;
These milestones were created by the teachers at the Saint Jacobs school in Kigali. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Activity Ladder===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:activity_ladder.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A milestone or unit should provide the instruction needed for a student to achieve a specific learning objective.&lt;br /&gt;
The lessons (or activities or tasks) which provide this instruction are shown in the activity ladder. There are two modes of presentation, open and normal. In the open mode, the student has access to any activity. Normally, the students are directed to the day&#039;s activity by the teacher. In the normal mode, students work through the activities (and milestones) in sequence. In this mode, students work independently completing the work at their own pace. This means the teacher must be able to accommodate the fact that not all students are working on the same milestone or activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The word activity is heavily overloaded in the Sugar environment. Learn is a Sugar activity. The Activity Ladder shows Learn activities. Often lesson will be used to refer to a Learn activity to avoid confusion with Sugar activity. This is not a good solution, since a lesson plan may involve more than one Sugar activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Activity===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:activity_example.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is an example of an activity. The similarity to a textbook page is not accidental. In Rwanda, most students do not have paper textbooks and so the teacher copies the relevant material from the textbook to the blackboard. The students copy this information to their copy books. As a consequence, the teachers who were new to computers created lessons that look like what they put on the blackboard. Even this is helpful because it frees about half a period previously spent copying to and from the blackboard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The buttons (edit and up arrow) on the right of the header are used in creating lessons which will be explained below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Content==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This version of the Learn activity contains sample of the content which would be available in an installation of the Karma Learning System. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Class Subjects===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The English, Mathematics, and Science buttons show the first two milestones for Term 1 at École Saint Jacobs in courses for P4, P5, and P6. These milestones were created by the teachers at a workshop held in Nevember and December, 2011.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Laboratory subject is visible only to staff members. It is set up to enable creation of milestones for Ennglish, Mathematics, Science, and French for Term 3 which begins in September, 2012.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Explore===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:explore_subjects.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The sample coontent in the Explore subject is organized into six courses:&lt;br /&gt;
#examples&lt;br /&gt;
#getstarted&lt;br /&gt;
#learn&lt;br /&gt;
#lesson&lt;br /&gt;
#quiz&lt;br /&gt;
#library&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Examples====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The examples course has three milestones:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Basic Lessons=====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This milestone illustrates the capabilities of basic lessons. These are five activities (or lessons) &lt;br /&gt;
in this milestone:&lt;br /&gt;
#text only (lesson in French from Haiti)&lt;br /&gt;
#text plus image (lesson from École Shalom in Haiti)&lt;br /&gt;
#multi-screen lesson (lesson from Siyavula)&lt;br /&gt;
#text + image with audio (lesson from Rwanda Curriculum Workshop 2010).&lt;br /&gt;
#text with interactive quiz (taken from a past P6 leaving exam in Haiti (French)).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Sugar Activities====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The second milestone shows some examples of using a Sugar activity in a lesson. The Learn activity stores the lesson content in a bundle in the Journal and then resumes the activity from that Journal object. To return to the Learn activity, quit the &#039;launched&#039; activity.&lt;br /&gt;
#ShowNTell - This activity launches ShowNTell with a slide show illustrating how to use Turtle Blocks to draw Vertical, Horizontal, and Oblique lines. This is an example of a &#039;Step-by-Step&#039;. This concept is explained in more detail below.&lt;br /&gt;
#Quiz - This activity launches the Quiz activity with a quiz on body parts (in French). Look for version 6 on activities.sugarlabs.org which will support this example. The current version 5 does not work.&lt;br /&gt;
#Memorize - This activity launches the Memorize activity with a bundle on Roman Numerals.&lt;br /&gt;
#Turtle Blocks (Turtle Art) - This activity launches Turtle Blocks in support of the first example.&lt;br /&gt;
#Wordsearch - This example launches the Wordsearch activity with a specific wordlist. This requires a modification to Wordsearch to be able to use a bundle when resumed from the Journal. This example does not work with Version 1 (It launches Wordsearch but the word list is the default sample).&lt;br /&gt;
#British Council - This activity does not launch a Sugar activity. It does show an example of having students read a short story with audio. This is one of a group of thirty-four stories which can be used in a deployment by arrangement with the British Council. These stories have one or more separate exercises in reading comprehension or vocabulary development which can also be used with Learn by arrangement with the British Council.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Khan Academy====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This milestone has two activities:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#video - This activity plays the Basic Addition video by launching the Jukebox activity. Any Khan Academy video can be used with the Learn activity, currently after conversion to .ogv format. At École Saint Jacobs, the Mathematics subject in Term 2 has about a dozen of these videos covering basic arithmetic topics.&lt;br /&gt;
#exercises - Many Khan Academy videos are accompanied by exercises. This example runs the exercise associated with the Basic Addition video. This exercise is in a format which is no longer used on the Khan Academy site. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Get Started===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The getstarted course has four milestones. Each milestone is a section from the 0.82 version of the Help activity (http://laptop.org/8.2.0/manual/). This illustrates how documentation can be made into Learn activities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Learn===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The learn course has three milestones. The first milestone describes the use of the Gnome desktop which may be installed on an XO in recent builds of the software. The next two milestones describe building courses and milestones. Much of this material is not applicable to this version of Learn, but does illustrate how courses can be constructed. These milestones were created using the tools in Learn.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Lesson===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The lesson course has a single milestone with a single activity. This activity launches the ShowNTell activity to show a step-by-step method to create a new activity. This step-by-step is incomplete but illustrates the procedure. When using Learn to launch Sugar activities,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Quiz===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The quiz course has three milestones which describe how to build a question bank using Moodle and how to create quiz activities using these questions. This procedure works, but seems too complex for routine use. It is likely that an alternative using a Django will be needed to simplify this process and make it more usable. The concept of an item or question bank is very important in the context of schools which are heavily involved in preparing students for national examinations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Library===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The library course describes how to use the Library activity to access the school&#039;s digital library. Since this &lt;br /&gt;
library is maintained on the schoos server, this capability is only available in a deployment. The three activities are examples of using ShowNTell to present a &#039;Step-by-Step&#039; slide show.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Student View==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Main Screen===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Student_main.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the main screen as seen by a student. Notice that the Laboratory subject is not visible. Also the school button in the top right of the header has been replaced by an xo symbol. This button in a deployment will show the student a record of his achievements and act as a portfolio in the context of the Learn activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Milestone Ladder===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Student_milestone_ladder.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the student view, a click on a classroom subject in the main screen shows the milestone ladder. At the start of the term, the first milestone has a yellow cap showing that this is the current milestone. A completed milestone has a green cap. Notice the second milestone has a blue cap. The Learn activity automatically downloads one or more milestones for the student automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The deployment sets a quota and a minimum number of milestones. When a milestone is completed, if the next milestone and those after it that are shown with a blue cap are less than the miniumum, the next milestone in the ladder is loaded. If this exceeds the quota, the first milestone already completed is removed from the XO (and the cap shows as light green (chartreuse). This system allows automatic management of the XO store. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Activity Ladder===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Student_activity_ladder.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activity ladder works in a similar way. A completed activity is shown with a green flag. The current activity is shown with a yellow flag. The activities to be done are shown in blue. The Learn activity downloads milestones and so all activities in the current milestone are on the XO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Activity===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Student_activity.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activity view is unchanged; however, notice that the on the right-side of the header, the student does not have an edit button. Instead the student has a check mark button. WHen the student finishes an activity, he or she clicks on this button to continue to the next activity. This button runs a script which records the results from the activity in the Journal (an object shown with the Learn icon and a title of &#039;Attempt&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In a deployment, the Journal is backed up to the school server. These objects are stored in a log folder and the information is later moved to a database. It is then made available to teachers and to the student when requested.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Independent Study===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Many teachers organize their classes so that all students are working on the same lesson. In these classrooms, &lt;br /&gt;
the Learn activities are worked on in class for a specific period of time (e.g. for 20 minutes in a 45 minute period). Learn supports a course being designated for independent study mode (as described above), but this is optional. When a course is not in the independent study mode, the milestone and activity ladders work exactly as they do in the staff mode. However, the activity screen still shows a check mark button and the results of the activity can be recorded in the Journal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Managing Educational Content==&lt;br /&gt;
Within the Karma Learning System, the Learn activity delivers educational content stored on the school server. From one academic year to the next, this content needs to be updated based on the experience of the teachers in using the content, changes in the curriculum, and new resources that become available. Many schools divide the academic year into semesters or terms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One strategy is to keep the current terms content in the main menu. Content from previous years or terms are kept as Resouces on the school server but not linked to the learning system. Content for the next term can be developed in a Laboratory subject visible only to the staff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The reality is that in most deployments, the first task will be to develop a baseline of content sufficient for the academic year. This may take some years to accomplish. Once a baseline is reached, the Laboratory can be initialized from the Resources from previous terms. The focus of the staff will be on improving the courses and incorporating new material. Until that time, the focus will be on creating lessons based on turning paper lesson plans into computer-based lessons.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Learn activity supports this process at the milestone level. Managing subjects and courses requires the efforts of an adminstrator with technical knowledge. This intervention is very important to manage the rotation of content between terms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This document assumes that there ia a Laboratory subject and that the courses there are the ones needed in the next academic period.&lt;br /&gt;
===Creating Milestones===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:empty_course.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the fourth grade English course for term 3 in the Laboratory subject (sje423).&lt;br /&gt;
The course is empty, there are no milestones in the ladder. A typical course for one term will have&lt;br /&gt;
about ten milestones. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding the Milestone====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The teacher for this course can create a new milestone by clicking on the edit button to the right of &lt;br /&gt;
the header.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Adding_a_milestone_1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The teacher clicked on the + button to add a milestone. The new milestone shows in the list. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding a label and description====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The teacher clicked on the edit button for this milestone. The first &lt;br /&gt;
entry allows the creation of a label. It is in numerical sequence by default. However, the teacher &lt;br /&gt;
entered 3/9 to show that the milestone will be used in week one of the term which &lt;br /&gt;
starts on the third of September. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The second entry contains the description of &lt;br /&gt;
the milestone that shows up on the milestone ladder when the cursor hovers over the milestone icon.&lt;br /&gt;
The teacher clicks on the third entry (&#039;done&#039;) to complete the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Done====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Adding_a_milestone_2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the teacher is satisfied, he or she clicks on the green check mark to commit the changes. A click on the X cancels the changes. Note that this screen can also be used to delete a milestone and to rearrange the sequence of milestones (when there are more than one).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Creating Activities===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Course_with_milestone.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now the empty course has a milestone. Note the cap of the milestone is blue since the milestone is on the XO.&lt;br /&gt;
Next, the teacher clicks on the milestone. Naturally, this reveals an empty milestone with no activities on &lt;br /&gt;
the activity ladder. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:empty_activity_ladder.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A typical milestone has sufficient activities so that a typical student will take a week to &lt;br /&gt;
complete it. If a teacher equates an activity to a lesson requiring one class period to complete, the number of activities is likely to be four to five. If the teacher expects some or most of the activities to be completed outside of class, this number can double. The guiding concept is that completing a milestone should represent achievement of an important learning objective. The number and nature of the activities should be proportional so that the student does not become discouraged. A milestone with forty activities would certainly be daunting!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:new_activity_1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create an activity, as before, the teacher clicks on the edit button in the header. The difference is that &lt;br /&gt;
the teacher has a number of choices in the type of activity. In this case, the teacher selects t00 for a basic &lt;br /&gt;
activity. The other options will be described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:new_activity_2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In a similar way, the teacher assigns a label and description to the activity. In this case, the teacher has &lt;br /&gt;
labeled the activity as &#039;I&#039; to show the type of activity, &#039;introduction&#039;.  As before when the teacher is satisfied, he or she clicks on the green check mark to commit the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Creating Basic Activities===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:activity_5.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The teacher clicks on the activity. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:activity_6.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the default activity created by the Learn activity. The teacher clicks on the edit button to &lt;br /&gt;
enter the edit mode [ckeditor].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Editor===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:editor_1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default lesson is loaded into the editor. The buttons on the header to the right are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#save - click on this button to save changes&lt;br /&gt;
#audio - add an audio track to the lesson - explained below&lt;br /&gt;
#image - add an image to the lesson - explained below&lt;br /&gt;
#quit - quit activity, not normally used in this context&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The arrow to the left of the header leaves the edit mode and returns to the activity. If the user &lt;br /&gt;
returns to the activity before clicking on the save button, changes will be lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:editor_4.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The editor is WYSIWYG (What you see is what you get). However, the actual appearance of the lesson will &lt;br /&gt;
differ because of the different style sheets applied. In addition, images are not shown in edit mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The editor has a toolbar with icons. Most of these icons are common to most editors. There are three &lt;br /&gt;
rows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First row:&lt;br /&gt;
*Source - switches the view from WYSIWYG to the html view.  &lt;br /&gt;
*Cut, copy, and paste are the first three icons in the second block.&lt;br /&gt;
*The rounded arrows in the next block are for &#039;undo&#039; and &#039;do&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
*The two in the third block are  &#039;find&#039; and &#039;find and replace&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The remaining icons in this row are not useful in this context.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Second row:&lt;br /&gt;
*The first block formats text: bold, italic, underline, and strike-through. The next two set the superscript and &lt;br /&gt;
subscript modes, respectively. &lt;br /&gt;
*The icons in the second block set numbered or bullet list modes, increase or decrease indent. Skipping two icons,&lt;br /&gt;
there are icons to control alignment: left, center, right, and justify.&lt;br /&gt;
*The fourth icon in the last block inserts a horizontal rule. This is used to mark the boundary between screens in a multiple-screen lesson. The next two insert special characters such as a smiley or a division symbol. The last two are not useful in this context.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Third row:&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;styles&#039; selects a style to use, the ones available are not very useful in this context.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;Format&#039; defaults to normal text. However, use this list to select various style headers. For example, &lt;br /&gt;
the lesson title is normally Heading 1. Sub-title may be Heading 2 and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;Font&#039; allows selection of a font to use. Changing font is not often needed in this context.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;Size&#039; allows a change in the font size. To change the font size, you must first &#039;select&#039; the text to &lt;br /&gt;
apply the change to. Move the cursor to the left of the first character to be changed. Hold the left &lt;br /&gt;
mouse button down while moving the cursor along the line of text. The background of the text will turn dark to &lt;br /&gt;
show that the text is selected. Release the left mouse key when the correct text is selected. Now change the&lt;br /&gt;
font-size.&lt;br /&gt;
*The next two icons allow change to the text color and to the background color respectively. This works the &lt;br /&gt;
same way as &#039;font-size&#039;, you select the text and then select a color. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:editor_2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This image shows the beginning of the lesson. The title could be centered by using the center icon on the toolbar. Select the title as described above and click on the center-alignment icon. The A section title &lt;br /&gt;
could be a Heading 2. Select the text (including the A.) and click on the second list in the bottom row. A &lt;br /&gt;
list of formats appears, click on Heading 2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:editor_3.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The teacher has clicked on the &#039;save&#039; icon (an image of a &#039;floppy drive&#039;) and then clicked on the right arrow &lt;br /&gt;
to return to the activity. The activity now shows the text entered in the editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Adding Images===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:image_1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking on the camera icon in the header will (after some moments) show this screen. It shows thumbnails of all &lt;br /&gt;
of the images available to be added to the lesson. In this case, these are the screen shots I used in &lt;br /&gt;
preparing this page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The images are those found in the Journal plus any images in /home/olpc/Documents. In recent builds of Sugar, &lt;br /&gt;
this folder is visible in the Journal and acts like a mounted usb drive. This means that images obtained from &lt;br /&gt;
the internet, a digital camera or a mobile phone can be copied to a usb drive. When this drive is mounted, it will appear at the bottom of the Journal screen along with an icon for the /home/olpc/Downloads folder. By selecting the usb drive (or SD card) containing the images, the relevant ones can be dragged to the folder. Alternatively, the images can be dragged to the Journal. In either case, a thumbnail will appear on this screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:image_2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this case, the middle image in the top row was selected (click on the thumbnail). This screen allows the teacher to specify the size and location of the image. The width of 600 represents one-half of the screen. The height of 450 gives a 4:3 aspect ratio.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The next entry specifies the screen on which the image will appear. In single-screen lessons this is, of course, 1.&lt;br /&gt;
In multi-screen lessons, the teacher might want a different image on each screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An entry of 1L specifies that the image should be at the top left of the screen. An entry of 1R specifies the right side. An entry of 1 specifies the image should be centered. When the image is on the left, text will appear to its right. If right is specified, text will appear to the left. When an image is centered, text will begin &lt;br /&gt;
below the image.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The teacher clicks on the OK entry to commit the change.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:image_3.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This shows the image in the lesson. Since 1L was entered, the image is on the left with text to the right.&lt;br /&gt;
Note: images currently can only be located at the top of a screen and only one image can be on each screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Adding Audio Clips===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clipping on the microphone adds an audio clip to the lesson. It works the same way as the image icon &lt;br /&gt;
except that the user only needs to click on the correct audio clip since no location or size information is &lt;br /&gt;
needed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A lesson with an audio clip shows a play button in the left-side of the footer. It is a toggle so that &lt;br /&gt;
when the audio is playing it shows a &#039;pause&#039; symbol. The audio continues if play is pressed after a pause.&lt;br /&gt;
To restart the audio, it is necessary to go back to the activity ladder and select the activity again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Adding Questions===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An interactive quiz can easily be added to any lesson/activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:quiz_in_editor.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The quiz is entered in edit mode using a special format developed by Moodle called &#039;gift&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The questions are entered between the following lines:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
/*Quiz&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     questions go here&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
/* &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The word Quiz (capitol Q) must be entered after /* with no spaces. The &#039;*/&#039; is on a separate line. The questions are entered between these two lines separated by a blank line. Here are some example questions:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
/*Quiz &lt;br /&gt;
The Learn activity is part of the Karma Learning System.{T}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The OLPC laptop is often referred to by two letters. What are they? {=XO =xo}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There {=are} many people world-wide supporting the OLPC project. [is are]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One of these organizations is not related to the others. Which one? {=CIA ~OLPC ~Sugarlabs ~Red Hat}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*/ &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The first question is True-False. Answers are shown between braces &#039;{ }&#039;. The answer to a True-False question may be any of T, t, True, true, F, f, False, false. Note that, unlike the other answers, an equal sign &#039;=&#039; is not needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The second question is short answer. Acceptable answers (one or more) are given between braces. In this case, XO and xo will be accepted as correct. Xo and xO would be considered incorrect.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The third question is a cloze. It is identical to the short answer except the braces are within the text. The student will see a blank (underlines) where the braces are entered along with a place to enter the answer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The fourth question is multiple-choice. The choices are given between braces. The correct answer is indicated by the equal sign &#039;=&#039;. The incorrect choices (distractors) are indicated by the tilde sign &#039;~&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The quiz is created when the lesson is saved. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:quiz question.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the student opens the lesson, there will be a &#039;Start&#039; button shown on the bottom right of the screen. The screen gives information (e.g. a diagram) needed to answer the questions and/or instructions on answering the questions (e.g. round your answer to two decimal places).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the student presses the Start button, he is given the questions one at a time in the order they appear in the lesson (not randomized).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This capability is based on the jquizme library.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using Karma Templates===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating an activity, the teacher can choose among a menu of activity types from t00 - a basic activity &lt;br /&gt;
to t20.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:new_activity_1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activity types are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#t00 Basic - a normal textbook-style lesson with optional images, audio, or quiz components.&lt;br /&gt;
#t01 Adding up to 10 - a Karma game which currently has no options for customization.&lt;br /&gt;
#t02 Crossword - a crossword puzzle to find a hidden word. A teacher can create a custom crossword puzzle.&lt;br /&gt;
#t03 Hangman - a traditional hangman. A teacher can provide the wordlist.&lt;br /&gt;
$t04 Identification - not currently usable&lt;br /&gt;
#t05 Mad-libs - A teacher can provide the clues and story.&lt;br /&gt;
#t06 Matching - a Karma implementation of Concentration. The teacher can provide the words and images.&lt;br /&gt;
#t07 Matching Pairs - a matching activity. The teacher can provide the list of matching words.&lt;br /&gt;
#t08 Multiple-choice sentence - multiple choices for words in the sentence (e.g. is/are). The teacher can supply the word choices and sentences.&lt;br /&gt;
#t09 Puzzle - rearrange pieces of a picture in alphabetical or numerical order to see the completed picture. The teacher can supply images.&lt;br /&gt;
#t10 Quick Arithmetic - student is challenged to provide sums mentally. Currently customizing is not supported.&lt;br /&gt;
#t11 Scrambled sentences - not operational&lt;br /&gt;
#t14 Vocabulary - not operational&lt;br /&gt;
#t15 Vocabulary with game - not operational&lt;br /&gt;
#t16 What is this? - matching images against words. The teacher can supply words and images (images not automated).&lt;br /&gt;
#t17 Anagram - rearrange letters to form a word naming an image. Teacher can supply words and images (images not automated).&lt;br /&gt;
#t18 Maths introduction - not operational&lt;br /&gt;
#t19 Maths guided practice - not operational&lt;br /&gt;
#t20 Maths evaluation - not operational&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The best way to see how these activity types work is to go to the Laboratory and in any course add a milestone.&lt;br /&gt;
Then add activities selecting the various types. The result is an example of the activity type. By entering &lt;br /&gt;
the editmode, the source.txt file defining that activity is shown. It can be edited to make a custom version &lt;br /&gt;
that fits the milestone. For example, a crossword could be constructed using some words from the week&#039;s vocabulary list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of these templates were created by Peter Gijsels in a visit to Rwanda in 2011. They illustrate how &lt;br /&gt;
activities can be created using the Karma library and html5 web techniques (css, javascript, jquery). It is intended that this library be expanded to include more useful educational activity types.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using Sugar Activities===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is currently no automated support for creating these lessons. It requires some command-line knowledge. &lt;br /&gt;
When a lesson is opened in the edit mode, the file being edited is &#039;source.txt&#039;. The first line of this file &lt;br /&gt;
contains a directive to launch a specific Sugar activity, e.g.,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;!--B:TurtleArt,lines_lesson.ta,application/x-turtle-art--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For technical reasons, this line appears in the edit mode as:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 /*B:TurtleArt,lines_lesson.ta,application/x-turtle-art*/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The source.txt file uses html5 markup in which &amp;lt;!-- and --&amp;gt; enclose a comment. As a result, this line is &lt;br /&gt;
not visible in the editor. By converting the markup to /* */, the user can create and edit this line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The B: is required to signal this comment contains a directive. There are three parts to the directive separated by commas:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#name of the Sugar activity. This is the same as the name in /home/olpc/Activities minus the activity. &lt;br /&gt;
So Turtle Art (Blocks) appears as /home/olpc/Activities/TurtleArt.activity. &lt;br /&gt;
#file name of the activity bundle (lines_lesson.ta) including the file extension. This bundle must be in &lt;br /&gt;
the folder for this lesson in Learn. &lt;br /&gt;
#mime_type of the bundle. The mime_type of a bundle is given in /home/olpc/Activities/TurtleArt.activity/activity/activity.info. For &#039;some.activity&#039;, look in /home/olpc/Activities/some.activity/activity/activity.info.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A Sugar activity can be launched as a new start by:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
/*B:some.activity*/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Learn.activity creates a Journal object with the bundle file as data. It then resumes the activity from this Journal object.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that not all activities are able to resume from a Journal object and not all activities support processing data files. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to quit the launched activity when finished to return to the Learn activity. Sugar treats the launched activity as a window opened by Learn and so gets confused if the user tries to return to Learn via the frame.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Integration in the Karma Learning System==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When Learn is used with a school server as part of the Karma Learning System, the subjects, courses, milestones, and activities are stored on the school server. Students are assigned laptops by the school so that KLS knows the grade level of each student (and the staff status of members of the staff). Learn on the first launch downloads the content needed to start for students based on their grade. Staff see a milestone ladder where the cap may be blue as seen in the screenshots above or a light blue (cyan). Milestones with a cyan cap are not downloaded to the laptop. A click on the milestones causes the milestone to be downloaded. In this way teachers can look at and edit any activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As part of KLS, Learn stores the results of each activity in the Journal. When the laptop connects with the schoolserver, a backup script uploads new journal entries to the school server. Journal entries which produced documents are uploaded to the Journal. Other entries are uploaded to the log. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In KLS, the Journal is kept on the school server. The laptop has some, but not all of the entries. This offers three advantages: (1) if storage becomes full on the laptop, deleting Journal entries only deletes the local copy. The Journal item is still available when needed, (2) if a laptop becomes unusable, the student can begin working with a different one retaining full access to his Journal from the previous laptop, and (3) there are no &#039;empty&#039; Journal entries with titles of xyz.activity. The user must supply a meaningful name for each Journal entry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
KLS provides the teacher with access to a class list. For each student, the list shows the current status of that student in each course (the milestone and activity last completed). The teacher can &#039;drill down&#039; by clicking on the status - to see a complete list of milestones and activities completed. Click on a milestone and activity shows the number of attempts, total time spent, the result, and any other details such as questions and answers to quizzes. This information is derived from the students Journal and log stored on the school server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As a part of KLS, Learn provides download of milestones from the school server. Milestones and activities modified by the teacher may be uploaded to the school server and, thus, become available to students. If the student has already downloaded a milestone, he or she won&#039;t see the change. A reset button is provided on the header of the activity ladder for the milestone which will delete the local copy and download the updated copy.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tony37</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Sugarcamp_SF_2012&amp;diff=83405</id>
		<title>Sugarcamp SF 2012</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Sugarcamp_SF_2012&amp;diff=83405"/>
		<updated>2012-10-05T16:18:39Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tony37: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;SugarCamp++ will be Mon Oct 22 to Wed Oct 24 in San Francisco (business hours especially) immediately following [http://www.olpcnews.com/use_cases/community/olpc_san_francisco_community_summit_2012.html OLPC SF&#039;s global community summit].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Presenting an opportunity for all to begin real hacking &amp;amp; implementation of the tech/learning/organizational ideas exchanged over the weekend summit&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please join &amp;amp; help strengthen collaborative global education!  Inspired by the rapidly-approaching [http://lists.sugarlabs.org/archive/iaep/2012-August/015452.html dream of Sugar 1.0] and the [http://www.olpcnews.com/laptops/xo-4/olpc_xo_4_will_provide_significant_performance_boost.html XO-4].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We strongly welcome new participants.  Read up on [http://planet.sugarlabs.org ongoing] [http://planet.laptop.org projects], think about [mailto:volunteer@laptop.org volunteering] with [http://www.sugarlabs.org Sugar Labs] and [http://one.laptop.org OLPC], open your imagination to what open-learning-for-all might become -- and [http://olpcMAP.net put yourself on the map] :)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
http://olpcSF.org/sites/default/files/u8/red_xo_in_sf_fog_2012.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Topics =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please add project topics below if you will give them legs :)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://cananian.livejournal.com/66654.html XOrduino], Curricular Arcs, Streamlined Teacher Training&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://lists.laptop.org/pipermail/server-devel/2012-August/006126.html School Server] [https://docs.google.com/document/pub?id=1dnhU2F6EntepVXTgN8QpkME8fZVUuPjcCoMUfAVKbcc Community Edition] (hassle-free [http://ChildrensLibrary.org ICDL], Yes We [http://khanAcademy.org Khan], lessons learned from Oct 19-21 demo classroom @ SFSU? etc)&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://lists.sugarlabs.org/archive/sugar-devel/2012-August/thread.html#38829 Sugar 0.98 &amp;amp; 1.0 and what lies beyond] (vs Windows 8 releasing Fri Oct 26 ;)&lt;br /&gt;
* Hackers Without Borders, Feedback from Small/Medium-sized Deployments, [http://meeting.sugarlabs.org/sugar-meeting/meetings/2012-05-30T21:08:10 NewCo], [http://wiki.laptop.org/go/ALEARN_Network ALEARN]&lt;br /&gt;
* Documentation within Sugar; Video Tutorials; Books/Histories of OLPC/Sugar&lt;br /&gt;
* Power Infrastructure: developing countries&#039; schools need what??&lt;br /&gt;
* Translating [http://google.com/search?q=olpc+butia Butía] construction instructions from Spanish to English (Christoph)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Attendees =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please add your name if you will come &amp;amp; contribute to the future of Sugar/OLPC or similar -- include 2 words about your preferred project:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://twitter.com/adborden Aaron Borden]? OLPC SF&lt;br /&gt;
* Adam Gordon, Toronto/[http://ntugigroup.org Kenya] (Oct 19-22)&lt;br /&gt;
* Adam Holt, Boston (Oct 17-25)&lt;br /&gt;
* Alex Kleider, SF - [http://wiki.laptop.org/go/XS_Community_Edition XS Community Edition]&lt;br /&gt;
* Aleksey Lim, Russia (Oct 19-24?)&lt;br /&gt;
* Anish Mangal, UMichigan, former Dextrose Project Manager (Oct 17-21)&lt;br /&gt;
* Anna Schoolfield, Birmingham Alabama (Oct 19-24?)&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://lumiere.ens.fr/~guerry/ Bastien Guerry?] Paris - XS Community Edition? (Oct 19? 21-23?)&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://codewiz.org Bernie Innocenti], Boston - Google, Sugar Labs founder (Oct 19-28)&lt;br /&gt;
* Bert Freudenberg, Germany - Etoys (Oct 19-21)&lt;br /&gt;
* Bill Stelzer, US Virgin Islands (Oct 18-27)&lt;br /&gt;
* Caryl Bigenho, Los Angeles area - Teacher &amp;amp; [http://wiki.laptop.org/go/Contributors_program Contributors Program] mentor (Oct 19-24)&lt;br /&gt;
* Christoph Derndorfer, Vienna - OLPC News Editor (in SF Oct 17-25)&lt;br /&gt;
* Cherry Withers? San Jose CA | Philippines&lt;br /&gt;
* Christine Murakami? Ohio - [http://csgolpc2012.weebly.com Columbus School for Girls]&lt;br /&gt;
* Claudia Urrea? Boston | Colombia - OLPC [http://one.laptop.org/about/people/claudia-urrea Director of Learning]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://twitter.com/craigperue Craig Perue] - Jamaica Ministry of Education (Curricular Arcs, Project Mgmt, Oct 19-21)&lt;br /&gt;
* CScott Ananian? Boston - [http://cananian.livejournal.com XOrduino?] [http://lists.sugarlabs.org/archive/iaep/2012-September/015518.html Arduino?]&lt;br /&gt;
* Dafydd Harries - alum of Collabora Ltd (Oct 16-23)&lt;br /&gt;
* Daniel Drake, Nicaragua (Oct 18-24)&lt;br /&gt;
* David Farning, Wisconsin - [http://activitycentral.com Activity Central] founder (Oct 19-24?)&lt;br /&gt;
* David Jessup? Florida - OLPC/Liberty City [http://one.laptop.org/about/people/david-jessup-jr Project Manager] (Oct 19-22?)&lt;br /&gt;
* Ed Bigenho, Los Angeles area (Oct 19-24)&lt;br /&gt;
* Gary Martin? Scotland&lt;br /&gt;
* George Hunt, NYC - [http://wiki.laptop.org/go/XS_Community_Edition XS Community Edition] (Oct 19-24)&lt;br /&gt;
* Giulia D&#039;Amico, Miami - OLPC [http://one.laptop.org/about/people/giulia-damico VP of Business Development] (Oct 19-21?)&lt;br /&gt;
* Grant Bowman - [http://olpcSF.org OLPC SF]&lt;br /&gt;
* Janissa Balcomb - [http://olpc2010-lesotho.blogspot.com/ Lesotho] (Oct 19-22?)&lt;br /&gt;
* Jennifer Martino - [http://www.olpccanada.com/blog/ OLPC Canada] [http://twitter.com/olpccanada Director] (Oct 18-22)&lt;br /&gt;
* Jerry Vonau? Winnipeg - [http://www.laptop.org.au/ OLPC Australia], [http://wiki.laptop.org/go/XS_Community_Edition XS Community Edition]&lt;br /&gt;
* John Watlington? Boston - OLPC VP of Hardware Engineering (Oct 20-21?)&lt;br /&gt;
* Kevin Gordon, Toronto | [http://ntugigroup.org Kenya] (Oct 18-22)&lt;br /&gt;
* Luke Faraone, DC/Boston (Oct 19? 21-22?)&lt;br /&gt;
* Marina Zdobnova, LA/Russia (Oct 19-24?)&lt;br /&gt;
* Mark Battley, Toronto | [http://ntugigroup.org Kenya] - Curricular Arcs (Oct 16-25)&lt;br /&gt;
* Mary Lou Jepsen? Taiwan - [http://pixelqi.com/ Pixel Qi]&lt;br /&gt;
* Matt Keller, Connecticut | Ethiopia - [http://www.technologyreview.com/view/429206/emtech-preview-another-way-to-think-about/ OLPC Literacy Project] (Oct 19-21)&lt;br /&gt;
* Mitch Seaton, Philippines | Australia | Denmark (Oct 18-26)&lt;br /&gt;
* Mike Lee, DC - Tablets, [http://youtu.be/VuOvwJAwA0U XOrduino, XO Stick], Scratch, Etoys, [http://proyectojuanchacon.blogspot.com/2012/09/sugarlabs-dc-is-back.html SugarLabs DC], [http://olpcLearningClub.org OLPC Learning Club], [http://bib.archive.org/ Books in Browsers] (Oct 19-23)&lt;br /&gt;
* Nancie Severs, New Hampshire/Thailand/Vietnam - [http://wiki.laptop.org/go/Contributors_program Contributors Program] coordinator (Oct 17/18-22)&lt;br /&gt;
* Nick Doiron? SF - Code For America (Oct 19-24?)&lt;br /&gt;
* Richard M.Batna, Montreal (Oct 18-23)&lt;br /&gt;
* Richard Smith? Boston - [http://lists.laptop.org/listinfo/power power electronics], OLPC [http://one.laptop.org/about/people/richard-smith Director of Embedded Engineering]&lt;br /&gt;
* Ruben Rodriguez? Spain - Activity Central CTO&lt;br /&gt;
* Sameer Verma - [http://olpcSF.org OLPC SF] Chief Organizer&lt;br /&gt;
* Sarah Naguib? [http://laptopsforegypt.wordpress.com Ohio | Egypt]&lt;br /&gt;
* Simon Schampijer? Berlin&lt;br /&gt;
* SJ Klein? Boston - [http://meta.wikimedia.org/wiki/Trustees Wikipedia Board], [http://dp.la Digital Public Library of America] (Oct 20-21)&lt;br /&gt;
* Tanja Kohn, Austria (in SF October 16 - 26 early morning)&lt;br /&gt;
* Tony Anderson, Rwanda - Karma Learning System, XS Community Edition? (Oct 19-24)&lt;br /&gt;
* Walter Bender, Boston - [[Oversight Board|Sugar Labs Executive Director]] (Oct 19-24?)&lt;br /&gt;
* Yoshiki Ohshima? Los Angeles&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Registration =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Be sure to add your name to the &amp;quot;Attendees&amp;quot; list above, with a couple words about your interests, and also write to &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;holt @ laptop.org&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; confirming there&#039;s still room!&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Both rooms below will be free (thanks to the amazing generosity of SF State University&#039;s College of Business) with reliable Wifi included -- lunch/dinner is available for individual purchase downstairs at the large Food Court.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note the preceding weekend&#039;s [http://www.olpcnews.com/use_cases/community/olpc_san_francisco_community_summit_2012.html Oct 19-21 Community Summit] itself (structured talks/demos/panels etc, you don&#039;t want to miss, [https://www.eventbrite.com/event/4025544512 please register now!]) costs $25 to $40/person to pay for facilities rental, great community shirts, supplies etc. A price that would indeed be an order of magnitude higher if it weren&#039;t for the astonishing volunteer efforts of the http://olpcSF.org community :)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Location =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;In 2 modern classrooms, Oct 22-24 (Mon to Wed), 8AM to 5PM&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 San Francisco State University&lt;br /&gt;
 Rooms 667 &amp;amp; 668&lt;br /&gt;
 835 Market St, 6th Floor &amp;lt;i&amp;gt;(go downtown, NOT main campus)&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 San Francisco, CA 94103&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Evening Excitement =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Nearby pubs will be well-used too!&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;  (And restaurants, and large food court below SFSU/downtown)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://twitter.com/AfricaHackTrip AfricaHackTrip] Drink-up, Wednesday Oct 17, 6:30PM @ Showdown saloon (happy hour!) 10 6th Street, San Francisco: http://www.meetup.com/AfricaHackTrip/events/85351052/&lt;br /&gt;
* Reception @ SFSU/Downtown [http://olpcSF.org/summit Friday Oct 19, 5:00PM]. [https://www.eventbrite.com/event/4025544512 Please Register Now] for the summit if you haven&#039;t!&lt;br /&gt;
* Party in Bolinas Sunday Oct 21, 6PM (1hr from SF, across Golden Gate).  Rental vehicles will be arranged in person during the weekend summit, ask for the amazing June &amp;amp; Alex Kleider on the summit floor!&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://wiki.laptop.org/go/User:Cbigenho Caryl Bigenho] and [http://derndorfer.eu Christoph Derndorfer] invite you to an on-street segway city adventure for about $30, perhaps late Mon/Tue Oct 22-23?  Music/shows also possible.  Please contact them or jot something in right here !&lt;br /&gt;
* SF [http://www.africahacktrip.org/ AfricaHackTrip] Meeting #1, Wednesday Oct 24, Noon @ SFSU downtown: http://www.meetup.com/AfricaHackTrip/events/85328062/&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The olpc-social@googlegroups.com mailing list for [https://www.eventbrite.com/event/4025544512 registered summit attendees] can also help coordinate ad hoc/spontaneous in-city get-togethers etc!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Relevant SF Communities ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Noisebridge Award-winning] anarchistic SF educational hackerspace: http://Noisebridge.net&lt;br /&gt;
* Silicon Valley-San Francisco Bay Area Python Interest Group, meets Oct 25: http://BayPIGgies.net&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Accommodations =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
San Francisco is not cheap, but great hostels are available if you book them early.  Please write to the olpc-sf@lists.laptop.org public mailing list for tips, so you can get to know &amp;amp; stay nearby others: http://lists.laptop.org/listinfo/olpc-sf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The olpc-social@googlegroups.com mailing list for [https://www.eventbrite.com/event/4025544512 registered summit attendees] can also help coordinate ad hoc/spontaneous in-city get-togethers etc!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Ride Board =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Drivers and Passengers: Post your ride information here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Driver: Janissa Balcomb, traveling from Wayan, Idaho. Room for 1 passenger comfortably, 2 if one has short legs.  Leaving Idaho Thu Oct 18, Returning ?Wed (or Thu) Oct 24 (or 25). Main route will be via I-80 thru Elko, Reno &amp;amp; Sacramento.  Will probably camp overnight partway.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Suggestions =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most welcome (register &amp;amp; click Edit above!) &amp;amp; also here: http://wiki.sugarlabs.org/go/Talk:Sugarcamp_SF_2012&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please also join the [http://lists.laptop.org/listinfo/olpc-sf olpc-sf public mailing list] if you&#039;d like to volunteer making this event an important if not historic contribution to global collaborative learning, thanks!  You may also write privately to Adam Holt if you prefer: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;holt @ laptop.org&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tony37</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Activities/Learn&amp;diff=80149</id>
		<title>Activities/Learn</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Activities/Learn&amp;diff=80149"/>
		<updated>2012-06-30T14:40:25Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tony37: /* Execute the install scripts */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;[[Category:Activities]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Activity-learn.png‎]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://activities.sugarlabs.org/en-US/sugar/addon/4430 Activity] | [ Source]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In a classroom, the Learn activity takes the role of the traditional textbook. In this analogy it is not the &lt;br /&gt;
textbook, it is a bound blank book. It includes an edit mode which enables a deployment to create the units and lessons (milestones and Learn activities) that make up the textbook.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Learn is a component of the Karma Learning System. When installed as a part of KLS, it is tightly integrated with the schoolserver. The primary design goal is to provide local copies of lessons as needed so that the student can use them when not connected to the school server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Version 51 enables evaluation of the activity independently of a schoolserver by using a USB removable drive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Prepare a removable drive===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The removable drive can be a usb flash drive or an SD card.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you run the Terminal activity and enter the command: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 ls /media&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
,you should see /media/XXX (where XXX is the label of your removable drive).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Learn activity requires a recent (4+) version of Firefox. While Firefox is installed on versions of &lt;br /&gt;
Sugar with the Gnome desktop, the version precedes version 4.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the Firefox website, download the compressed Firefox file, e.g. firefox-*.tar.bz2, where &#039;*&#039; is the &lt;br /&gt;
version number of the latest Firefox release, e.g. 13.0. Copy this file to the XXX drive. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From this website download these files and copy them to the XXX drive:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Kls_demo_1.tar.bz2]] is a 45mb file which contains the sample content for the Learn activity&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Learn.sh]] is a script which installs Learn from the bundle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firefox.sh]] is a script which installs Firefox from the tar file on the XXX drive. It also &lt;br /&gt;
modifies two files in Sugar: sugar-launch and SimpleHTTPServer.py. These changes have no effect on &lt;br /&gt;
normal Sugar use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Download learn-51.xo from the Activities.Sugarlabs.org site. Copy this bundle to the XXX drive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When this is done, the command: ls /media/XXX should show the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 firefox-*.tar.bz2&lt;br /&gt;
 Firefox.sh&lt;br /&gt;
 Kls_demo_1.tar.bz2&lt;br /&gt;
 learn-51.xo&lt;br /&gt;
 Learn.sh &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Execute the install scripts===&lt;br /&gt;
Now mount the XXX drive on the XO.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Launch the Terminal activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the commands:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 cd /media/XXX&lt;br /&gt;
 bash Learn.sh&lt;br /&gt;
 sudo bash Firefox.sh&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon completion of these commands, the script shuts down the XO.&lt;br /&gt;
The XO is now ready. Restart to use Learn.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Firefox Preferences===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are some Firefox preferences that need to be set. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In View/Toolbars only Menu Bar and Navigation Toolbar should be checked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Navigate to: about:config. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set browser.tabs.onTop to false (A personal preference, normally students do not use Firefox tabs)&lt;br /&gt;
Set dom.allow_scripts_to_close_windows to true. (Enables quit button to work)&lt;br /&gt;
Set layout.css.dpi to 96. (better fit for XO screen resolution) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In &#039;Tabs&#039;, uncheck &#039;Always show the tab bar&#039;. Students do not normally use tabs in Firefox.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Students are advised to set View to fullscreen. Fortunately current versions of Firefox start in fullscrren &lt;br /&gt;
when shut down in that mode. There is apparently no way to specify that Firefox launch in full screen mode and, currently, there is no way to access F11 on the XO (even in Gnome desktop!).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Firefox tries to refresh pages from a cache in memory. This can sometimes prevent changes in screens to be immediately visible. In this case, use alt+F5 to refresh the page from the source. Note: on the XO keyboard, &lt;br /&gt;
F5 is the smallest dot in the currently unused block of seven dots in the center of the top row.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Principal Screens==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Main Screen===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Learn-mainscreen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All Learn screens have a header and footer. The header is used for navigation (right side) and providing special functions (left). The center provides a title for the screen. The footer is used for navigation within a Learn activity and to provides special capabilities to that activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The main screen has no navigation on the header. The &#039;Staff&#039; button allows you to switch mode from staff (priviliged) mode to that of a student in fourth (p4), fifth (p5), or sixth grade (p6). The school icon in KLS opens a page showing the teacher a list of students and their current status. The Moodle button is a link to Moodel (http://schoolserver). The last button is the normal &#039;quit&#039; button. Learn is designed to be run in the Firefox fullscreen mode. This means that Firefox navigation is available by moving the cursor to the top of the screen, but that students do not normally have to deal with &#039;http&#039; addresses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The main screen shows the available subjects. In this case English, Mathematics, and Science (the three subjects supported on the laptops by the Ministry of Education in Rwanda). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The rocket icon is the Explore subject. In this version it contains examples of mini-lessons introducing the XO and Learn. It is intended to offer students access to mini-courses on a wide range of topics outside the classroom which they are encouraged to explore. When a student completes a mini-course, they receive a badge which is shown on their page (visible by clicking the school icon on their main page).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the context of KLS, the classroom refers to lessons aligned with the curriculum applicable to the deployment and not the physical location. Using Scratch in the physical classroom may still not be part of the curriculum, while doing an English activity at home is certainly &#039;in the classroom&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Laboratory===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:laboratory.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Laboratory subject is visible only to staff. It is set up to enable teachers (and the deployment) to build the units and lessons for the next term. In this case it is set up for Term 3 of 2012 which begins in September.&lt;br /&gt;
Note that the Laboratory anticipates the addition of French as a subject in Term 3. Note: also that subject menus provide a breadcrumb back to the main screen. Each of the twelve courses contains no milestones or activities.&lt;br /&gt;
Milestones and activities are added using the edit capability which is explained below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Course Menu===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:course_menu.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu is only visible to staff members. This is the English course menu. There are three courses: sje421, sje521, and sje621. While not required, it is convenient to use a code in naming courses. In this case, sj is the Saint Jacobs school in Kigali, Rwanda. The e is English. The 4 is fourth grade (p4). The 2 represents school year 2012. The 1 represents the first term.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In student mode, the students go directly from the main screen to the next screen - the milestone ladder. Within KLS, Learn downloads milestones automatically so that the student has on his laptop enough work for about three weeks before a connection to the school server is required. Staff may need to access any milestone in any course and so need this screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Milestone Ladder===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:milestone_menu.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This screen shows two milestones from the beginning of Term 1. Each milestone represents about one week&#039;s work &lt;br /&gt;
for the student. This version of the Learn.activity contains the first two milestones in each subject and course.&lt;br /&gt;
These milestones were created by the teachers at the Saint Jacobs school in Kigali. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Activity Ladder===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:activity_ladder.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A milestone or unit should provide the instruction needed for a student to achieve a specific learning objective.&lt;br /&gt;
The lessons (or activities or tasks) which provide this instruction are shown in the activity ladder. There are two modes of presentation, open and normal. In the open mode, the student has access to any activity. Normally, the students are directed to the day&#039;s activity by the teacher. In the normal mode, students work through the activities (and milestones) in sequence. In this mode, students work independently completing the work at their own pace. This means the teacher must be able to accommodate the fact that not all students are working on the same milestone or activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The word activity is heavily overloaded in the Sugar environment. Learn is a Sugar activity. The Activity Ladder shows Learn activities. Often lesson will be used to refer to a Learn activity to avoid confusion with Sugar activity. This is not a good solution, since a lesson plan may involve more than one Sugar activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Activity===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:activity_example.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is an example of an activity. The similarity to a textbook page is not accidental. In Rwanda, most students do not have paper textbooks and so the teacher copies the relevant material from the textbook to the blackboard. The students copy this information to their copy books. As a consequence, the teachers who were new to computers created lessons that look like what they put on the blackboard. Even this is helpful because it frees about half a period previously spent copying to and from the blackboard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The buttons (edit and up arrow) on the right of the header are used in creating lessons which will be explained below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Content==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This version of the Learn activity contains sample of the content which would be available in an installation of the Karma Learning System. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Class Subjects===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The English, Mathematics, and Science buttons show the first two milestones for Term 1 at École Saint Jacobs in courses for P4, P5, and P6. These milestones were created by the teachers at a workshop held in Nevember and December, 2011.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Laboratory subject is visible only to staff members. It is set up to enable creation of milestones for Ennglish, Mathematics, Science, and French for Term 3 which begins in September, 2012.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Explore===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:explore_subjects.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The sample coontent in the Explore subject is organized into six courses:&lt;br /&gt;
#examples&lt;br /&gt;
#getstarted&lt;br /&gt;
#learn&lt;br /&gt;
#lesson&lt;br /&gt;
#quiz&lt;br /&gt;
#library&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Examples====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The examples course has three milestones:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Basic Lessons=====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This milestone illustrates the capabilities of basic lessons. These are five activities (or lessons) &lt;br /&gt;
in this milestone:&lt;br /&gt;
#text only (lesson in French from Haiti)&lt;br /&gt;
#text plus image (lesson from École Shalom in Haiti)&lt;br /&gt;
#multi-screen lesson (lesson from Siyavula)&lt;br /&gt;
#text + image with audio (lesson from Rwanda Curriculum Workshop 2010).&lt;br /&gt;
#text with interactive quiz (taken from a past P6 leaving exam in Haiti (French)).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Sugar Activities====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The second milestone shows some examples of using a Sugar activity in a lesson. The Learn activity stores the lesson content in a bundle in the Journal and then resumes the activity from that Journal object. To return to the Learn activity, quit the &#039;launched&#039; activity.&lt;br /&gt;
#ShowNTell - This activity launches ShowNTell with a slide show illustrating how to use Turtle Blocks to draw Vertical, Horizontal, and Oblique lines. This is an example of a &#039;Step-by-Step&#039;. This concept is explained in more detail below.&lt;br /&gt;
#Quiz - This activity launches the Quiz activity with a quiz on body parts (in French). Look for version 6 on activities.sugarlabs.org which will support this example. The current version 5 does not work.&lt;br /&gt;
#Memorize - This activity launches the Memorize activity with a bundle on Roman Numerals.&lt;br /&gt;
#Turtle Blocks (Turtle Art) - This activity launches Turtle Blocks in support of the first example.&lt;br /&gt;
#Wordsearch - This example launches the Wordsearch activity with a specific wordlist. This requires a modification to Wordsearch to be able to use a bundle when resumed from the Journal. This example does not work with Version 1 (It launches Wordsearch but the word list is the default sample).&lt;br /&gt;
#British Council - This activity does not launch a Sugar activity. It does show an example of having students read a short story with audio. This is one of a group of thirty-four stories which can be used in a deployment by arrangement with the British Council. These stories have one or more separate exercises in reading comprehension or vocabulary development which can also be used with Learn by arrangement with the British Council.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Khan Academy====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This milestone has two activities:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#video - This activity plays the Basic Addition video by launching the Jukebox activity. Any Khan Academy video can be used with the Learn activity, currently after conversion to .ogv format. At École Saint Jacobs, the Mathematics subject in Term 2 has about a dozen of these videos covering basic arithmetic topics.&lt;br /&gt;
#exercises - Many Khan Academy videos are accompanied by exercises. This example runs the exercise associated with the Basic Addition video. This exercise is in a format which is no longer used on the Khan Academy site. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Get Started===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The getstarted course has four milestones. Each milestone is a section from the 0.82 version of the Help activity (http://laptop.org/8.2.0/manual/). This illustrates how documentation can be made into Learn activities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Learn===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The learn course has three milestones. The first milestone describes the use of the Gnome desktop which may be installed on an XO in recent builds of the software. The next two milestones describe building courses and milestones. Much of this material is not applicable to this version of Learn, but does illustrate how courses can be constructed. These milestones were created using the tools in Learn.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Lesson===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The lesson course has a single milestone with a single activity. This activity launches the ShowNTell activity to show a step-by-step method to create a new activity. This step-by-step is incomplete but illustrates the procedure. When using Learn to launch Sugar activities,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Quiz===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The quiz course has three milestones which describe how to build a question bank using Moodle and how to create quiz activities using these questions. This procedure works, but seems too complex for routine use. It is likely that an alternative using a Django will be needed to simplify this process and make it more usable. The concept of an item or question bank is very important in the context of schools which are heavily involved in preparing students for national examinations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Library===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The library course describes how to use the Library activity to access the school&#039;s digital library. Since this &lt;br /&gt;
library is maintained on the schoos server, this capability is only available in a deployment. The three activities are examples of using ShowNTell to present a &#039;Step-by-Step&#039; slide show.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Student View==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Main Screen===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Student_main.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the main screen as seen by a student. Notice that the Laboratory subject is not visible. Also the school button in the top right of the header has been replaced by an xo symbol. This button in a deployment will show the student a record of his achievements and act as a portfolio in the context of the Learn activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Milestone Ladder===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Student_milestone_ladder.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the student view, a click on a classroom subject in the main screen shows the milestone ladder. At the start of the term, the first milestone has a yellow cap showing that this is the current milestone. A completed milestone has a green cap. Notice the second milestone has a blue cap. The Learn activity automatically downloads one or more milestones for the student automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The deployment sets a quota and a minimum number of milestones. When a milestone is completed, if the next milestone and those after it that are shown with a blue cap are less than the miniumum, the next milestone in the ladder is loaded. If this exceeds the quota, the first milestone already completed is removed from the XO (and the cap shows as light green (chartreuse). This system allows automatic management of the XO store. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Activity Ladder===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Student_activity_ladder.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activity ladder works in a similar way. A completed activity is shown with a green flag. The current activity is shown with a yellow flag. The activities to be done are shown in blue. The Learn activity downloads milestones and so all activities in the current milestone are on the XO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Activity===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Student_activity.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activity view is unchanged; however, notice that the on the right-side of the header, the student does not have an edit button. Instead the student has a check mark button. WHen the student finishes an activity, he or she clicks on this button to continue to the next activity. This button runs a script which records the results from the activity in the Journal (an object shown with the Learn icon and a title of &#039;Attempt&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In a deployment, the Journal is backed up to the school server. These objects are stored in a log folder and the information is later moved to a database. It is then made available to teachers and to the student when requested.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Independent Study===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Many teachers organize their classes so that all students are working on the same lesson. In these classrooms, &lt;br /&gt;
the Learn activities are worked on in class for a specific period of time (e.g. for 20 minutes in a 45 minute period). Learn supports a course being designated for independent study mode (as described above), but this is optional. When a course is not in the independent study mode, the milestone and activity ladders work exactly as they do in the staff mode. However, the activity screen still shows a check mark button and the results of the activity can be recorded in the Journal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Managing Educational Content==&lt;br /&gt;
Within the Karma Learning System, the Learn activity delivers educational content stored on the school server. From one academic year to the next, this content needs to be updated based on the experience of the teachers in using the content, changes in the curriculum, and new resources that become available. Many schools divide the academic year into semesters or terms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One strategy is to keep the current terms content in the main menu. Content from previous years or terms are kept as Resouces on the school server but not linked to the learning system. Content for the next term can be developed in a Laboratory subject visible only to the staff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The reality is that in most deployments, the first task will be to develop a baseline of content sufficient for the academic year. This may take some years to accomplish. Once a baseline is reached, the Laboratory can be initialized from the Resources from previous terms. The focus of the staff will be on improving the courses and incorporating new material. Until that time, the focus will be on creating lessons based on turning paper lesson plans into computer-based lessons.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Learn activity supports this process at the milestone level. Managing subjects and courses requires the efforts of an adminstrator with technical knowledge. This intervention is very important to manage the rotation of content between terms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This document assumes that there ia a Laboratory subject and that the courses there are the ones needed in the next academic period.&lt;br /&gt;
===Creating Milestones===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:empty_course.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the fourth grade English course for term 3 in the Laboratory subject (sje423).&lt;br /&gt;
The course is empty, there are no milestones in the ladder. A typical course for one term will have&lt;br /&gt;
about ten milestones. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding the Milestone====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The teacher for this course can create a new milestone by clicking on the edit button to the right of &lt;br /&gt;
the header.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Adding_a_milestone_1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The teacher clicked on the + button to add a milestone. The new milestone shows in the list. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding a label and description====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The teacher clicked on the edit button for this milestone. The first &lt;br /&gt;
entry allows the creation of a label. It is in numerical sequence by default. However, the teacher &lt;br /&gt;
entered 3/9 to show that the milestone will be used in week one of the term which &lt;br /&gt;
starts on the third of September. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The second entry contains the description of &lt;br /&gt;
the milestone that shows up on the milestone ladder when the cursor hovers over the milestone icon.&lt;br /&gt;
The teacher clicks on the third entry (&#039;done&#039;) to complete the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Done====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Adding_a_milestone_2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the teacher is satisfied, he or she clicks on the green check mark to commit the changes. A click on the X cancels the changes. Note that this screen can also be used to delete a milestone and to rearrange the sequence of milestones (when there are more than one).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Creating Activities===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Course_with_milestone.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now the empty course has a milestone. Note the cap of the milestone is blue since the milestone is on the XO.&lt;br /&gt;
Next, the teacher clicks on the milestone. Naturally, this reveals an empty milestone with no activities on &lt;br /&gt;
the activity ladder. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:empty_activity_ladder.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A typical milestone has sufficient activities so that a typical student will take a week to &lt;br /&gt;
complete it. If a teacher equates an activity to a lesson requiring one class period to complete, the number of activities is likely to be four to five. If the teacher expects some or most of the activities to be completed outside of class, this number can double. The guiding concept is that completing a milestone should represent achievement of an important learning objective. The number and nature of the activities should be proportional so that the student does not become discouraged. A milestone with forty activities would certainly be daunting!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:new_activity_1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create an activity, as before, the teacher clicks on the edit button in the header. The difference is that &lt;br /&gt;
the teacher has a number of choices in the type of activity. In this case, the teacher selects t00 for a basic &lt;br /&gt;
activity. The other options will be described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:new_activity_2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In a similar way, the teacher assigns a label and description to the activity. In this case, the teacher has &lt;br /&gt;
labeled the activity as &#039;I&#039; to show the type of activity, &#039;introduction&#039;.  As before when the teacher is satisfied, he or she clicks on the green check mark to commit the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Creating Basic Activities===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:activity_5.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The teacher clicks on the activity. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:activity_6.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the default activity created by the Learn activity. The teacher clicks on the edit button to &lt;br /&gt;
enter the edit mode [ckeditor].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Editor===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:editor_1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default lesson is loaded into the editor. The buttons on the header to the right are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#save - click on this button to save changes&lt;br /&gt;
#audio - add an audio track to the lesson - explained below&lt;br /&gt;
#image - add an image to the lesson - explained below&lt;br /&gt;
#quit - quit activity, not normally used in this context&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The arrow to the left of the header leaves the edit mode and returns to the activity. If the user &lt;br /&gt;
returns to the activity before clicking on the save button, changes will be lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:editor_4.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The editor is WYSIWYG (What you see is what you get). However, the actual appearance of the lesson will &lt;br /&gt;
differ because of the different style sheets applied. In addition, images are not shown in edit mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The editor has a toolbar with icons. Most of these icons are common to most editors. There are three &lt;br /&gt;
rows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First row:&lt;br /&gt;
*Source - switches the view from WYSIWYG to the html view.  &lt;br /&gt;
*Cut, copy, and paste are the first three icons in the second block.&lt;br /&gt;
*The rounded arrows in the next block are for &#039;undo&#039; and &#039;do&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
*The two in the third block are  &#039;find&#039; and &#039;find and replace&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The remaining icons in this row are not useful in this context.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Second row:&lt;br /&gt;
*The first block formats text: bold, italic, underline, and strike-through. The next two set the superscript and &lt;br /&gt;
subscript modes, respectively. &lt;br /&gt;
*The icons in the second block set numbered or bullet list modes, increase or decrease indent. Skipping two icons,&lt;br /&gt;
there are icons to control alignment: left, center, right, and justify.&lt;br /&gt;
*The fourth icon in the last block inserts a horizontal rule. This is used to mark the boundary between screens in a multiple-screen lesson. The next two insert special characters such as a smiley or a division symbol. The last two are not useful in this context.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Third row:&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;styles&#039; selects a style to use, the ones available are not very useful in this context.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;Format&#039; defaults to normal text. However, use this list to select various style headers. For example, &lt;br /&gt;
the lesson title is normally Heading 1. Sub-title may be Heading 2 and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;Font&#039; allows selection of a font to use. Changing font is not often needed in this context.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;Size&#039; allows a change in the font size. To change the font size, you must first &#039;select&#039; the text to &lt;br /&gt;
apply the change to. Move the cursor to the left of the first character to be changed. Hold the left &lt;br /&gt;
mouse button down while moving the cursor along the line of text. The background of the text will turn dark to &lt;br /&gt;
show that the text is selected. Release the left mouse key when the correct text is selected. Now change the&lt;br /&gt;
font-size.&lt;br /&gt;
*The next two icons allow change to the text color and to the background color respectively. This works the &lt;br /&gt;
same way as &#039;font-size&#039;, you select the text and then select a color. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:editor_2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This image shows the beginning of the lesson. The title could be centered by using the center icon on the toolbar. Select the title as described above and click on the center-alignment icon. The A section title &lt;br /&gt;
could be a Heading 2. Select the text (including the A.) and click on the second list in the bottom row. A &lt;br /&gt;
list of formats appears, click on Heading 2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:editor_3.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The teacher has clicked on the &#039;save&#039; icon (an image of a &#039;floppy drive&#039;) and then clicked on the right arrow &lt;br /&gt;
to return to the activity. The activity now shows the text entered in the editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Adding Images===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:image_1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking on the camera icon in the header will (after some moments) show this screen. It shows thumbnails of all &lt;br /&gt;
of the images available to be added to the lesson. In this case, these are the screen shots I used in &lt;br /&gt;
preparing this page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The images are those found in the Journal plus any images in /home/olpc/Documents. In recent builds of Sugar, &lt;br /&gt;
this folder is visible in the Journal and acts like a mounted usb drive. This means that images obtained from &lt;br /&gt;
the internet, a digital camera or a mobile phone can be copied to a usb drive. When this drive is mounted, it will appear at the bottom of the Journal screen along with an icon for the /home/olpc/Downloads folder. By selecting the usb drive (or SD card) containing the images, the relevant ones can be dragged to the folder. Alternatively, the images can be dragged to the Journal. In either case, a thumbnail will appear on this screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:image_2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this case, the middle image in the top row was selected (click on the thumbnail). This screen allows the teacher to specify the size and location of the image. The width of 600 represents one-half of the screen. The height of 450 gives a 4:3 aspect ratio.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The next entry specifies the screen on which the image will appear. In single-screen lessons this is, of course, 1.&lt;br /&gt;
In multi-screen lessons, the teacher might want a different image on each screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An entry of 1L specifies that the image should be at the top left of the screen. An entry of 1R specifies the right side. An entry of 1 specifies the image should be centered. When the image is on the left, text will appear to its right. If right is specified, text will appear to the left. When an image is centered, text will begin &lt;br /&gt;
below the image.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The teacher clicks on the OK entry to commit the change.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:image_3.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This shows the image in the lesson. Since 1L was entered, the image is on the left with text to the right.&lt;br /&gt;
Note: images currently can only be located at the top of a screen and only one image can be on each screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Adding Audio Clips===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clipping on the microphone adds an audio clip to the lesson. It works the same way as the image icon &lt;br /&gt;
except that the user only needs to click on the correct audio clip since no location or size information is &lt;br /&gt;
needed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A lesson with an audio clip shows a play button in the left-side of the footer. It is a toggle so that &lt;br /&gt;
when the audio is playing it shows a &#039;pause&#039; symbol. The audio continues if play is pressed after a pause.&lt;br /&gt;
To restart the audio, it is necessary to go back to the activity ladder and select the activity again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Adding Questions===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An interactive quiz can easily be added to any lesson/activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:quiz_in_editor.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The quiz is entered in edit mode using a special format developed by Moodle called &#039;gift&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The questions are entered between the following lines:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
/*Quiz&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     questions go here&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
/* &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The word Quiz (capitol Q) must be entered after /* with no spaces. The &#039;*/&#039; is on a separate line. The questions are entered between these two lines separated by a blank line. Here are some example questions:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
/*Quiz &lt;br /&gt;
The Learn activity is part of the Karma Learning System.{T}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The OLPC laptop is often referred to by two letters. What are they? {=XO =xo}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There {=are} many people world-wide supporting the OLPC project. [is are]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One of these organizations is not related to the others. Which one? {=CIA ~OLPC ~Sugarlabs ~Red Hat}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*/ &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The first question is True-False. Answers are shown between braces &#039;{ }&#039;. The answer to a True-False question may be any of T, t, True, true, F, f, False, false. Note that, unlike the other answers, an equal sign &#039;=&#039; is not needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The second question is short answer. Acceptable answers (one or more) are given between braces. In this case, XO and xo will be accepted as correct. Xo and xO would be considered incorrect.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The third question is a cloze. It is identical to the short answer except the braces are within the text. The student will see a blank (underlines) where the braces are entered along with a place to enter the answer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The fourth question is multiple-choice. The choices are given between braces. The correct answer is indicated by the equal sign &#039;=&#039;. The incorrect choices (distractors) are indicated by the tilde sign &#039;~&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The quiz is created when the lesson is saved. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:quiz question.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the student opens the lesson, there will be a &#039;Start&#039; button shown on the bottom right of the screen. The screen gives information (e.g. a diagram) needed to answer the questions and/or instructions on answering the questions (e.g. round your answer to two decimal places).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the student presses the Start button, he is given the questions one at a time in the order they appear in the lesson (not randomized).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This capability is based on the jquizme library.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using Karma Templates===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating an activity, the teacher can choose among a menu of activity types from t00 - a basic activity &lt;br /&gt;
to t20.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:new_activity_1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activity types are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#t00 Basic - a normal textbook-style lesson with optional images, audio, or quiz components.&lt;br /&gt;
#t01 Adding up to 10 - a Karma game which currently has no options for customization.&lt;br /&gt;
#t02 Crossword - a crossword puzzle to find a hidden word. A teacher can create a custom crossword puzzle.&lt;br /&gt;
#t03 Hangman - a traditional hangman. A teacher can provide the wordlist.&lt;br /&gt;
$t04 Identification - not currently usable&lt;br /&gt;
#t05 Mad-libs - A teacher can provide the clues and story.&lt;br /&gt;
#t06 Matching - a Karma implementation of Concentration. The teacher can provide the words and images.&lt;br /&gt;
#t07 Matching Pairs - a matching activity. The teacher can provide the list of matching words.&lt;br /&gt;
#t08 Multiple-choice sentence - multiple choices for words in the sentence (e.g. is/are). The teacher can supply the word choices and sentences.&lt;br /&gt;
#t09 Puzzle - rearrange pieces of a picture in alphabetical or numerical order to see the completed picture. The teacher can supply images.&lt;br /&gt;
#t10 Quick Arithmetic - student is challenged to provide sums mentally. Currently customizing is not supported.&lt;br /&gt;
#t11 Scrambled sentences - not operational&lt;br /&gt;
#t14 Vocabulary - not operational&lt;br /&gt;
#t15 Vocabulary with game - not operational&lt;br /&gt;
#t16 What is this? - matching images against words. The teacher can supply words and images (images not automated).&lt;br /&gt;
#t17 Anagram - rearrange letters to form a word naming an image. Teacher can supply words and images (images not automated).&lt;br /&gt;
#t18 Maths introduction - not operational&lt;br /&gt;
#t19 Maths guided practice - not operational&lt;br /&gt;
#t20 Maths evaluation - not operational&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The best way to see how these activity types work is to go to the Laboratory and in any course add a milestone.&lt;br /&gt;
Then add activities selecting the various types. The result is an example of the activity type. By entering &lt;br /&gt;
the editmode, the source.txt file defining that activity is shown. It can be edited to make a custom version &lt;br /&gt;
that fits the milestone. For example, a crossword could be constructed using some words from the week&#039;s vocabulary list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of these templates were created by Peter Gijsels in a visit to Rwanda in 2011. They illustrate how &lt;br /&gt;
activities can be created using the Karma library and html5 web techniques (css, javascript, jquery). It is intended that this library be expanded to include more useful educational activity types.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using Sugar Activities===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is currently no automated support for creating these lessons. It requires some command-line knowledge. &lt;br /&gt;
When a lesson is opened in the edit mode, the file being edited is &#039;source.txt&#039;. The first line of this file &lt;br /&gt;
contains a directive to launch a specific Sugar activity, e.g.,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;!--B:TurtleArt,lines_lesson.ta,application/x-turtle-art--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For technical reasons, this line appears in the edit mode as:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 /*B:TurtleArt,lines_lesson.ta,application/x-turtle-art*/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The source.txt file uses html5 markup in which &amp;lt;!-- and --&amp;gt; enclose a comment. As a result, this line is &lt;br /&gt;
not visible in the editor. By converting the markup to /* */, the user can create and edit this line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The B: is required to signal this comment contains a directive. There are three parts to the directive separated by commas:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#name of the Sugar activity. This is the same as the name in /home/olpc/Activities minus the activity. &lt;br /&gt;
So Turtle Art (Blocks) appears as /home/olpc/Activities/TurtleArt.activity. &lt;br /&gt;
#file name of the activity bundle (lines_lesson.ta) including the file extension. This bundle must be in &lt;br /&gt;
the folder for this lesson in Learn. &lt;br /&gt;
#mime_type of the bundle. The mime_type of a bundle is given in /home/olpc/Activities/TurtleArt.activity/activity/activity.info. For &#039;some.activity&#039;, look in /home/olpc/Activities/some.activity/activity/activity.info.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A Sugar activity can be launched as a new start by:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
/*B:some.activity*/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Learn.activity creates a Journal object with the bundle file as data. It then resumes the activity from this Journal object.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that not all activities are able to resume from a Journal object and not all activities support processing data files. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to quit the launched activity when finished to return to the Learn activity. Sugar treats the launched activity as a window opened by Learn and so gets confused if the user tries to return to Learn via the frame.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Integration in the Karma Learning System==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When Learn is used with a school server as part of the Karma Learning System, the subjects, courses, milestones, and activities are stored on the school server. Students are assigned laptops by the school so that KLS knows the grade level of each student (and the staff status of members of the staff). Learn on the first launch downloads the content needed to start for students based on their grade. Staff see a milestone ladder where the cap may be blue as seen in the screenshots above or a light blue (cyan). Milestones with a cyan cap are not downloaded to the laptop. A click on the milestones causes the milestone to be downloaded. In this way teachers can look at and edit any activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As part of KLS, Learn stores the results of each activity in the Journal. When the laptop connects with the schoolserver, a backup script uploads new journal entries to the school server. Journal entries which produced documents are uploaded to the Journal. Other entries are uploaded to the log. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In KLS, the Journal is kept on the school server. The laptop has some, but not all of the entries. This offers three advantages: (1) if storage becomes full on the laptop, deleting Journal entries only deletes the local copy. The Journal item is still available when needed, (2) if a laptop becomes unusable, the student can begin working with a different one retaining full access to his Journal from the previous laptop, and (3) there are no &#039;empty&#039; Journal entries with titles of xyz.activity. The user must supply a meaningful name for each Journal entry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
KLS provides the teacher with access to a class list. For each student, the list shows the current status of that student in each course (the milestone and activity last completed). The teacher can &#039;drill down&#039; by clicking on the status - to see a complete list of milestones and activities completed. Click on a milestone and activity shows the number of attempts, total time spent, the result, and any other details such as questions and answers to quizzes. This information is derived from the students Journal and log stored on the school server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As a part of KLS, Learn provides download of milestones from the school server. Milestones and activities modified by the teacher may be uploaded to the school server and, thus, become available to students. If the student has already downloaded a milestone, he or she won&#039;t see the change. A reset button is provided on the header of the activity ladder for the milestone which will delete the local copy and download the updated copy.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tony37</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Activities/Learn&amp;diff=79782</id>
		<title>Activities/Learn</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.sugarlabs.org/index.php?title=Activities/Learn&amp;diff=79782"/>
		<updated>2012-06-24T10:57:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tony37: /* TinyMCE */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;[[Category:Activities]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Activity-learn.png‎]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://activities.sugarlabs.org/en-US/sugar/addon/4430 Activity] | [ Source]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In a classroom, the Learn activity takes the role of the traditional textbook. In this analogy it is not the &lt;br /&gt;
textbook, it is a bound blank book. It includes an edit mode which enables a deployment to create the units and lessons (milestones and Learn activities) that make up the textbook.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Learn is a component of the Karma Learning System. When installed as a part of KLS, it is tightly integrated with the schoolserver. The primary design goal is to provide local copies of lessons as needed so that the student can use them when not connected to the school server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Version 51 enables evaluation of the activity independently of a schoolserver by using a USB removable drive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Prepare a removable drive===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The removable drive can be a usb flash drive or an SD card.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you run the Terminal activity and enter the command: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 ls /media&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
,you should see /media/XXX (where XXX is the label of your removable drive).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Learn activity requires a recent (4+) version of Firefox. While Firefox is installed on versions of &lt;br /&gt;
Sugar with the Gnome desktop, the version precedes version 4.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the Firefox website, download the compressed Firefox file, e.g. firefox-*.tar.bz2, where &#039;*&#039; is the &lt;br /&gt;
version number of the latest Firefox release, e.g. 13.0. Copy this file to the XXX drive. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From this website download these files and copy them to the XXX drive:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Kls_demo_1.tar.bz2]] is a 45mb file which contains the sample content for the Learn activity&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Learn.sh]] is a script which installs Learn from the bundle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firefox.sh]] is a script which installs Firefox from the tar file on the XXX drive. It also &lt;br /&gt;
modifies two files in Sugar: sugar-launch and SimpleHTTPServer.py. These changes have no effect on &lt;br /&gt;
normal Sugar use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Download learn-51.xo from the Activities.Sugarlabs.org site. Copy this bundle to the XXX drive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When this is done, the command: ls /media/XXX should show the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 firefox-*.tar.bz2&lt;br /&gt;
 Firefox.sh&lt;br /&gt;
 Kls_demo_1.tar.bz2&lt;br /&gt;
 learn-51.xo&lt;br /&gt;
 Learn.sh &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Execute the install scripts===&lt;br /&gt;
Now mount the XXX drive on the XO.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Launch the Terminal activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the commands:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 cd /media/XXX&lt;br /&gt;
 ./Learn.sh&lt;br /&gt;
 sudo ,/Firefox.sh&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon completion of these commands, the script shuts down the XO.&lt;br /&gt;
The XO is now ready. Restart to use Learn.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Firefox Preferences===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are some Firefox preferences that need to be set. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In View/Toolbars only Menu Bar and Navigation Toolbar should be checked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Navigate to: about:config. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set browser.tabs.onTop to false (A personal preference, normally students do not use Firefox tabs)&lt;br /&gt;
Set dom.allow_scripts_to_close_windows to true. (Enables quit button to work)&lt;br /&gt;
Set layout.css.dpi to 96. (better fit for XO screen resolution) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In &#039;Tabs&#039;, uncheck &#039;Always show the tab bar&#039;. Students do not normally use tabs in Firefox.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Students are advised to set View to fullscreen. Fortunately current versions of Firefox start in fullscrren &lt;br /&gt;
when shut down in that mode. There is apparently no way to specify that Firefox launch in full screen mode and, currently, there is no way to access F11 on the XO (even in Gnome desktop!).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Firefox tries to refresh pages from a cache in memory. This can sometimes prevent changes in screens to be immediately visible. In this case, use alt+F5 to refresh the page from the source. Note: on the XO keyboard, &lt;br /&gt;
F5 is the smallest dot in the currently unused block of seven dots in the center of the top row.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Principal Screens==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Main Screen===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Learn-mainscreen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All Learn screens have a header and footer. The header is used for navigation (right side) and providing special functions (left). The center provides a title for the screen. The footer is used for navigation within a Learn activity and to provides special capabilities to that activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The main screen has no navigation on the header. The &#039;Staff&#039; button allows you to switch mode from staff (priviliged) mode to that of a student in fourth (p4), fifth (p5), or sixth grade (p6). The school icon in KLS opens a page showing the teacher a list of students and their current status. The Moodle button is a link to Moodel (http://schoolserver). The last button is the normal &#039;quit&#039; button. Learn is designed to be run in the Firefox fullscreen mode. This means that Firefox navigation is available by moving the cursor to the top of the screen, but that students do not normally have to deal with &#039;http&#039; addresses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The main screen shows the available subjects. In this case English, Mathematics, and Science (the three subjects supported on the laptops by the Ministry of Education in Rwanda). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The rocket icon is the Explore subject. In this version it contains examples of mini-lessons introducing the XO and Learn. It is intended to offer students access to mini-courses on a wide range of topics outside the classroom which they are encouraged to explore. When a student completes a mini-course, they receive a badge which is shown on their page (visible by clicking the school icon on their main page).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the context of KLS, the classroom refers to lessons aligned with the curriculum applicable to the deployment and not the physical location. Using Scratch in the physical classroom may still not be part of the curriculum, while doing an English activity at home is certainly &#039;in the classroom&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Laboratory===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:laboratory.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Laboratory subject is visible only to staff. It is set up to enable teachers (and the deployment) to build the units and lessons for the next term. In this case it is set up for Term 3 of 2012 which begins in September.&lt;br /&gt;
Note that the Laboratory anticipates the addition of French as a subject in Term 3. Note: also that subject menus provide a breadcrumb back to the main screen. Each of the twelve courses contains no milestones or activities.&lt;br /&gt;
Milestones and activities are added using the edit capability which is explained below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Course Menu===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:course_menu.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu is only visible to staff members. This is the English course menu. There are three courses: sje421, sje521, and sje621. While not required, it is convenient to use a code in naming courses. In this case, sj is the Saint Jacobs school in Kigali, Rwanda. The e is English. The 4 is fourth grade (p4). The 2 represents school year 2012. The 1 represents the first term.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In student mode, the students go directly from the main screen to the next screen - the milestone ladder. Within KLS, Learn downloads milestones automatically so that the student has on his laptop enough work for about three weeks before a connection to the school server is required. Staff may need to access any milestone in any course and so need this screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Milestone Ladder===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:milestone_menu.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This screen shows two milestones from the beginning of Term 1. Each milestone represents about one week&#039;s work &lt;br /&gt;
for the student. This version of the Learn.activity contains the first two milestones in each subject and course.&lt;br /&gt;
These milestones were created by the teachers at the Saint Jacobs school in Kigali. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Activity Ladder===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:activity_ladder.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A milestone or unit should provide the instruction needed for a student to achieve a specific learning objective.&lt;br /&gt;
The lessons (or activities or tasks) which provide this instruction are shown in the activity ladder. There are two modes of presentation, open and normal. In the open mode, the student has access to any activity. Normally, the students are directed to the day&#039;s activity by the teacher. In the normal mode, students work through the activities (and milestones) in sequence. In this mode, students work independently completing the work at their own pace. This means the teacher must be able to accommodate the fact that not all students are working on the same milestone or activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The word activity is heavily overloaded in the Sugar environment. Learn is a Sugar activity. The Activity Ladder shows Learn activities. Often lesson will be used to refer to a Learn activity to avoid confusion with Sugar activity. This is not a good solution, since a lesson plan may involve more than one Sugar activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Activity===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:activity_example.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is an example of an activity. The similarity to a textbook page is not accidental. In Rwanda, most students do not have paper textbooks and so the teacher copies the relevant material from the textbook to the blackboard. The students copy this information to their copy books. As a consequence, the teachers who were new to computers created lessons that look like what they put on the blackboard. Even this is helpful because it frees about half a period previously spent copying to and from the blackboard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The buttons (edit and up arrow) on the right of the header are used in creating lessons which will be explained below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Content==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This version of the Learn activity contains sample of the content which would be available in an installation of the Karma Learning System. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Class Subjects===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The English, Mathematics, and Science buttons show the first two milestones for Term 1 at École Saint Jacobs in courses for P4, P5, and P6. These milestones were created by the teachers at a workshop held in Nevember and December, 2011.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Laboratory subject is visible only to staff members. It is set up to enable creation of milestones for Ennglish, Mathematics, Science, and French for Term 3 which begins in September, 2012.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Explore===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:explore_subjects.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The sample coontent in the Explore subject is organized into six courses:&lt;br /&gt;
#examples&lt;br /&gt;
#getstarted&lt;br /&gt;
#learn&lt;br /&gt;
#lesson&lt;br /&gt;
#quiz&lt;br /&gt;
#library&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Examples====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The examples course has three milestones:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Basic Lessons=====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This milestone illustrates the capabilities of basic lessons. These are five activities (or lessons) &lt;br /&gt;
in this milestone:&lt;br /&gt;
#text only (lesson in French from Haiti)&lt;br /&gt;
#text plus image (lesson from École Shalom in Haiti)&lt;br /&gt;
#multi-screen lesson (lesson from Siyavula)&lt;br /&gt;
#text + image with audio (lesson from Rwanda Curriculum Workshop 2010).&lt;br /&gt;
#text with interactive quiz (taken from a past P6 leaving exam in Haiti (French)).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Sugar Activities====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The second milestone shows some examples of using a Sugar activity in a lesson. The Learn activity stores the lesson content in a bundle in the Journal and then resumes the activity from that Journal object. To return to the Learn activity, quit the &#039;launched&#039; activity.&lt;br /&gt;
#ShowNTell - This activity launches ShowNTell with a slide show illustrating how to use Turtle Blocks to draw Vertical, Horizontal, and Oblique lines. This is an example of a &#039;Step-by-Step&#039;. This concept is explained in more detail below.&lt;br /&gt;
#Quiz - This activity launches the Quiz activity with a quiz on body parts (in French). Look for version 6 on activities.sugarlabs.org which will support this example. The current version 5 does not work.&lt;br /&gt;
#Memorize - This activity launches the Memorize activity with a bundle on Roman Numerals.&lt;br /&gt;
#Turtle Blocks (Turtle Art) - This activity launches Turtle Blocks in support of the first example.&lt;br /&gt;
#Wordsearch - This example launches the Wordsearch activity with a specific wordlist. This requires a modification to Wordsearch to be able to use a bundle when resumed from the Journal. This example does not work with Version 1 (It launches Wordsearch but the word list is the default sample).&lt;br /&gt;
#British Council - This activity does not launch a Sugar activity. It does show an example of having students read a short story with audio. This is one of a group of thirty-four stories which can be used in a deployment by arrangement with the British Council. These stories have one or more separate exercises in reading comprehension or vocabulary development which can also be used with Learn by arrangement with the British Council.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Khan Academy====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This milestone has two activities:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#video - This activity plays the Basic Addition video by launching the Jukebox activity. Any Khan Academy video can be used with the Learn activity, currently after conversion to .ogv format. At École Saint Jacobs, the Mathematics subject in Term 2 has about a dozen of these videos covering basic arithmetic topics.&lt;br /&gt;
#exercises - Many Khan Academy videos are accompanied by exercises. This example runs the exercise associated with the Basic Addition video. This exercise is in a format which is no longer used on the Khan Academy site. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Get Started===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The getstarted course has four milestones. Each milestone is a section from the 0.82 version of the Help activity (http://laptop.org/8.2.0/manual/). This illustrates how documentation can be made into Learn activities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Learn===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The learn course has three milestones. The first milestone describes the use of the Gnome desktop which may be installed on an XO in recent builds of the software. The next two milestones describe building courses and milestones. Much of this material is not applicable to this version of Learn, but does illustrate how courses can be constructed. These milestones were created using the tools in Learn.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Lesson===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The lesson course has a single milestone with a single activity. This activity launches the ShowNTell activity to show a step-by-step method to create a new activity. This step-by-step is incomplete but illustrates the procedure. When using Learn to launch Sugar activities,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Quiz===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The quiz course has three milestones which describe how to build a question bank using Moodle and how to create quiz activities using these questions. This procedure works, but seems too complex for routine use. It is likely that an alternative using a Django will be needed to simplify this process and make it more usable. The concept of an item or question bank is very important in the context of schools which are heavily involved in preparing students for national examinations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Library===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The library course describes how to use the Library activity to access the school&#039;s digital library. Since this &lt;br /&gt;
library is maintained on the schoos server, this capability is only available in a deployment. The three activities are examples of using ShowNTell to present a &#039;Step-by-Step&#039; slide show.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Student View==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Main Screen===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Student_main.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the main screen as seen by a student. Notice that the Laboratory subject is not visible. Also the school button in the top right of the header has been replaced by an xo symbol. This button in a deployment will show the student a record of his achievements and act as a portfolio in the context of the Learn activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Milestone Ladder===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Student_milestone_ladder.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the student view, a click on a classroom subject in the main screen shows the milestone ladder. At the start of the term, the first milestone has a yellow cap showing that this is the current milestone. A completed milestone has a green cap. Notice the second milestone has a blue cap. The Learn activity automatically downloads one or more milestones for the student automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The deployment sets a quota and a minimum number of milestones. When a milestone is completed, if the next milestone and those after it that are shown with a blue cap are less than the miniumum, the next milestone in the ladder is loaded. If this exceeds the quota, the first milestone already completed is removed from the XO (and the cap shows as light green (chartreuse). This system allows automatic management of the XO store. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Activity Ladder===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Student_activity_ladder.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activity ladder works in a similar way. A completed activity is shown with a green flag. The current activity is shown with a yellow flag. The activities to be done are shown in blue. The Learn activity downloads milestones and so all activities in the current milestone are on the XO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Activity===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Student_activity.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activity view is unchanged; however, notice that the on the right-side of the header, the student does not have an edit button. Instead the student has a check mark button. WHen the student finishes an activity, he or she clicks on this button to continue to the next activity. This button runs a script which records the results from the activity in the Journal (an object shown with the Learn icon and a title of &#039;Attempt&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In a deployment, the Journal is backed up to the school server. These objects are stored in a log folder and the information is later moved to a database. It is then made available to teachers and to the student when requested.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Independent Study===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Many teachers organize their classes so that all students are working on the same lesson. In these classrooms, &lt;br /&gt;
the Learn activities are worked on in class for a specific period of time (e.g. for 20 minutes in a 45 minute period). Learn supports a course being designated for independent study mode (as described above), but this is optional. When a course is not in the independent study mode, the milestone and activity ladders work exactly as they do in the staff mode. However, the activity screen still shows a check mark button and the results of the activity can be recorded in the Journal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Managing Educational Content==&lt;br /&gt;
Within the Karma Learning System, the Learn activity delivers educational content stored on the school server. From one academic year to the next, this content needs to be updated based on the experience of the teachers in using the content, changes in the curriculum, and new resources that become available. Many schools divide the academic year into semesters or terms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One strategy is to keep the current terms content in the main menu. Content from previous years or terms are kept as Resouces on the school server but not linked to the learning system. Content for the next term can be developed in a Laboratory subject visible only to the staff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The reality is that in most deployments, the first task will be to develop a baseline of content sufficient for the academic year. This may take some years to accomplish. Once a baseline is reached, the Laboratory can be initialized from the Resources from previous terms. The focus of the staff will be on improving the courses and incorporating new material. Until that time, the focus will be on creating lessons based on turning paper lesson plans into computer-based lessons.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Learn activity supports this process at the milestone level. Managing subjects and courses requires the efforts of an adminstrator with technical knowledge. This intervention is very important to manage the rotation of content between terms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This document assumes that there ia a Laboratory subject and that the courses there are the ones needed in the next academic period.&lt;br /&gt;
===Creating Milestones===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:empty_course.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the fourth grade English course for term 3 in the Laboratory subject (sje423).&lt;br /&gt;
The course is empty, there are no milestones in the ladder. A typical course for one term will have&lt;br /&gt;
about ten milestones. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding the Milestone====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The teacher for this course can create a new milestone by clicking on the edit button to the right of &lt;br /&gt;
the header.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Adding_a_milestone_1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The teacher clicked on the + button to add a milestone. The new milestone shows in the list. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding a label and description====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The teacher clicked on the edit button for this milestone. The first &lt;br /&gt;
entry allows the creation of a label. It is in numerical sequence by default. However, the teacher &lt;br /&gt;
entered 3/9 to show that the milestone will be used in week one of the term which &lt;br /&gt;
starts on the third of September. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The second entry contains the description of &lt;br /&gt;
the milestone that shows up on the milestone ladder when the cursor hovers over the milestone icon.&lt;br /&gt;
The teacher clicks on the third entry (&#039;done&#039;) to complete the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Done====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Adding_a_milestone_2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the teacher is satisfied, he or she clicks on the green check mark to commit the changes. A click on the X cancels the changes. Note that this screen can also be used to delete a milestone and to rearrange the sequence of milestones (when there are more than one).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Creating Activities===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Course_with_milestone.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now the empty course has a milestone. Note the cap of the milestone is blue since the milestone is on the XO.&lt;br /&gt;
Next, the teacher clicks on the milestone. Naturally, this reveals an empty milestone with no activities on &lt;br /&gt;
the activity ladder. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:empty_activity_ladder.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A typical milestone has sufficient activities so that a typical student will take a week to &lt;br /&gt;
complete it. If a teacher equates an activity to a lesson requiring one class period to complete, the number of activities is likely to be four to five. If the teacher expects some or most of the activities to be completed outside of class, this number can double. The guiding concept is that completing a milestone should represent achievement of an important learning objective. The number and nature of the activities should be proportional so that the student does not become discouraged. A milestone with forty activities would certainly be daunting!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:new_activity_1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create an activity, as before, the teacher clicks on the edit button in the header. The difference is that &lt;br /&gt;
the teacher has a number of choices in the type of activity. In this case, the teacher selects t00 for a basic &lt;br /&gt;
activity. The other options will be described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:new_activity_2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In a similar way, the teacher assigns a label and description to the activity. In this case, the teacher has &lt;br /&gt;
labeled the activity as &#039;I&#039; to show the type of activity, &#039;introduction&#039;.  As before when the teacher is satisfied, he or she clicks on the green check mark to commit the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Creating Basic Activities===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:activity_5.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The teacher clicks on the activity. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:activity_6.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the default activity created by the Learn activity. The teacher clicks on the edit button to &lt;br /&gt;
enter the edit mode [ckeditor].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Editor===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:editor_1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default lesson is loaded into the editor. The buttons on the header to the right are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#save - click on this button to save changes&lt;br /&gt;
#audio - add an audio track to the lesson - explained below&lt;br /&gt;
#image - add an image to the lesson - explained below&lt;br /&gt;
#quit - quit activity, not normally used in this context&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The arrow to the left of the header leaves the edit mode and returns to the activity. If the user &lt;br /&gt;
returns to the activity before clicking on the save button, changes will be lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:editor_4.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The editor is WYSIWYG (What you see is what you get). However, the actual appearance of the lesson will &lt;br /&gt;
differ because of the different style sheets applied. In addition, images are not shown in edit mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The editor has a toolbar with icons. Most of these icons are common to most editors. There are three &lt;br /&gt;
rows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First row:&lt;br /&gt;
*Source - switches the view from WYSIWYG to the html view.  &lt;br /&gt;
*Cut, copy, and paste are the first three icons in the second block.&lt;br /&gt;
*The rounded arrows in the next block are for &#039;undo&#039; and &#039;do&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
*The two in the third block are  &#039;find&#039; and &#039;find and replace&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The remaining icons in this row are not useful in this context.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Second row:&lt;br /&gt;
*The first block formats text: bold, italic, underline, and strike-through. The next two set the superscript and &lt;br /&gt;
subscript modes, respectively. &lt;br /&gt;
*The icons in the second block set numbered or bullet list modes, increase or decrease indent. Skipping two icons,&lt;br /&gt;
there are icons to control alignment: left, center, right, and justify.&lt;br /&gt;
*The fourth icon in the last block inserts a horizontal rule. This is used to mark the boundary between screens in a multiple-screen lesson. The next two insert special characters such as a smiley or a division symbol. The last two are not useful in this context.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Third row:&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;styles&#039; selects a style to use, the ones available are not very useful in this context.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;Format&#039; defaults to normal text. However, use this list to select various style headers. For example, &lt;br /&gt;
the lesson title is normally Heading 1. Sub-title may be Heading 2 and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;Font&#039; allows selection of a font to use. Changing font is not often needed in this context.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;Size&#039; allows a change in the font size. To change the font size, you must first &#039;select&#039; the text to &lt;br /&gt;
apply the change to. Move the cursor to the left of the first character to be changed. Hold the left &lt;br /&gt;
mouse button down while moving the cursor along the line of text. The background of the text will turn dark to &lt;br /&gt;
show that the text is selected. Release the left mouse key when the correct text is selected. Now change the&lt;br /&gt;
font-size.&lt;br /&gt;
*The next two icons allow change to the text color and to the background color respectively. This works the &lt;br /&gt;
same way as &#039;font-size&#039;, you select the text and then select a color. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:editor_2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This image shows the beginning of the lesson. The title could be centered by using the center icon on the toolbar. Select the title as described above and click on the center-alignment icon. The A section title &lt;br /&gt;
could be a Heading 2. Select the text (including the A.) and click on the second list in the bottom row. A &lt;br /&gt;
list of formats appears, click on Heading 2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:editor_3.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The teacher has clicked on the &#039;save&#039; icon (an image of a &#039;floppy drive&#039;) and then clicked on the right arrow &lt;br /&gt;
to return to the activity. The activity now shows the text entered in the editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Adding Images===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:image_1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking on the camera icon in the header will (after some moments) show this screen. It shows thumbnails of all &lt;br /&gt;
of the images available to be added to the lesson. In this case, these are the screen shots I used in &lt;br /&gt;
preparing this page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The images are those found in the Journal plus any images in /home/olpc/Documents. In recent builds of Sugar, &lt;br /&gt;
this folder is visible in the Journal and acts like a mounted usb drive. This means that images obtained from &lt;br /&gt;
the internet, a digital camera or a mobile phone can be copied to a usb drive. When this drive is mounted, it will appear at the bottom of the Journal screen along with an icon for the /home/olpc/Downloads folder. By selecting the usb drive (or SD card) containing the images, the relevant ones can be dragged to the folder. Alternatively, the images can be dragged to the Journal. In either case, a thumbnail will appear on this screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:image_2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this case, the middle image in the top row was selected (click on the thumbnail). This screen allows the teacher to specify the size and location of the image. The width of 600 represents one-half of the screen. The height of 450 gives a 4:3 aspect ratio.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The next entry specifies the screen on which the image will appear. In single-screen lessons this is, of course, 1.&lt;br /&gt;
In multi-screen lessons, the teacher might want a different image on each screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An entry of 1L specifies that the image should be at the top left of the screen. An entry of 1R specifies the right side. An entry of 1 specifies the image should be centered. When the image is on the left, text will appear to its right. If right is specified, text will appear to the left. When an image is centered, text will begin &lt;br /&gt;
below the image.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The teacher clicks on the OK entry to commit the change.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:image_3.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This shows the image in the lesson. Since 1L was entered, the image is on the left with text to the right.&lt;br /&gt;
Note: images currently can only be located at the top of a screen and only one image can be on each screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Adding Audio Clips===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clipping on the microphone adds an audio clip to the lesson. It works the same way as the image icon &lt;br /&gt;
except that the user only needs to click on the correct audio clip since no location or size information is &lt;br /&gt;
needed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A lesson with an audio clip shows a play button in the left-side of the footer. It is a toggle so that &lt;br /&gt;
when the audio is playing it shows a &#039;pause&#039; symbol. The audio continues if play is pressed after a pause.&lt;br /&gt;
To restart the audio, it is necessary to go back to the activity ladder and select the activity again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Adding Questions===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An interactive quiz can easily be added to any lesson/activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:quiz_in_editor.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The quiz is entered in edit mode using a special format developed by Moodle called &#039;gift&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The questions are entered between the following lines:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
/*Quiz&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     questions go here&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
/* &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The word Quiz (capitol Q) must be entered after /* with no spaces. The &#039;*/&#039; is on a separate line. The questions are entered between these two lines separated by a blank line. Here are some example questions:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
/*Quiz &lt;br /&gt;
The Learn activity is part of the Karma Learning System.{T}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The OLPC laptop is often referred to by two letters. What are they? {=XO =xo}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There {=are} many people world-wide supporting the OLPC project. [is are]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One of these organizations is not related to the others. Which one? {=CIA ~OLPC ~Sugarlabs ~Red Hat}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*/ &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The first question is True-False. Answers are shown between braces &#039;{ }&#039;. The answer to a True-False question may be any of T, t, True, true, F, f, False, false. Note that, unlike the other answers, an equal sign &#039;=&#039; is not needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The second question is short answer. Acceptable answers (one or more) are given between braces. In this case, XO and xo will be accepted as correct. Xo and xO would be considered incorrect.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The third question is a cloze. It is identical to the short answer except the braces are within the text. The student will see a blank (underlines) where the braces are entered along with a place to enter the answer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The fourth question is multiple-choice. The choices are given between braces. The correct answer is indicated by the equal sign &#039;=&#039;. The incorrect choices (distractors) are indicated by the tilde sign &#039;~&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The quiz is created when the lesson is saved. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:quiz question.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the student opens the lesson, there will be a &#039;Start&#039; button shown on the bottom right of the screen. The screen gives information (e.g. a diagram) needed to answer the questions and/or instructions on answering the questions (e.g. round your answer to two decimal places).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the student presses the Start button, he is given the questions one at a time in the order they appear in the lesson (not randomized).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This capability is based on the jquizme library.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using Karma Templates===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating an activity, the teacher can choose among a menu of activity types from t00 - a basic activity &lt;br /&gt;
to t20.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:new_activity_1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activity types are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#t00 Basic - a normal textbook-style lesson with optional images, audio, or quiz components.&lt;br /&gt;
#t01 Adding up to 10 - a Karma game which currently has no options for customization.&lt;br /&gt;
#t02 Crossword - a crossword puzzle to find a hidden word. A teacher can create a custom crossword puzzle.&lt;br /&gt;
#t03 Hangman - a traditional hangman. A teacher can provide the wordlist.&lt;br /&gt;
$t04 Identification - not currently usable&lt;br /&gt;
#t05 Mad-libs - A teacher can provide the clues and story.&lt;br /&gt;
#t06 Matching - a Karma implementation of Concentration. The teacher can provide the words and images.&lt;br /&gt;
#t07 Matching Pairs - a matching activity. The teacher can provide the list of matching words.&lt;br /&gt;
#t08 Multiple-choice sentence - multiple choices for words in the sentence (e.g. is/are). The teacher can supply the word choices and sentences.&lt;br /&gt;
#t09 Puzzle - rearrange pieces of a picture in alphabetical or numerical order to see the completed picture. The teacher can supply images.&lt;br /&gt;
#t10 Quick Arithmetic - student is challenged to provide sums mentally. Currently customizing is not supported.&lt;br /&gt;
#t11 Scrambled sentences - not operational&lt;br /&gt;
#t14 Vocabulary - not operational&lt;br /&gt;
#t15 Vocabulary with game - not operational&lt;br /&gt;
#t16 What is this? - matching images against words. The teacher can supply words and images (images not automated).&lt;br /&gt;
#t17 Anagram - rearrange letters to form a word naming an image. Teacher can supply words and images (images not automated).&lt;br /&gt;
#t18 Maths introduction - not operational&lt;br /&gt;
#t19 Maths guided practice - not operational&lt;br /&gt;
#t20 Maths evaluation - not operational&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The best way to see how these activity types work is to go to the Laboratory and in any course add a milestone.&lt;br /&gt;
Then add activities selecting the various types. The result is an example of the activity type. By entering &lt;br /&gt;
the editmode, the source.txt file defining that activity is shown. It can be edited to make a custom version &lt;br /&gt;
that fits the milestone. For example, a crossword could be constructed using some words from the week&#039;s vocabulary list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of these templates were created by Peter Gijsels in a visit to Rwanda in 2011. They illustrate how &lt;br /&gt;
activities can be created using the Karma library and html5 web techniques (css, javascript, jquery). It is intended that this library be expanded to include more useful educational activity types.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using Sugar Activities===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is currently no automated support for creating these lessons. It requires some command-line knowledge. &lt;br /&gt;
When a lesson is opened in the edit mode, the file being edited is &#039;source.txt&#039;. The first line of this file &lt;br /&gt;
contains a directive to launch a specific Sugar activity, e.g.,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;!--B:TurtleArt,lines_lesson.ta,application/x-turtle-art--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For technical reasons, this line appears in the edit mode as:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 /*B:TurtleArt,lines_lesson.ta,application/x-turtle-art*/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The source.txt file uses html5 markup in which &amp;lt;!-- and --&amp;gt; enclose a comment. As a result, this line is &lt;br /&gt;
not visible in the editor. By converting the markup to /* */, the user can create and edit this line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The B: is required to signal this comment contains a directive. There are three parts to the directive separated by commas:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#name of the Sugar activity. This is the same as the name in /home/olpc/Activities minus the activity. &lt;br /&gt;
So Turtle Art (Blocks) appears as /home/olpc/Activities/TurtleArt.activity. &lt;br /&gt;
#file name of the activity bundle (lines_lesson.ta) including the file extension. This bundle must be in &lt;br /&gt;
the folder for this lesson in Learn. &lt;br /&gt;
#mime_type of the bundle. The mime_type of a bundle is given in /home/olpc/Activities/TurtleArt.activity/activity/activity.info. For &#039;some.activity&#039;, look in /home/olpc/Activities/some.activity/activity/activity.info.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A Sugar activity can be launched as a new start by:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
/*B:some.activity*/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Learn.activity creates a Journal object with the bundle file as data. It then resumes the activity from this Journal object.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that not all activities are able to resume from a Journal object and not all activities support processing data files. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to quit the launched activity when finished to return to the Learn activity. Sugar treats the launched activity as a window opened by Learn and so gets confused if the user tries to return to Learn via the frame.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Integration in the Karma Learning System==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When Learn is used with a school server as part of the Karma Learning System, the subjects, courses, milestones, and activities are stored on the school server. Students are assigned laptops by the school so that KLS knows the grade level of each student (and the staff status of members of the staff). Learn on the first launch downloads the content needed to start for students based on their grade. Staff see a milestone ladder where the cap may be blue as seen in the screenshots above or a light blue (cyan). Milestones with a cyan cap are not downloaded to the laptop. A click on the milestones causes the milestone to be downloaded. In this way teachers can look at and edit any activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As part of KLS, Learn stores the results of each activity in the Journal. When the laptop connects with the schoolserver, a backup script uploads new journal entries to the school server. Journal entries which produced documents are uploaded to the Journal. Other entries are uploaded to the log. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In KLS, the Journal is kept on the school server. The laptop has some, but not all of the entries. This offers three advantages: (1) if storage becomes full on the laptop, deleting Journal entries only deletes the local copy. The Journal item is still available when needed, (2) if a laptop becomes unusable, the student can begin working with a different one retaining full access to his Journal from the previous laptop, and (3) there are no &#039;empty&#039; Journal entries with titles of xyz.activity. The user must supply a meaningful name for each Journal entry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
KLS provides the teacher with access to a class list. For each student, the list shows the current status of that student in each course (the milestone and activity last completed). The teacher can &#039;drill down&#039; by clicking on the status - to see a complete list of milestones and activities completed. Click on a milestone and activity shows the number of attempts, total time spent, the result, and any other details such as questions and answers to quizzes. This information is derived from the students Journal and log stored on the school server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As a part of KLS, Learn provides download of milestones from the school server. Milestones and activities modified by the teacher may be uploaded to the school server and, thus, become available to students. If the student has already downloaded a milestone, he or she won&#039;t see the change. A reset button is provided on the header of the activity ladder for the milestone which will delete the local copy and download the updated copy.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tony37</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>